Home

User Guide - Galco Industrial Electronics

1. l 4 4Aor5 AB0668A 10 2 J 22 below bus bar Chapter 10 Renewal Parts AB0669A Chapter 10 a 75 4 bottom of drive back of drive 10 4 40 100HP 230VAC 75 200HP 460VAC SERIES A Reference Number 1 Je w N 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 1 Refer to parts publication for model specific quantity information Chapter 10 Renewal Parts Description Armature Pulse Board Digital Reference Adapter Board Discrete Adapter Board Feedback Board Field Pulse Board Main Control Board Multi Communication Board ControlNet Adapter Board Node Adapter Board Power Stage Interface Board Power Supply Board Auxiliary Contact N O Contactor 3 Pole w DB Contactor 2 Pole Contactor Coil Contactor Suppressor SP 1 Fans Fuses 600V 25A
2. Table 7 A Cont PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT 85 Torque Mode 1 Q0 5 EE 626 272H Ramp Enable 0 0 1 EE Ramp Cntrl Set Up 627 273H Flux Mode Select Field Flux Control S et Up 628 274H Proc Trim Select 0 0 2 EE Process Trim Control S et Up 629 275H MTR Overload Sel 1 0 4 EE Fault Detection S etup 630 276H Fault Report 1 0 1 EE X Fault Detection Set Up 631 277H Vel Filter Sel 0 0 2 EE Velocity Ref Cntrl Setup 632 278H Warning Select 2 Fault Detection S etup 633 279H Preset Speed 1 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 634 27AH Preset Speed 2 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 635 27BH Preset Speed 3 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 636 27CH Preset Speed 4 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 637 27DH Preset Speed 5 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 638 27EH og Speed 1 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 639 27FH 0g Speed 2 RP 0 6xB S 16xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl S pd Ref 641 281H OP Accel 1 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 642 282H OP Accel2 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 643 283H OP Accel 3 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 644 284H OP Accel4 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 645 285H OP Decel 1 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 646 286H OP Decel 2 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 647 287H OP Decel 3 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP
3. 2 18 Table of Contents Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC Series 75 200 HP 460VAC Series A Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC Series B 250 600 HP 460VAC Series B Medium KVA MKVA ii Chapter 3 Introduction csse e Rem e RR REF EEE red rg 3 1 Terminology 3 1 Hardware Ovetyview rise sew RR ERR x RR e Re ERN 3 1 Armature Bridge Components 3 3 Field Bridge Components 3 5 Control Boards ae bera de aged tei ere 3 7 Peripheral Devices 3 13 Power Distribution nep ene n Rex naan whales 3 14 Relay Lost er Re RR Meee RUE Y Yu 3 17 Options 0 eal ae RE ee ae Eae Ee 3 19 Discrete Adapter 3 21 Digital Reference Adapter Board 3 21 Node Adapter Board 3 22 Multi Communication 3 22 ControlNet Adapter Board 3 23 Chapter 4 Introduction eee e Rr e Re Ere EY re Reg 4 1 Terminology 4 1 Hardware Overviews ecce 4 2 Armature Bridge Components 4 3 Field Bridge Components 4 5 Control Boards
4. 1395 Block Description 2222 2 22 Chapter 6 Chapter Objectives i setas ese use Environment Mounting sensro EP wag edad GR de Reste Cooling Aimtlow bese cer eres rr E y ERE NEMA Type 12 Enclosures Clearance emere ee ge Rer aw e ee m a Discontect s cies edo edax EM Rene A Xu hae Wire Size i ccs re e teres Grounding Procedures Power Wirihg sese eese mcm be a ARR e EAE a e Power Wiring Procedure i e theca seh RERBA hades Circuit Board Jumper Connections Control Connections ciues eer Deed aw Ree Adapter Boatds 5455 ee Rhe RR EA REESE Cae Armature Current Ratings Chapter 7 Introduction 1 545 vu 452 ETS DERG UD EGER Terminology 3 m eek ches hos rere Riva Parameter Table Structure Data E gh Wig ga x RR ipa Parameter Table Storage Parameter Descriptions Parameters 6 1 6 1 6 1 lil Table of Contents Start Up Reference Materials Renewal Parts I
5. explanation of terminals 1 2and3 is provided on pg 6 22 TB3 24 V OUT 12 17 24 OUT a 24 V ECOAST 24 V ECOAST a E 115V COMMON OUT 5 115V ECOAST 2 El 115V ECOAST 1 HOT RESET IN MOTOR TEMP IN FAULTED From Main SYSTRIP Control Board DCPILOT Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC The control voltage being applied to K2 may be monitored on the Power Stage Interface at TP21 If K3 is being commanded to energize the voltage at TP21 will be OVDC If K3 is to be de energized the voltage at TP21 will be 24VDC Figure 2 10 Relay Logic Armature HST1 HST2 Bridge 12 11 ECOAST 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SYSTRIP PSI SWITCHER 2 13 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Options 2 14 Programming Terminal Interface The Programming Terminal shown in Figure 2 11 is used to access information in the firmware of the 1395 Keypads on both the handheld programming terminal and the door mounted terminal can be used to perform the following functions Monitor real time parameter values Change parameter values Start Stop the drive depending on Model of Programming Terminal Program drive configuration Save parameter values to EEPROM Monitor fault information Clear faults system reset Autotune Interface between the 1395 Main Control Board and the handheld Programming Terminal
6. Scaling Parameter Value Raw Adapter Units The Scaling Parameter Value should then be entered into the associated analog input scaling set up parameter This procedure will be correct to within 5 Verify that the scaling is correct by measuring the actual motor velocity with a hand tachometer Fine tune the scaling by adjusting the appropriate value to minimize any error Any drift at zero speed can be minimized by adjusting the offset parameter associated with the channel in use Analog Output Figure 6 21 shows typical analog and digital output connections Figure 6 21 Typical Output Connections TB3 34 ANALOG OUT 0 to 10VDC 1mA Maximum 38 ANALOG OUT COM IMPORTANT Connect shield to drive end only Other end is to be insu lated and lett floating TET one Analog Output Connections TB3 DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 Dry Contacts 0 6A at 125VAC 2A at 30VDC DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 Digital Output Connections 6 33 Chapter 6 Installation 6 34 Digital Reference Adapter Board The Digital Reference Adapter Board is connected to Microbus Port A with wiring to external devices at terminals 23 to 62 of TB3 The drive is shipped pre configured meaning that all of the inputs and outputs are linked to a predefined signal Figure 6 23 shows the 1395 standard configuration for the Digital Reference Adapter Board The drive has the flexibility to be reconfigured for the applica
7. 2000A for P52 Multi Communications Adapter 77 125HP 230V Regenerative 250 300HP Port B A78 150HP 230V Regenerative P54EN ControlNet Adapter Board A79 200HP 230V Regenerative Port A or B A80 250HP 230 Regenerative PZ No Adapter A81 300HP 230V Regenerative x2 Lug Kit Multiple Options are separated by dashes Limited to one adapter in Port A and one adapter in Port B 460 Volt AC Input 250 600HP First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Bulletin No Horsepower Armature Shunt Options No Letter Letter Type Letter Type 1395 B80N 250HP 460V Non Regen EN No Shunt P30 Discrete Adapter 115VAC Port A B81N 300 460V Non Regen El 1000A for P31 Discrete Adapter 24VDC Port A B82N 400HP 460V Non Regen 250HP P32 Digital Reference Adapter 24VDC B83N 500HP 460 Non Regen E2 1500A for Port A B84N 600HP 460V Non Regen 300 400HP P50 Node Adapter Port B E3 2000A for P52 Multi Communications Adapter B80 250HP 460V Regenerative 500 600HP Port B B81 300HP 460V Regenerative P54EN ControlNet Adapter Board B82 400HP 460V Regenerative Port A or B B83 500HP 460V Regenerative PZ No Adapter B84 600HP 460V Regenerative 2 Lug Kit Multiple Options are separated by dashes Limited to one adapter in Port A and one adapter in Port B Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication R eferences Publication References This update
8. 460VAC Terminal TB2 8 amp 9 40 100 230VAC 75 200 460VAC Terminal TB5 8 amp 9 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600 460VAC IMPORTANT If an external control of the contactor is not used place a jumper across the terminals as outlined in Table 6 O 6 27 Chapter 6 Installation Table 6 0 External Contactor Bypass Jumpers Drive Rating 115VAC Input Connection 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 60 100 HP 230VAC TB2 9 75 200 HP 460VAC 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC TB5 8and 9 9 Connect Programming Terminal Connect the 9 pin D style connector of the Programming Terminal to the D style connector labeled DHT mounted on the TB3 mounting rail Refer to the Programming Terminal Installation and Operation Manual for further details 6 28 Adapter Boards Chapter 6 Installation Discrete Adapter Board The Discrete Adapter Board is connected to Microbus Port A with wiring to external devices being accomplished at TB3 terminals 23 to 52 The drive is shipped pre configured meaning that all of the inputs and outputs are linked to a predefined signal Figure 6 17 shows the 1395 standard configuration for the Discrete Adapter Board The user has the flexibility to configure the drive for a particular application Refer to the Discrete Adapter Manual for detailed information 115VAC Connection The 115VAC power source can be wired to be referenced or not referenced to common z
9. 5 Reset In if 620 0 11 24VDC Motor Thermostat 2 Terminal Voltage Source ig 1 oror tempan lt Common In 6 30 Chapter 6 Installation 24VDC Connection Digital Input Sizing of the power supply is based on the number of input and output selections Figure 6 18 shows the typical connection of the digital input using the external power supply Analog Input Velocity and Trim Reference Connections for the velocity and trim reference inputs can be for uni or bi directional operation using the internal drive 10VDC power supply see Fig 6 19 Figure 6 18 Typical 24VDC Digital Input Connections using External Power Supply TB3 24V DC Common DIGITAL COMMON 24V DC High wal 9 48 DIGITALI 1 Jog 2 O DIGITAL IN 2 Start E l O DIGITAL IN 3 Clear Faults LI DIGITAL IN 4 External to the Drive Figure 6 19 Typical Analog Input Connections TB3 TB3 Forward Reverse IMPORTANT Connect to either terminal 31 or 32 Not Both 10V DC P S ANALOG INPUT Reference 2 5k Ohm Minimum P S COMMON TB4 TB 10 on 125 600 HP Uni directional Operation 10V DC P S 10V DC P S ANALOG INPUT M IE Reference 2 5k Ohm Minimum P S COMMON IMPORTANT Connect shield to drive end only Other end is to be insu lated and left floating TB4 TB 10 on 125 600 HP External to the Drive Bi directional Operation
10. 673 FLUX 4096 BYPASS INTEGRATOR FDBK WHEN ON LIMIT CEMF 687 CEMF PRELOAD From ABS sheet 2 LS A s FDBK CEMF PI CONTROL 5 36 Chapter 5 Functional Description CURRENT PI CONTROL ARM CUR I ARM CURRENT FIRE ANG RU V 2048 90 DEG 2048 1PU VOLTS 113 114 ARMATURE PI ARMATURE BRIDGE SCR GATE sel 735 KP 4096 CONTROL 736 4096 ARMATURE CURRENT PI CONTROL DISCONTINUOUS CURRENT ADAPTION DISCONTINUOUS FLUX COMMAND 115 AUTO To Sheet 2 ie FIELD CONTROL 4096 IPU FIELD AMPS 737 KP 4096 738 4096 677 FLD 19 0 8 FLUX 679 FLD 19 2 8 FLUX 681 FLD 19 4 8 FLUX 682 FLD I 5 8 FLUX FIELD BRIDGE k FLD x3 Rate Fld Mtr Cur BRDGI x 8 683 FLD I 6 8 FLUX FIELD 684 FLD I 7 8 FLUX CURRENT 685 FLD I 1 0 FLUX FIELD PI CONTROL IREF FIELD FLUX SCALING LINERIZATION FEEDBACK CONTROL RATED FLD BRDG I BRIDGE FLA FCT Current Fdbk FIELD FLA 11 FIELD FIELD FDBK gt 118 CURRENT 1536 RATED FIELD 4096 FIELD FLA CT BRIDGE FLA BRIDGE FLA ACT1 amp ACT2 Arm Current Fdbk ARM FLA lt AMP gt 112 X 4 4096 ARM FLA ARMATURE ARM FDBK CURRENT 1024 RATED FIELD CT BRIDGE FLA AC LINE 4096 VOLTAGE AC LINE T 11 VOLTAGE RATED V 6 SENSE AC VOLTAGE FDBK RATED AC LINE ARM Volt ARMATURE EM Fdbk i VOLTAGE 512 RATED V 105 SENSE ARM VOLTAGE K ARM VOLT
11. n T3 c2 MFG Revision No Spare Parts Kit G21 G22 T4 D10 R9 0660 4 12 Peripheral Devices Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Unit Power Supply The Unit Power Supply 115VAC input comes from the user external 115VAC power supply The AC voltage is rectified and regulated to produce 5 and 12VDC control voltages which are distributed to the 1395 control boards through the Power Stage Interface Figure 4 10 shows the location of the Unit Power Supply Figure 4 10 Location of Unit Power Supply Power Supply Board 0658 4 13 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Power Distribution 115VAC Control Voltage Figure 4 11 illustrates the distribution of 4 14 115VAC control voltage within the Bulletin 1395 Single phase 115 VAC control voltage provided from an external source by the user enters the drive at TB5 4 and 5 Fuse F4 provides protection against short circuits on the 115VAC input to the drive terminal block TB6 an internal terminal block Figure 4 11 115VAC Control Voltage Distribution i F5 20 15 see iid 4 12 pr 2 1
12. A68 A69 A70 71 72 AT3 74 75 76 1 5 HP 2HP 3HP 5HP 7 5 10HP 15 20 25 40HP 50HP 60HP 75HP 100HP Letter Standard Cl 1 ISHP C2 20 30HP C3 40 50HP C4 60 75HP C5 100HP Dynamic Braking D1 1 I5HP D2 20 30HP D3 40 50HP D4 60 75 D5 100HP P10 X1 Fourth Position Options Letter Description P10 Discrete Adapter 115 VAC Port A Pll Discrete Adapter 24VDC Port A P12 Digital Reference Adapter Port A P50 Node Adapter Port B P51 Multi Communication Adapter Port B PS4EN ControlNet Adapter Board Port A or B PZ No Adapter Other Options Auxiliary Contact 1 N O 1 N C standard on 100 HP Multiple options are separated by dashes Limited to one adapter in port A and one adapter in Port B 1 7 Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication R eferences 460 Volt AC Input 2 200HP 1395 B63 10 First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Bulletin No Horsepower Contactor Type Options 1395 Non Regenerative Letter HP Letter HP Letter Description B63N 2HP Standard P10 Discrete Adapter 115 VAC Port A B64N 3HP 2 30HP P11 Discrete Adapter 24VDC Port A B65N 5HP C2 40 6 P12 Digital Reference Adapter Port A B66N 7 5 C3 75 100HP P50 Node Adapter Por
13. Allen Bradley Bulletin 1395 Digital DC Drive Firmware Versions 5 xx to 10 10 9 30 User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Allen Bradley Sales Office or online at http www ab com manuals gi describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will the Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation the Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Allen Bradley Company with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of t
14. NOTE For DC motor armature time constants in the range of 1 to 100 milliseconds Parameter 744 should be set to zero 2 1s the default value In order to determine the desired time delay some additional application information is required and the following equation solved ta 0 03 19 L43 Vq Time delay in seconds where Ip Rated armature bridge amps of the 1395 La Inductance of the load in Henrys when the load current is 0 03 10 Vq 1 169 V where V11 the lowest average line to line voltage input to the 1395 at a particular installation Example Assume a load with a 10 Henry inductance a drive rated a 75 amps and a 460VAC line that could dip to 90 of nominal ta 0 03 75 10 1 169 414 0 0649 would be the desired delay for this application Using this value in the equation for calculating the time delay for Parameter 744 60Hz 0 04649 2 78 10 3 1 1x10 and rearranging to solve for n n 0 04649 1 1 x 10 3 2 78 X 103 16 33 Rounding to the next highest integer 17 would be the value programmed into Parameter 744 If additional safety margin is desired the number 20 might be suitable for this application 7 69 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Added in Firmware Version 10 10 Added in Firmware Version 10 10 7 70 Parameter 745 K Discontinuous Fraction K Disc Fraction Internal units 10240 2800h Full Load Current Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum
15. Output Horsepower Continuous Output Current Field Voltage Field Current Field Control Field Economy Armature Firing Output Waveform Controller Current Output Armature Control Speed Regulation Encoder DC Tachometer Armature Voltage Full Wave Regen 12 SCR w Full Wave 1 Field Regulator 150 460VAC 10 3 phase 1 5 kVA to 660 kVA 50 60Hz 3 Hz 3 5 Hz Sec 240VDC 230VAC Input 400VDC 380 415 AC Input 500VDC 460VAC Input 1 to 300 HP 240VDC 1 5 to 500 HP 400VDC 2 to 600 HP 500VDC 3 6 to 980A 120 150VDC 230VAC 200 250VDC 380VAC 220 270VDC 415VAC 240 300VDC 460VAC Field Voltage Source is selectable between internal or external supply 1 30HP 230V 2 60HP 460V Drive 150mA 10 Amperes Continuous 40 100HP 230V 75 200HP 460V Drive 650mA 20 Amperes continuous 125 300HP 230V 250 600HP 460V Drive 650mA 40 Amperes continuous A 6 1 speed range with an encoder or DC tach feedback Programmable enable time delay power on standby Phase sequence insensitive Regenerative Non regenerative 6 pulse full wave NEMA Code C 150 for one minute 200 for 10 seconds 260 for 5 seconds Tapered current limit di dt limit Instanta neous overcurrent Programmable motor overload 0 0146 of set speed over a 10 1 speed range 0 00146 of top speed over a 100 1 speed ra
16. Parameter 153 Velocity Reference Fraction Vel Ref Fraction Internal units 65535 ffffh base motor speed 4096 Programming Terminal units None Description This word supplies the fractional part of an external velocity reference when external velocity control has been selected in the Logic Command word The data contained in this word represents the low order fractional portion of a 32 bit velocity reference The motor base speed value is always equated to the following number representation Parameter 154 Parameter 153 4 096 Use of this parameter allows extended resolution when specifying an external velocity reference Note that a value of 32768 8000h is equivalent to 1 2 of 1 unit of reference in Parameter 154 Similarly 16384 4000h is equivalent to 1 4 of 1 unit of reference and 65535 ffffh is equivalent to 65535 65536 or 1 unit of reference In this way Parameter 153 can be thought of as a means of specifying an additional fraction of one unit of velocity reference for Parameter 154 If fraction resolution is not needed then Parameter 153 should not be linked and its value will be defaulted to zero Parameter 154 Velocity Reference Whole Vel Ref Whole Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description This word supplies the whole number part of an external velocity reference when external velocity control has been selected in the Logic Command wor
17. 5 131313 Encoder Velocity Table 7 A Parameters UNITS RP RP RP RP RP AMP AMP VLT AMP AMP VLT RPM INIT MIN MAX Chapter 7 Programming Parameters EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT Fast Source Fast Source Fast Source Fast Source Fast Source from Parameter 840 Fast Source from Parameter 841 Fast Source from Parameter 842 Fast Source from Parameter 843 Fast Source from Parameter 844 Fast Sink Fast Sink Fast Sink Fast Sink Logic Control Fault Detection Ramp Control Ramp Control Velocity R ef Control Feedback Control Velocity Fdbk Control Velocity Fdbk Control Velocity PI Control Velocity PI Control Torque Select Current Ref Control Feedback Control Current PI Control Current PI Control Field Flux Control Feedback Control Field Flux Control Feedback Control Process Trim Control Software Test Point Software Test Point Software Test Point 7 5 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters PARM 123 124 125 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 200 201 202 203 204 250 251 252 253 254 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 7 6 HEX 7BH 7CH 7DH 96H 97H 98H 99H 9AH 9CH 9DH 9FH 0 A2H A3H A4H A5H A6H ATH C8H C9H CAH CBH CCH FAH FBH FCH FDH FEH 12CH 12DH 12EH 12FH 130H 131H 132H 133H NAME Velocity PI Output Velocity Error Process Trim Inpu
18. 5 35 Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 5 Sheet 3 of 3 1395 Block Diagram CURRENT REFERENCE CONTROL 4096 1PU TORQUE ARM CURRENT AUTO TUNE Torque Command 110 GAIN 4096 100 Rated Torque MOTOR FLA From Sheet 1 TORQUE FLUX BRIDGE FLASPX4 FLUX COMPENSATION FLUX COMMAND ARMATURE CURRENT REF 1 LIMIT SCALING ARMATURE Fwd Brdg Cur FEEDBACK Lim 663 FWD TORQUE Min Taper Cur Es t2 Lim 667 i FLUX MODE SELECT Rev Brdg Cur REV TORQUE To 827 Lim 664 Sheet 2 No Flux Comp Strt Taper Spd LIMIT End Taper Spd 666 FLUX COMMAND TORQUE TAPER FLUX 1PU F rux MODE SELECT DISABLE DIVIDE 627 FIELD FLUX CONTROL BY FLUX CT FLUX ir SELEOT Field Weaken Enable Field Economy Enable o Fdbk Device Type 621 M Fld Econ Ref 674 Fid Flux Ref 676 o DRIVE STOPPED STOPPED 1 FLD ECON SEC ovem SEE FIELD SELECT WEAKENING 33 410 SELECT FLUX MODE 10 FLUX FIELD WEAKENING CONTROL ud Ext Feed for Enable 627 4096 1 PU FLUX 3 CEMF Control Enable FLUX FEED FWD 159 160 CEMF REF 4096 1PU CEMF CEMF REF FLUX FEED FORWARD SELECT 4096 CEMF REFERENCE FLUX MODE VELOC SELECT SELECT ITY 627 FDBK 4 196 HOLD CEMF RESET From Sheet 2 PPM ABs cos Capa AY 4096 Base Mtr RPM PI ERROR 2 20 4096 672 KIFLUXI277
19. Terminology Chapter Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Medium KVA MKVA Chapter 4 contains both a general description of the major hardware components of the Series B drive and background information to support the procedures detailed in other chapters of this manual You should use this chapter in conjunction with the Installation chapter when installing 125 300HP 230VAC and 250 600HP 460VAC Series B Drives A brief description of new terms and concepts covered in Chapter 4 is presented here Adapter Board Circuit board containing hardware and software required to interface external devices such as Allen Bradley PLC or Discrete I O devices to the 1395 Series B drive Interface Hardware and associated software required to transfer information and or control signals from one device to another Microbus Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information at the microprocessor level The microbus is used for transfer of information between adapter boards and the main control board Port Hardware located on the main control board which allows for connection of one adapter board to the microbus There are two ports on the main control board Programming Terminal Device used for programming and monitoring operation on the 1395 drive The programming terminal is provided in two packages digital handheld terminal and door
20. Transient Voltage Protection 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 Trend 1 Contiguous Trigger Switch 915 7 76 Trend 1 Enable Trend 916 7 77 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 910 7 75 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y 911 7 75 Trend 1 Operator 912 7 75 Trend 1 Output Transmit Rate 917 7 77 Trend 1 Samples After Trigger Condition is True 914 7 16 Trend 1 Sampling Rate 913 7 76 1 14 Trend Buffer 5 18 Activating 5 23 5 25 Continuous Trigger 5 23 Data Sample Rate 5 22 5 24 Example 5 19 One shot 5 23 Output Data Rate 5 25 Output Rate 5 23 Parameters 5 20 Post Samples 5 22 Post Samples Rate 5 24 Programming 5 21 Sample Worksheet 5 20 Setting the Type 5 23 Setup 5 24 Setup Description 5 19 Trend Constant Parameters 5 21 Trend Trigger 5 21 Trigger Equation 5 21 Troubleshooting Aid 5 25 Type 5 24 Trend Constant Logic Value 904 7 73 Trend Constant Logic Value 905 7 73 Trend Constant Logic Value 906 7 74 Trend Constant Logic Value 907 7 74 Trend Constant Signed Value 900 7 72 Trend Constant Signed Value 901 7 72 Trend Constant Signed Value 902 7 73 Trend Constant Signed Value 903 7 73 Trend Constant Unsigned Value 908 7 74 Trend Constant Unsigned Value 909 7 74 Trend Trigger Equation 5 21 Setup 5 21 Trending 5 18 U Unit Power Supply 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 13 125 200 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 13 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustr
21. m 12 y 843 SPINDIRECT4 B 844 SP INDIRECT 5 14 Table 9 E Trend Value Parameters 900 TREND SIGN VALUE 901 TREND SIGN VALUE RENE 900 TRENDSIGNVALUE CC 903 TRENDSIGNVALUE 94 TRENDLOGIC VALUE 1 o 905 TRENDLOGICVALUUE 96 TRENDLOGICVALUE 1 97 TRENDLOGICVALUE 1 o 908 TRENDUNSIGNVALUE CTC 909 TREND UNSIGN VALUE Trend Buffer 1 is linked to parameter Table 9 F Trend Buffer Parameters The output of Trend Buffer 1 is linked to parameter Description TREND 1 Operand Parameter X TREND 1 Operand Parameter Y TREND 1 Operator TREND 1 sample rate TREND 1 post samples TREND 1 multiple trigger TREND 1 enable TREND 1 output rate 9 8 Parameter Range 0 0 99 Description Param Value Trend Buffer 2 is linked to parameter Table 9 F Chapter 9 Reference Materials Trend Buffer Parameters cont The output of Trend Buffer 2 is linked to parameter Parameter Range 1 through 947 1 through 947 GT LT EQ AND NAND OR NOR 0 004 through 30 seconds 20 9 Description TREND 2 Operand Parameter X TREND 2 Operand Parameter Y TREND 2 Operator TREND 2 sample rate TREND 2 post samples TREND 2 multiple trigger TREND 2 enable TREND 2 output rate N N N N Trend Buffer 3 is linked to parameter OFF ON 927 0 004 through 30 seconds Table 9 F Trend Buffer Parameters cont The ou
22. 1 1105 125 300 TB8 1 to 3 250 600 TB8 1 3 e Single phase control voltage must be measured as shown in Table 8 C The voltage should be 115 VAC 10 If not correct the incoming control voltage so it falls within the tolerance range Table 8 C 115VAC Voltage Measurements Horsepower Drive Voltage 115VAC Measurement Points 1 30 230VAC 2 2103 2 60 460VAC TB2 2 to 3 40 100 230VAC TB2 4105 75 200 460VAC 2 4105 125 300 230VAC TB5 4105 250 600 460VAC TB5 4105 Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages 8 5 Chapter 8 Start Up 4 Record the following DC voltage measurements in Tables 8 E to 8 G If any voltage measurement is incorrect refer to the Troubleshooting manual for guidelines e 5 0 15VDC measured at TP 51 with respect to TP 52 on the Main Control Board e 12 0 48VDC measured at TP 55 with respect to TP57 on the Main Control Board e 2 0 48VDC measured at TP56 with respect to TP57 on the Main Control Board e 5 0 15VDC measured at TP58 with respect to TP53 on the Main Control Board e 12 0 48VDC measured at TP54 with respect to TP53 on the Main Control Board e 424 6VDC is measured at the Power Stage Interface PSI as outlined in Table 8 E Table 8 D 24VDC Voltage Me
23. 1000h 1 PU 100 rated arm current Programming Terminal units Amps Description This parameter indicates the latest armature current feedback value Parameter 113 Armature Current PI Output Arm Current PI Out Internal Units 2048 1 pu armature voltage Programming Terminal units None Description This parameter indicates the latest output of the armature current PI regulator Parameter 114 Armature Current Firing Angle Arm Cur Fire Ang Internal Units 2048 90 degrees Programming Terminal units None Description This parameter indicates the latest armature current firing angle angle of retard alpha Parameter 115 Flux Command Flux Command Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU 100 rated field flux Programming Terminal units Percent rated field flux Description This parameter indicates the latest field flux reference value as determined by the field control When field weakening this parameter may be less than the Field Flux Reference Parameter 676 or the Field Economy Reference Parameter 674 100 rated field flux represents the motor field flux present when operating at base motor speed with the rated armature voltage present across the armature For a constant motor speed as field flux is reduced the armature voltage should decrease proportionally The field flux linearization table Parameter 677 thru 685 ensures that the relationship between field flux and armature voltage remains linear
24. 125 300 HP 230VAC Field Transformer MKVA Series 550 600 HP 460VAC FU 230V E M to Field Bridge L3 M T Sized to load 50A 1 The primary of the external field transformer requires branch circuit protection to be fused with FRN or FRS style fuses Referto NEC Code and local codes for sizing 2 As noted the secondary of the external field transformer must be fused with semi conductor type fuses type FWH 25 or FWH 50 depending on Drive HP rating Circuit Board Jumper Connections There are several jumpers located on different boards in the 1395 that are used to configure the drive for a specific application 1 Verify that the motor field current jumper is in the proper location per Table 6 H Obtain the motor full field current data from the motor nameplate The position of the jumper is determined by both the drive current rating and DC shunt field current rating Use the drive current rating to select the column in Table 6 H and the field current to select the field current jumper position 6 18 Chapter 6 Installation Table 6 H Field Current Jumper Setting Field Current Range Field Current Range J1 Jumper 7 1 30 HP 240VDC Ji Jumper 40 100 HP 240VDC 125 300 HP 240VDC on PSI Switcher 2 60 HP 500VDC on Fdbk Bd 75 200 HP 500VDC 250 600 HP 500VDC 1 4 5 to 10 6A DC o1 9110212ADC 1830424ADC 2 2 0to 4 6A DC 2 4 1 to 9 2A DC 8 6 to 18 44 DC 5 3 05t21ADC 3 1 1 to 4 2A DC 2 3 to 8 7A DC 4 0 15 t
25. 2PILOTRTN J1 Co M4Mt 2 s 20V RTN 6120 vac 1COMMON 2 Jn TEMP 3RESET ansv J12 ECOAST1 5115 ECOAST2 6115 J10 COMMON n 7 n srir2 24 ECOAST Ca 1024 ECOAST 11 424v our t2 24v our Q 115V 24V 16 TP6 10 J6 1 I I I oooog I ooooo I I noaounu 10 9 J5 TP8 11 C12 TP10 TP12 2 m O C rP15 TP17 16 18 C TP19 20 12 10 7 2 I Mf 5 1 Q 26 3 10 AB0661A Main Control Board Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 2 30VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Main Control Board A8 The Main Control Board Figure 3 8 performs all control functions of the 1395 drive Hardware located on the board is used to support operation of the microprocessor program The primary functions performed include Microbus interface Control Firmware Analog signal interface Develop gate signals sent to the Power Stage Interface Figure 3 8 Main Control Board Hardware Location Pp d J2 Connection to Power Connection to Stage Interface Board Prog
26. 4 13 Unit Power Supply Illustration 4 13 1395 Drive Armature Current Ratings 6 40 Cable and Wiring Recommendations 6 7 Cable Shielding Recommendations 6 6 1 2 115VAC Control Voltage 3 14 115VAC Control Voltage Illustration 3 14 AC Current Feedback 3 3 AC Line Reactor 3 3 Adapter Board 3 1 3 20 Adapter Board Illustration 3 20 Analog Inputs 3 21 3 22 Analog Outputs 3 21 3 22 Armature Bridge Components 3 3 Armature Bridge Components Illustration 3 3 3 4 Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A2 A3 A4 3 12 Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Il lustration 3 12 Bridge Output Connections 3 4 3 5 Control Boards 3 7 Control Common 3 15 ControINet Adapter Board 3 23 DC Contactor 3 4 DC Control Voltage Distribution 3 15 DC Current Sensing 3 4 DC Power Distribution and Control Common Illustra tion 3 16 Digital Inputs 3 21 Digital Outputs 3 21 3 22 Digital Reference Adapter Board 3 21 Digital Reference Input 3 21 Discrete Adapter Board 3 21 ECOAST Stop 3 17 Feedback Board 3 7 Feedback Board Illustration 3 7 3 8 Feedback Board Jumpers 3 7 Field Bridge Components 3 5 Field Bridge Components Illustration 3 6 Field Current Feedback 3 5 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board 3 5 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A5 3 12 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Illustra tion 3 13 Hardware Descriptio
27. 4096 1000h 100 full motor flux Programming Terminal units percent of full motor field flux Minimum Value 0 02496 Maximum Value 125 Default Value 10096 Description This parameter specifies the full flux reference value for the motor This value is the highest flux reference value that can be applied to the motor field For a drive running below base speed no field weakening this is the flux value that will be in use Parameter 677 Field Current at 0 8 Flux Fld I 0 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 096 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 096 Description This is the first entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 0 armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current This should always be at 0 Parameter 678 Field Current at 1 8 Flux Fld I 1 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 6 6 Description This is the second entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversi
28. 5 23 Chapter 5 Functional Description Trend Setup Determining What to Trend 1 While in the program terminal Drive setup configuration mode 2 Link the Trend Input Parameter associated with the trend buffer to be setup to the Drive parameter you want to trend 3 Link the Trend output parameter if trend data is to be output to an external device NOTE Refer to the tables at the end of Chapter 9 for a listing of the parameter numbers for each trend buffer 1 Select the PARAMETER choice from the program terminal main menu 2 Select the parameter of Operand X for the trend buffer you are setting up Refer to Table 5 C 3 Enter the parameter number which contains the data for the Operand X comparison value 4 Select the parameter of Operand Y for the Trend buffer you are setting up 5 Enter the parameter number which contains the data for the Operand Y comparison value 6 Select the parameter of the Operator for the trend buffer you are setting up 7 Enter the Operator to be used for the Operand comparison Setting the Data Sample Rate 1 Select the Sample Rate parameter for the trend buffer you are setting up 2 Enter the desired sample rate NOTE The Drive will round the desired sample time to the nearest 4ms Setting the Post Samples Rate 1 Select the Post Samples parameter for the trend buffer you are setting up 2 Enter the number of data samples to be taken after a trigger condition occurs
29. 6 31 Chapter 6 Installation 6 32 Tach Velocity The analog tachometer device generates a DC voltage that is direction sensitive and proportional to speed The tach output must be connected to an analog input channel on the Discrete Adapter Board or Digital Reference Board Most industrial tachs have an output greater than the 10V range of the analog inputs The tach output must be scaled down by an external voltage divider network so that the entire speed range of the motor can be represented by a 9V feedback signal greater than 10V directly to the analog input channel can CAUTION Connecting a tach which has an output range severely damage the adapter board The tach signal then must be scaled in the adapter board to determine the proper relationship of output voltage motor velocity to base speed in Drive Units This scaled configuration data must then be linked to Parameter 156 Tach Velocity Many problems relate to the scaling of the tach signals Below is a procedure for checking the scaling of the analog tach feedback for proper drive operation 1 Determine the Volts RPM rating of the tach refer to tach name plate Multiply this rating times the absolute maximum speed the motor will be commanded to accelerate to This value should also be programmed in Parameter 607 Rev Speed Lim and 608 Fwd Speed Lim to assure that the velocity command will be properly clamped Volts RPM Rating x Max Spe
30. Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 12 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 12 Armature Pulse Transformer Boards 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 11 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 11 Armature Regenerative Bridge Components 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 4 Armature Resistance 614 7 35 Armature Sync and Firing Logic Definition 5 5 Armature Voltage 1 4 Armature Voltage Feedback 105 7 20 Armature Voltage Offset Calibration 746 7 70 At Speed 1 704 7 58 At Speed 2 705 7 59 At Speed 3 706 7 59 At Speed 4 707 7 59 At Speed 5 708 7 60 Auto Tune Block Diagram 5 33 Auto Tune Current Limit 698 7 56 Auto Tune Speed 699 7 57 Auto tuning 5 14 Current Loop Test 5 14 Current Loop Tune 5 14 Field Flux Tune 5 14 Velocity Loop Motor Test 5 14 Velocity Loop System Test 5 14 Velocity Loop Tune 5 14 B Base Motor Speed 606 7 33 Basic Parameters Feedback Scaling 8 11 Bridge Output Connections 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 3 5 Bridge Switch Delay Setting 8 11 Bridge Switch Delay 744 7 69 Burden Resistor 8 10 Bus Bar 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 1 4 Bypass Jumpers External Contactor 6 28 C Cable and Wiring Recommendations 6 7 Cable Shielding Recommendations 6 6 Catalog Number Explanation 1 7 CCW Rotation Motor Connections
31. Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Power Board 2 6 The operation of the Power Board components Figures 2 5 and 2 6 is detailed here Gate Firing Pulses The function of the Power Board is to provide the gate firing pulses for the armature and field bridges Transient Voltage Protection The Power Board provides protection against line voltage spikes and transients dv dt for the armature and field SCRs Bus Bar The Power Board acts as an interface board between the SCRs and the Bus Bar All armature SCR connections terminate at the bus bar mounted on the power board Feedback Circuitry All voltage related feedback circuitry is contained on the Power Board All signals are attenuated to logic level voltage Field Connections All user motor field connections are located on TB lon the bottom left edge of the Power Board Fig 2 6 Figure 2 5 shows the location of the power board in the drive while Figure 2 6 illustrates the power board layout outlining the relevant components for user interface Figure 2 5 Power Board Location AB0664A Power Board Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Figure 2 6 Switch and Hardware Location on Power Board 5 CHASSIS GND MOV4 J27 3 PHASE LINE i als xSMaTUBE VOLTAGE SELECTION RMAT
32. Other end is to be insu d lated and left floating 10 on 125 600 HP 55 DRIVE RUNNING Analog Output Connections S AT CURRENT LIMIT External to the Drive Digital Output Connections 6 39 Chapter 6 Installation Armature Current Ratings 6 40 Node Adapter Board The Node Adapter Board is connected to Microbus Port B and is not preconfigured Refer to the Node Adapter manual for configuration and installation information Multi Communication Adapter Board The Multi Communication Board is not preconfigured Refer to the Multi Communication Adapter manual for configuration and installation information Table 6 P Terminal Torque Values Terminals Wire Torque L1 L3 Amps Range In Lbs f gt T8985 Table 6 Q Terminal Torque Values Armature Wire Range Torque Amps of Lug In Lbs 36 55 E 57 80 141 345 250 MCM 2 wires per lug The following tables provide nameplate data information to help you size wires during installation 1 18 Table 6 R 230VAC Input Armature Current Ratings Power Output J9KW AHP 1 2KW 1 5HP 1 5KW 2HP 2 2KW 3HP 3 7KW SHP 5 6KW 7 5HP 7 5KW 10HP 11 2KW 15HP 15KW 20HP 18 7KW 25HP 22 4KW 30HP 29 9KW 40HP 37 3KW 50HP 44 8KW 60HP 56KW 75HP 74 6KW 100HP 93 3KW 125HP 112KW 150HP 149 2KW 200HP 186 5KW 250HP 223 8KW 300HP Chapter 6 Installation ARMATURE AC Input
33. Publication References This Page Intentionally Left Blank Introduction Terminology Hardware Overview Chapter Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 3 6 110 A Series B Chapter 2 contains both a general description of the major hardware components of the1395 Series B drive and background information to support the procedures detailed in other chapters of this manual You should use this chapter in conjunction with the installation Chapter when installing 1 30HP 230VAC and 2 60HP 460VAC Series B Drive A brief description of new terms and concepts covered in Chapter 2 is presented here Adapter Board Circuit board containing hardware and software required to interface external devices such as Allen Bradley PLC or Discrete I O devices to the 1395 drive Interface Hardware and associated software required to transfer information and or control signals from one device to another Microbus Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information at the microprocessor level The microbus is used for the transfer of information between adapter boards and the main control board Port Hardware located on the main control board which allows for connection of an adapter board to the microbus There are two ports on the main control board Programming Terminal Device used for programming and monitoring operation on the 1395
34. dea eee cae es 4 7 Peripheral Devices mei xe ee Os E Re aue 4 13 Power Distribution 4 14 Relay Logic sea bo eee bre voe seed 4 16 OPHONS s pion ta an aha e Peles Ree te 4 18 Discrete Adapter 4 20 Digital Reference Adapter Board 4 20 Node Adapter Board 4 21 Multi Communication 4 21 ControlNet Adapter Board 4 22 Functional Description Installation Programming Parameters Table of Contents Chapter 5 Inttoductioti aes eda RR eh Eqs reg dA Terminology ieee Fes ees Functional Overview Configuration nda baad neg Weed Auto tunning celer chee HES THEN EI rere Current Loop Tuning Velocity Loop Tunifg ccc e REOR m SCR AC Ce e Field Flux TUNNE vac seas cage Rhe RR REP eda Y RS Tre ndihg sco ec E RI Ob een bed ERROR ea Programming a Trend Trend Setup eh ea a e d Re Ed Trending To Aid Troubleshooting General Logic
35. t match the value of Parm 106 a For encoder feedback verify that both Parm 606 and 609 are properly entered b For tachometer feedback verify that the scaling parameters associated with the analog input from the Discrete Adapter Board for the tachometer feedback are properly scaled Scaling should be set so that at base speed the value at Parm 156 is base speed 4096 in drive units 8 Verify correct scaling of Armature current feedback Measure the armature current at the Al or A2 output connections of the Drive Verify that the current measured is equal to the value shown in Parm 112 Arm Current Fdbk If value is incorrect verify that the value of Parm 611 Motor Arm FLA and Parm 615 Rated Arm Brdg I is correct feedback may result in motor damage ATTENTION Failure to verify correct scaling of field current Verify correct scaling of field current feedback Measure the field current by placing a clamp on ammeter at F Verify that the current measured is equal to the value shown in Parm 118 Fld Current Feedback If value is incorrect verify that the value of Parm 612 Rate Fld Mtr Cur and Parm 616 Rated Fld Brdg I is correct 10 Stop Drive 11 Reset Values of 607 608 663 and 664 to their original values Drive Tuning Drive Setup Autotune Current PARM 661 676 698 699 702 733 743 Chapter 8 Start Up The following parameters should be set up prior to using the Auto Tuning
36. 09 Position Error S AUTO TUNE GAIN POSITION FDBK 107 4096 IPU POSITION VELOCITY FDBK 106 RPM P To Sheet 3 4096 MOTOR BASE SPEED FEEDBACK FILTER 631 If 631 1 2 W42 S W2 2 S W2 We S W1 2 35 49 W4 35 49 20 40 W 20 E 40 Wi W2 631 3 T S GAIN 256 S Wy S 157 Torque Ref 4096 100 PROPORTIONAL GAIN FUNCTION FWD TORQUE LIMIT From Sht 3 B KI VELOCITY 123 LOOP 659 0 KIGAIN mE 8 3886 54 UIT INTEGRAL GAIN REV TORQUE FUNCTION LIMIT From Sht 3 TACH SWITCH 689 SLAVE PERCENT 1 669 SLAVE 100 SLAVE PERCENT 709 UP TO SPD TOLERANCE 710 ZERO SPD TOLERANCE SPEED 704 AT DETECTION SPEED 1 705 AT SPEED 2 706 AT SPEED 3 707 AT SPEED 4 708 AT SPEED 5 TORQUE SELECT FWD TORQUE LIMIT From Sht 3 B 625 VALUE TORQUE COMMAND 110 4096 100 RATED TORQUE REV TORQUE LIMIT From Sht 3 TORQUE MODE SELECT SLAVE PERCENT 2 670 96 SLAVE 167 2 C Torque Ref 2 100 4096 100 SLAVE PERCENT 2 lt 11 gt AT SPEED 1 100 lt 12 gt AT SPEED 2 100 lt 13 gt AT SPEED 100 lt 14 gt AT SPEED 4 100 lt 15 gt AT SPEED 5 100 C10 gt AT ZERO SPEED 100 655 ATSET SPEED 100 SYMBOL PARAMETER TYPE Co SINK lt gt SOURCE SET UP
37. 3 01 4 01 4 02 4 03 5 01 6 01 and 7 01 8 02 8 03 Summary of Changes The following is a brief description of the MCB Firmware Revision History First Release Enhanced noise immunity Released Trending and VP and CP Autotune Enhanced EEprom fault reporting for SP 83 and SP30 SEEG device VP indirects added check for Ia with contactor open Consolidate 1396 and 1395 board assemblies Enhanced Feedback calculation on first pulse CP phase loss updated for HKVA software change for BH processor Released Tach recovery algorithm EH E step micro processor changed checksum routine VP and CP added noise filter caps for CP 101 106 e Added P688 Tach Switch Tolerance Note P688 used on 5 01 FW only P731 and P732 used on all other FW Added P689 Tach Switch Ki Added P690 Tach Switch Kp Added P691 Tach Switch Select Rev 18 Enhanced 24VDV Fault Reporting Rev 19 Enhanced CP 06 Phase Loss Reporting Both released and recalled Rev 4 Further Enhanced 24VDV Fault Reporting Rev 5 Further Enhanced CP 06 Phase Loss Reporting VP 1 Motor Thermal Overload Modified algorithm for self ventilated motor options to work above 150 of base motor speed P629 3 or 4 2 Process Trim Enhanced process trim regulator for enable disable from logic command when using process trim velocity limiter function The Process Trim Select P628 0 had to be used instead of Logic Command bit to disable Pro
38. 7 25 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 B Logic Command Word Bits 0 1 2 154 633 634 635 636 637 MOP Forward Speed MOP MOP Reverse Speed MOP External speed reference indicates Parameters 153 and 154 will be the velocity reference Preset speeds 1 to 5 indicate Parameters 633 to 637 respectively will be the selected velocity reference MOP forward speed selects the positive MOP command velocity MOP reverse speed selects the negative MOP command velocity For the MOP function the start input will cause the MOP forward reverse speed to be set to the MOP minimum speed Parameter 650 MOP increment Bit 3 A 1 bit field when set to 1 will cause the MOP to increase speed by the rate selected in the MOP rate bits 6 7 in the logic command The MOP command velocity will continue to increase until this bit is cleared or a speed limit is reached This limit can be the MOP Min Speed Parameter 650 or the reverse speed limit Parameter 607 Ramp Disable Bit 5 A 1 bit field that will disable the ramp function in the Drive when set to 1 The ramp function limits the rate of change of velocity command or acceleration deceleration to the rate set by the Accel Time and Decel Time parameters Parameters 651 and 652 The ramp velocity reference Parameter 103 becomes the same value as the Pre Ramp Velocity reference Parameter 102 when the ramp disable is set to 1 Ramp disable will also cause the MOP ramp to be byp
39. A circuit board required to convert information to and from an external device to the format required by the Main Control Board microbus Analog A control system with continuously adjustable voltage or current level Binary A numbering system using the base 2 Radix The value can be 0 or 1 Bit One binary digit of data consisting of 0 or 1 Default Value provided for a parameter as part of the program when the Drive is initially started Programming Terminal Programming device used to enter and monitor parameters in the Bulletin 1395 Drive Digital A control system that uses two specific voltage or current signal levels which correspond to 1 or 0 Configuration Parameter A variable that is used to pass values between processes on a real time basis for Drive control Fault A Drive condition that is monitored and displayed on the Programming Terminal Firmware The non changeable portion of the software program that defines relationships between the parameters Hardware That portion of the software program that defines relationships between the parameters Hexadecimal Number system using the base 16 Radix Interface Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information between microprocessor chips at the microprocessor level The microbus is used for transfer of information between the control microprocessors located on the Main Contro
40. Bit 11 A 1 bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is within a tolerance of the at speed 1 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally in the drive feedback velocity Parameter 106 is compared to at speed 1 Parameter 704 and if the absolute value of the difference is within the Up To Speed tolerance Parameter 709 the At Speed 1 bit is set to 1 At speed 2 Bit 12 A I bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is within a tolerance of the at speed 2 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally in the drive feedback velocity Parameter 106 is compared to at speed 2 Parameter 705 and if the absolute value of the difference is within the up to speed tolerance Parameter 709 the At Speed 2 bit is set to 1 7 17 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 18 At speed 3 Bit 13 A I bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the at speed 3 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally in the drive if the Feedback Velocity Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to At Speed 3 Parameter 7706 the At Speed 3 bit is set to 1 At speed 4 Bit 14 A I bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the at speed 4 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally in the drive if the Feedback Velocity Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to at speed 4 Parameter 707 the At Speed 4 bit is set to 1 At speed 5 Bit 15 A 1
41. Board or an Allen Bradley PLC3 or 5 using the Node Adapter Board or the Multi Communication Adapter The 1395 is factory preconfigured as shown in Tables 8 0 and 8 P The user has the flexibility of reconfiguring the drive to tailor it to his specific requirement Refer to the specific Adapter manual for all configuration and parameter information Table 8 0 Drive Pre Configuration Table Discrete Adapter Link Linked to Source Parm 2 401 3 403 4 404 5 100 6 106 7 118 8 112 9 105 K 11 2 22 42 C 42142 C 16 17 19 200 20 250 100 8 14 Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 P Drive Pre Configuration Table Digital Reference Adapter 1 2 3 4 5 C 8 woo 1 Sd B E E i8 16 2 2 m d E 20 250 Cannot be changed by the user Linked to Source Parm 400 401 402 100 112 105 200 100 Chapter 8 Start Up Up to 18 links of Source to Sink parameters may be made using the programming Terminal Drive Set Up mode Two of the potential twenty links are permanently linked in order to maintain critical communications paths between the programming terminal and the 1395 Drive This leaves 18 programmable source to sink parameters The configuration section in Chapter 5 of this manual lists all of the allowable Source and Sink parameters associated with the Drive control If the drive is reconfigured record the links in Table 8 Q an
42. Circuit board containing hardware and software required to interface external devices such as Allen Bradley PLC or Discrete I O devices to the 1395 drive Interface Hardware and associated software required to transfer information and or control signals from one device to another Microbus Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information at the microprocessor level The microbus is used for the transfer of information between adapter boards and the main control board Port Hardware located on the main control board which allows for connection of one adapter board to the microbus There are two ports on the main control board Programming Terminal Device used for programming and monitoring operation on the 1395 drive The programming terminal is provided in two packages digital handheld terminal and door mounted terminal Figure 3 1 provides an overview of the hardware components associated with the Series A 1395 drive Hardware can be broken into one of three categories e Control boards e Control Power interface hardware Power hardware This chapter describes in general all of the major hardware components Figures provided in this chapter are drawn based on hardware functionality Some components may be repeated in several different diagrams Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings
43. Example Digital Reference Adapter Board Configuration Shield Common TB10 for Med KVA 1395 Drive TB3 Digital Reference Adapter Bits 0 15 Digital Common 53 Digital Inputs PortA Stop 431 gt 583 11 Sources Sinks 24 VDC Jog2 44 gt 584 9 400 Logic Command 2 External Power Supply Start 45 gt 585 12 600 Clear Fault 46 586 14 gt 405 163 j 625 Ramp Disable 47 587 5 1006 Command Enable 48 gt 588 8 d by user Jog1 49 gt 589 10 Run Ref A 50 590 20 Run Ref B 51 591 1 Run Ref C 52 592 2 External 31 3 550 Scale 2 Velocity e 401 154 External Velocity Ref Trim 33 3 552 Scale 2 Velocity Ref la gt 553 Offset 0 402 161 Trim Velocity Ref ChB 26 7 563 PPR Digital Encoderin Chg 25 564 Scale Reference 565 Offse To be Input 24 566 Filter linked 404 Encoder In Cha 23 567 Type by user 568 Consi 569 453 Parameter At Set Speed 58 562 Bts 0 15 At Current Limit 57 561 Drive Ready 56 lt 560 450 100 Logio tatus Drive Running 55 559 At Zero Speed 54 lt 558 454 Bits 16 31 Field Current External 24VDC ISOL 61 T Com Feedback Power Supply 24VDC 62 Armature 39 lt 575 Scale 0 25 Amature Current Current Feedback 1 576 Offset 0 lt 451 12 Feedback Armature 41 577 Scale 0 25 Voltage Feedback o 578 Ofset 0 1 452 15 y Amature
44. Heatsink SCR Overtemp Motor Overtemp Motor Overload Pending Motor Overload tripped Motor Stalled Contactor Failure AC Volt out of tolerance 11 SP Handshake with VP CP Handshake with VP SP Mode Fault CP Mode Fault Fault Status Bit DEFINITIONS o e o o o v IF CURRENT CONTROL FAULTS ARE SELECTED 630 0 Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 54 3 2 1 O0 DHT REF BITS 0 C HANG A B LE E Line Phase Loss Logic Power Supply Overcurrent Trip AC Side Overcurrent Trip DC Side Overcurrent Trip Any Side _____________ _ Bridge Overload Tripped DEFINITIONS Motor Field Loss NOT USED Waiting for Safe Arm Volts Waiting for Zero Arm Current Excessive Arm Volt Demand NOT USED NOT USED Bridge Overload Pending NOT USED Fault Status Bit JOH o no o 7 8 For detailed descriptions of the bits in Parameter 101 refer to the 1395 Troubleshooting Manual Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 102 Pre Ramp Velocity Reference Pre Ramp Vel Ref Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description This parameter indicates the value of the velocity reference that has been currently selected by the reference control When a 32 bit velocity reference is used this will be the most significant 16 bits or upper word This data is input to the velocity reference ramp software Parameter 103 Ramp Velocity
45. I T EEREEEELUE Esp Fao f fF if Ff F if f NOTE To provide DC Contactor energization a jumper or other ex ternal circuitry must be connected to TB5 8 and 9 To Relay Logic Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC DC Control Voltage Distribution The Unit Power Supply converts 115VAC supplied as shown in Figure 4 12 to 5 VDC and 12VDC control voltages In addition to the voltages supplied by the Unit Power Supply the Power Stage Interface converts the 20VAC coming from the control transformer PT to 24VDC which is used for relay logic and provides the supply voltage to the SCR Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards to produce SCR gate signals for the armature and field Control Common Control Common in the Bulletin 1395 is connected to signal ground TB5 10 Refer to Chapter 6 for installation details Figure 4 12 DC Power Distribution and Control Common TP 4 5VDC TP51 5VDC A6 UNIT POWER SUPPLY A7 POWER STAGE INTERFACE A8 MAIN CONTROL BOARD Power Supply 12 VDC 4 15 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Relay Logic 4 16 Main Contactor M1 Control Figure 4 13 illustrates the hardware associated with the control of the coil voltage applied to the Main DC contactor M1 The coil voltage originates at an external 115VAC source The source voltage may be in
46. IfN C is used and 620 0 Drive will be in a continuous reset condition If N O is used and 620 1 A Stop will be present in Logic 1 Par 150 6 22 Chapter 6 Installation 2 Wire Emergency Coast Stop Circuit ECOAST The drive has the capability to accept an ECOAST input from either a 24VDC or 115VAC contact The contact must be normally closed and will typically be a Stop pushbutton Refer to the following paragraphs Figure 6 13 and Table 6 M for connection information If a24VDC ECOAST is desired the contacts of the ECOAST device must be wired between terminals 9 amp 11 of TB3 Jumpers must then be connected between terminals 4 amp 5 and 10 amp 12 of TB3 If a 115VAC ECOAST is desired the contacts of the ECOAST device must be wired between terminals 4 amp 5 of TB3 Jumpers must then be connected between terminals 9 amp 11 and 10 amp 12 of TB3 Table 6 M ECoast Connections ECoast Input TB 3 Terminals 24VDC 115VAC 10 and 12 umper J umper the Power Stage Interface Board Jumpers J11 and J12 on the Power Stage Interface Board must be set for the proper input voltage before applying power to these inputs f ATTENTION Applying improper input voltage could damage 3 Wire the Motor Thermostat Circuit Terminal TB3 2 is used to receive either a 24VDC or 115VAC input derived from an external voltage source when the motor thermostat contact is closed The contacts of the motor thermostat must be N C Th
47. NOTE This statement is true for version 5 01 Firmware For Firmware versions greater than 5 01 refer to parameters 731 and 732 for Tach Loss Switch over algorithm When a loss of feedback is detected in Tach Loss Recovery mode the following action is automatically taken by the drive 1 Change the velocity loop Kp and gains to new values that will provide stable operation under armature voltage control These gains are supplied by two parameters Parameter 689 for Tach Loss Kj and Parameter 690 for Tach Loss 2 Freeze the field flux to the value present at the time of the Tach Loss 3 Issue a Tach Loss warning via the Logic Status Word Parameter 100 bit 1 0 bit 0 1 and the VP Fault Word Parameter 101 bit 0 1 4 Change the Feedback Device parameter to the Armature Voltage Feedback value set Parameter 621 to 1 5 The forward and reverse speed limits are set to the speed value at the time of the Tach Loss These changes remain in effect until a Clear Faults command is issued or until the feedback device selection is changed back to its original value From this point on the drive will continue running in Armature Voltage Feedback mode If you were to make the original feedback device functional again it would be possible to switch back to it using one of two methods 1 Change the value of the feedback device parameter Parameter 621 to the original feedback type NOTE If the drive is running while this
48. Note Phase Sensitive L1 G1G2 F1 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A5 Feedback Board A1 3 6 Control Boards From DC Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Feedback Board Figure 3 5 illustrates the major hardware points on the board The primary function of the board is to provide scaling and transfer of feedback signals coming from power bridge devices being sent to the Power Stage Interface and eventually to the Main Control Board Figure 3 5 Feedback Board A1 Overview 3 Phase Incom Current 20 VAC AC Current Field Current ing AC Line From Heatsink DC Armature Volt Feedback from Feedback from Feedback from voltage Feed Thermoswitch age Feedback Sensor TD1 1PT CTs ACT 1 amp 2 FCT back Connection for AC current feedback burden resistor Factory Installed Jumper Selection for Field Current Feedback Scalin By User At Start Up Connection for DC current feedback burden resistor Factory Installed TB3 9 Connection to Power MFG Revision No Spare Part Kit No Table 3 A Stage Interface Feedback Board Jumpers see Table 8 J J1 Jumper Position 40 100 HP 240 VDC 75 200 HP 500 VDC Field Current Range 9 1 21 2 ADC 4 1 9 2 ADC 1 1 4 2 ADC 0 65 1 2 ADC 3 7 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 6 Feedback Board Hardware Location Feed
49. PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX 904 388H Trend Logic Value 0 0 See Descrip 905 389H Trend Logic Value 0 0 See Descrip 906 38AH Trend Logic Val 0 0 32167 907 38BH Trend Logic Val 0 0 32767 908 38CH Trend Unsign Val 0 0 16 0 909 38DH Trend Unsign Val 0 0 260 910 38EH Tr1 Opnd Parm X 100 1 947 911 38FH Tr1 Opnd Parm Y 904 1 947 912 390H Trl Operator AND GT NOR 913 391H Tr1 Sample Rate SEC 0 02 0 004 30 914 392H Tr1 Post Samples 30 0 99 915 393H Tr1 Cont Trigger 1 0 1 916 394H Trl Enable 0 0 1 917 395H Trl Output Rate SEC 0 04 0 004 30 920 398H Tr2 Opnd Param X 100 1 947 921 399H Tr2 Opnd Param Y 904 1 947 922 39AH Tr2 Operator AND GT NOR 923 39BH Tr2 Sample Rate SEC 0 02 0 004 30 924 39CH Tr2 Post Samples 30 0 99 925 39DH Tr2 Mult Trigger 1 0 1 926 39EH Tr2 Enable 0 0 1 927 39FH Tr2 Output Rate SEC 0 04 0 004 30 930 3A2H Tr3 Opnd Param X 100 1 947 931 3A3H Tr3 Opnd Param Y 904 1 947 932 3A4H Tr3 Operator AND GT NOR 933 3A5H Tr3 Sample Rate SEC 0 02 0 004 30 934 3A6H Tr3 Post Samples 30 0 99 935 3A7H Tr3 Mult Trigger 1 0 1 936 3A8H Tr3 Enable 0 0 1 937 3A9H Tr3 Output Rate SEC 0 04 0 004 30 940 3ACH Tr4 Opnd Param X 100 1 947 941 3ADH Tr4 Opnd Param Y 904 1 947 942 3AEH Tr4 Operator AND GT 943 3AFH Tr4 Sample Rate SEC 0 02 0 004 30 944 3B0H Tr4 Post Samples 30 0 99 945 3B1H Tr4 MultTrigger 1 0 0 946 3B2H Tr4 Enable 0 0 1 947 3B3H Tr4 Output Rate SEC 0 04 0 004 30 NOTE All parameter numbers not listed in this table are currently
50. PLC Data Highway 9463 1770 CD Example Spacing relationship between 480VAC incoming power leads and 24VDC logic leads 480VAC leads are Class 2 24VDC leads are Class 6 Forseparate steel conduits the conduits must be 3 inches 76 mm apart Ina cable tray the two groups of leads are to be 6 inches 152 mm apart Spacing Notes 1 Both outgoing and return current carrying conductors are to be pulled in same 6 Spacing of communication cables classes 2 through 6 is conduit or laid adjacent in tray CONDUIT SPACING through AIR 115 Volts 1 inch 115 Volts 2 inches 2 Cables of the following classes can be grouped together 230 Volts 1 5 inches 230 Volts 4 inches A Class 1 Equal to or above 601 volts 460 575 Volts 3 inches 460 575 Volts 8 inches B Classes 2 3 and 4 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same 575 volts proportional to 6 575 volts proportional to 12 conduit or layered in the same tray per 1000 volts per 1000 volts C Classes 5 and 6 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same General Notes conduit or layered in the same tray NOTE Bundle may not exceed conditions of NEC 310 1 Steel conduitis recommended for all wiring classes Classes 7 11 Di C asses 8 Rey Me ce vane 2 Spacing shown between classes is the minimum required for parallel runs same conduit or layered in the same tray NOTE Encoder cables run in a bundle may experience some less t
51. Parameter 116 AC Line Voltage AC Line Voltage Internal Units volts x 10 Programming Terminal units Volts Description This parameter indicates the latest AC line voltage as measured by the drive Parameter 117 Field Current Reference Fld Current Ref Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu 100 rated motor field current Programming Terminal units Amps Description This parameter indicates the latest field current reference as calculated by the drive This value is derived from the Flux Command by use of the flux linearization table Parameter 671 685 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 118 Field Current Feedback Fld Current Fdbk Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu 100 rated motor field current Programming Terminal units Amps Description This parameter indicates the latest field current feedback value as measured by the drive Parameter 119 Process Trim Output Proc Trim Output Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu Programming Terminal units None Description This parameter represents the scaled and limited output of the process trim function The Process trim consists of a general purpose PI regulator that uses reference and feedback inputs Parameters 161 and 162 The number contained in this parameter may also be used to offset the velocity or torque reference by making the appropriate selection in Process Trim Select Parameter 628 Parameter 120 CEMF Feedback CEMF FEEDBACK Internal
52. Setting the Trend Buffer Type 1 Select the Trend Multiple Trigger parameter for the trend buffer you are setting up 2 Setting this parameter enables multiple trigger operation setting it OFF enables one shot operation 5 24 Trending To Aid Troubleshooting General Logic Description Chapter 5 Functional Description Activating a Trend Buffer 1 Select the Trend Enable parameter for the trend buffer you are setting up 2 Set this parameter ON to activate the buffer or OFF to deactivate the buffer Setting the Output Data Rate 1 Select the Trend Output Rate parameter for the trend buffer you are setting up 2 Enter the desired sample rate NOTE The Drive will round the desired sample time to the nearest 4ms To set up a Trend as an aid to troubleshooting refer to Chapter 4 of the 1395 Troubleshooting manual for more information A general block diagram software overview of the 1395 logic is shown in Figure 5 5 Each of the major functions has a circled reference number assigned to it which corresponds to the general software functional description given in this section All diagrams used for the logic description in this manual use a function block representation of the actual software function being performed Calibration and adjustment of the 1395 consists of changing the values of specific parameters Velocity Reference Control Circle 1 The 1395 is capable of selecting o
53. Velocity Loop Motor Test 8 20 Velocity Loop System Test 8 20 Velocity Loop Tuning 8 21 Drive Units Definition 7 1 Droop Control Block Diagram 5 34 Droop Filter Gain 658 7 47 Droop Percent 657 7 46 E ECoast Connections 6 23 ECOAST Stop 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 12 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 16 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 17 Electrical Specifications 1 4 Enable Contingency Coast Stop 1 5 Encoder 1 4 Connections 6 8 6 34 Encoder PPR 609 7 33 Encoder Velocity 122 7 24 End Taper Speed 666 7 48 Engineering Units Definition 7 1 Environment 6 1 Environmental Specifications 1 5 ESD Precautions 1 1 l 6 External Inputs Specifications 1 5 External Outputs Specifications 1 5 External Overtemperature Delay 725 7 63 F Fast Parameter Definition 5 1 7 1 Fast Sink Parameters Configuration and Linking 9 2 Fast Source Parameters Configuration and Linking 9 1 Fault Report 630 7 41 Fault Select 623 7 37 Features of this Drive 1 2 Feedback Board 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 7 125 200 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 7 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 7 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 7 3 8 Feedback Board Jumpers 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 7 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 7 Feedback Circuitry 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 Feedback Control 5 28 Block Diagram 5 37 Feedback Device Type 621 7 36 Feedback Devices Specificati
54. Volts MaxA DC Output Volts MaxA Volts AC Input 2 54 729 65 230 6 20 80 23 10 5 800 26 9 23 30 390 3 3 as 29 32 23 4 396 sr 39 2 40 350 23 8m 2 4 19 23 240 s 230 4 150 Fm es ou pom pnm 35 6 41 Chapter 6 Installation 6 42 Power Output L5KW 2HP 2 24KW 3HP 3 75KW5HP 5 6KW 7 5HP 7 5KW LOHP 11 2KW 15HP 15KW 20HP 18 7KW25HP 22 4KW 30HP 29 9KW 40HP 37 3KW 50HP 44 8KW 60HP S6KW 75HP 14 6KW 100HP 93 3KW 125HP 112KW 150HP 149 2KW 200HP 186 5KW 250HP 223 8KW 300HP 298 4KW 400HP 373KW 500HP 448KW 600HP Table 6 S 460VAC Input Armature Current Ratings ARMATURE FIELD AC Input DC Output AC Input DC Output Volts MaxA Volts MaxA Volts Max A Volts 380415460 7 84 400400500 96 38015460 10 250 270 300_ 380415460 390 400400500 442 380 415 460 40 250 270300 380415460 466 400400500 529 38015460 40 250270300 380415460 591 400400500 670 380415460 40 250270300 380415460 805 400400500 913 380 215 460 40 250270300 380415460 864 400400500 980 380415460 40 250270300 MaxA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 40 Introduction Terminology Chapter Programming Parameters This chapter contains the information required to assist the
55. W Signal Ground DC Tach Grounding Motor leads Not Grounded Wiring Class 3 or 4 Power Safety Ground 6 9 Chapter 6 Installation 1 30 HP 230V 2 60 HP 460V Wire Shields 6 10 Control Boards PSI Switcher Board Control Signal Common As previously explained two different types of grounds are used in the 1395 drive They are defined as follows Ground PE A Safety Ground is normally required by the electrical code and is defined externally as PE ground Main PE is located at the ground stud next to the contactor On MKVA The PE ground stud is located on the back panel between L2 amp L3 ACT s and bus bars TB X connections are for jumpering TE to PE for stand alone only The safety ground identified as PE ground is designated as follows TB2 5 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460V AC TB2 7 40 100 HP 230V AC 75 200 460V AC TB5 11 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460V AC Depending on the specific application PE ground as defined above may be connected to a system ground bus when several drives are configured as part of a system and mounted in the same cabinet In other applications this terminal may be connected directly to a PE ground point consisting of adjacent building steel girder joist floor ground grid etc provided grounding points comply with NEC regulations Figures 6 6 and 6 7 illustrate connection of PE for stand alone and system applications PE should be connected
56. and then work down until a reading can be obtained Voltage should be positive at A1 with respect to A2 voltage magnitude is unimportant If polarity is correct go to the next section Verification of Drive Calibration If polarity is incorrect Remove power immediately Make certain power is turned off and locked out Switch armature leads Al and A2 If tachometer feedback is used the tachometer leads must also be switched If an encoder is used one of the channel leads must also be switched Verify that the direction of rotation has been corrected by switching the power back on Turn off power Verify correct polarity of velocity feedback Rotate the motor shaft in CCW direction as viewed from the commutator end using an externally applied mechanical force Using the Programming Terminal verify that the speed feedback value is positive at Parm 106 Velocity Fdbk If polarity is incorrect and an encoder or tachometer is used verify that wiring for the device is correct If polarity is incorrect and armature feedback is used verify that the motor armature and field leads are properly connected to the drive output Verify correct scaling of AC Line Voltage feedback Measure the incoming AC line voltage and verify that the RMS value is equal to the value shown in Parm 116 AC Line Voltage If the value of Parm 116 does not match the measured incoming AC line voltage change the value of Parameter 740 K AC Volts until the
57. etc The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals STOP JOG START CLEAR FAULTS Digital Outputs Two discrete outputs are provided through control of two on board relays The contact rating is 0 6A at 125 VAC and 0 2A at 30VDC These outputs allow the 1395 to signal various operating states of the Drive The outputs are preconfigured for the following signals DRIVE RUNNING AT ZERO SPEED Analog Inputs Four preprogrammed 11 bit analog to digital inputs These inputs allow 10VDC analog signal to be converted to a 2048 digital signal thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the converted signal can be extended to 32767 The analog inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY TRIM REFERENCE Analog Outputs Four preprogrammed 11 bit digital to analog outputs These outputs allow a 1024 drive signal to be converted to a 10VDC analog analog output thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The analog outputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK FIELD CURRENT FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK and ARMATURE VOLTAGE FEEDBACK All inputs and outputs have the flexibility to allow reconfiguration
58. measured voltage agrees with Parm 116 Increasing Parm 740 increases the value in Parm 116 Enable the normal operation of the ECOAST circuit by removing the lock on the input to TB3 4 to 5 that was holding it in the open state Enter a speed reference of lt 25 base speed using whichever external device has been configured to send data to Parm 154 Verify correct value by observing Parm 154 Vel Ref Whole Command the drive to start and accelerate to the velocity reference of Parm 154 using the Normal Start input from the external device which has been previously configured to control the normal start stop operation of the drive Verify that the motor starts and accelerates to the set speed by comparing the value of Parm 154 Vel Ref Whole to Parm 106 Velocity Fdbk Chapter 8 Start Up 8 18 6 Verify correct scaling of Armature voltage feedback Measure the armature voltage at Al and A2 output connections of the Drive Verify that the voltage measured is the same as the value shown in Parm 105 Arm Voltage Fdbk If the value of Parm 105 is incorrect change the value of Parm 739 K ARM Volts until the measured voltage agrees with Parm 105 Increasing Parm 739 increases Parm 105 Verify correct scaling of speed feedback Measure the actual motor speed at the motor shaft Verify that the value measured at the shaft is the same as Parm 106 Velocity Fdbk If actual speed measured at the shaft doesn
59. 2E3H 2E4H 2E5H 2E6H 2E7H 2E8H 2E9H 2EAH 30CH 348H 349H 34AH 34BH 34CH 384H 385H 386H 387H M2 roj roj roj N MK TM TM NAME Proc Trim KP Proc Tri Lo Lim Proc Trim Hi Lim Proce Trim Out K Ovid Pend Level Proc Trim Lo Sum Proc Trim Hi Sum ABS Overspeed Ext Overtemp Dly SCR Overtemp Dly Stall Delay AC Line Tol Dly Field Fault Threshold Fld Failure Dly Tach Loss CEMF Tach Loss Vel Arm Bridge Type K Discontinuous KP Armature Loop KI Armature Loop KP Field Loop KI Field Loop K Arm Volts K AC Volts Cur Desired BW Cur Max BW Cur Damp Factor Bridge S witch Delay K Disc fraction Arm Volt Offset Firmware Ver No SP Indirect 1 SP Indirect 2 SP Indirect 3 SP Indirect 4 SP Indirect 5 Trend Sign Val Trend Sign Val Trend Sign Val Trend Sign Val E UNITS RPM RPM RPM SEC SEC SEC SEC 5 Rad Sec Rad Sec Volts X XX Table 7 A Cont INIT MIN 4096 0 4096 32167 4096 32767 1 000 16 0 115 0 0244 6xB S 5 46xB S 46xB S 175 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 1 0 30 0 1 0 0 1 10 01 0 2 002 2441 1 0 288 4 2330 0 386 0 16384 0 168 0 12500 3000 7225 2000 500 40 500 40 1 0 0 8 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 X XX 0 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 0 32767 MAX 32767 32767 32767 16 0 260 6 5 B 3216 7 3216 7 100 1 0 100 5 0 50 0
60. 300 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 19 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 3 20 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 20 Discrete Adapter Board 6 29 Multi Communication 6 40 Node 6 40 Adapter Parameters 8 14 Digital Reference Adapter Pre Configuration 8 15 Discrete Adapter Pre Configuration 8 14 Drive Configuration 8 16 Ambient Operating Temperature 1 5 Analog Input 6 31 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 2 17 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 4 21 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 3 22 Analog Output 6 33 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 2 17 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 4 21 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 3 22 Typical Output Connections 6 33 Analog Digital Output 6 39 Application Setup 8 22 Arm Current Burden Resistor 8 10 Armature Bridge Components 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 3 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 3 2 4 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 3 125 300 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 3 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 3 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 3 3 4 Armature Bridge Type 733 7 65 Armature Control 1 4 Armature Current Control Definition 5 5 Armature Current Feedback 112 7 22 Armature Current Firing Angle 114 7 22 Armature Current PI Output 113 7 22 Armature Current Ratings 6 40 230VAC Input 6 41 460VAC Input 6 42 Armature Current Reference 111 7 21 Armature DC Loop Contactor Lug Kits 6 13 Armature Firing 1 4
61. 4 843 7 72 SP Indirect 5 844 7 72 SP Output 1 10 7 15 SP Output 2 11 7 15 SP Output 3 12 7 15 SP Output 4 13 7 15 SP Output 5 14 7 15 Specifications Electrical 1 4 Environmental 1 5 External Inputs 1 5 External Outputs 1 5 Feedback Devices 1 5 Options 1 5 Speed Regulation 1 4 Standard Features 1 5 Speed Reference Parameters 8 13 Speed Reference Selection Definition 5 4 Speed Regulation Specifications 1 4 Stall Delay 727 7 64 Standard Features Specifications 1 5 Standard Field Voltage Output 6 14 Power Connections 6 15 6 16 6 17 Start Taper Speed 665 7 48 Start Up 8 1 1 30 HP and 2 60 HP Voltage Measurement 8 6 115VAC Voltage Measurement 8 5 125 300 HP and 250 600 HP Voltage Measurement 8 7 24VDC Voltage Measurement 8 6 40 100 HP and 75 200 HP Voltage Measurement 8 7 Adapter Parameters 8 14 Application Setup 8 22 Basic Parameters 8 9 8 11 Bridge Switch Delay 8 11 Current Loop Test 8 19 Current Loop Tune 8 20 Digital Reference Adapter Pre Configuration 8 15 Discrete Adapter Pre Configuration 8 14 Drive Calibration Verification 8 17 Drive Configuration 8 16 Drive Tuning 8 19 Equipment Recommended 8 2 Equipment Required 8 2 Field AC Voltage Measurement 8 5 Field Flux Tuning 8 21 Input Parameters 8 13 Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks 8 16 Parameter Programming Procedures 8 8 Pre Power Checklist 8 4 Pre Power Checks 8 3 Rated Armature Bridge Curren
62. 5 6 110 107934 18 3 24708 212 13 5 6 110 107934 18 3 111 140A 118879 33 4 140 107931 13 8 141 180A 100569 20 180 107927 10 2 181 260A 107929 11 1 260 107925 6 8 107929 11 1 260 107925 6 8 261 345 A 100566 7 5 345 100565 5 118818 5 49 670 None 118818 5 49 670 None 118818 5 49 670 None 118816 3 48 980 None 118816 3 48 980 None 1350A 1395 118818 5 49 1350 None 2250A 1395 129830 3 2250 None 1250A 2361 None 1250 185163 3 65 1650A 2361 None 1650 185165 4 22 3000A 2361 None 3000 185164 3 83 8 10 Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 J Rated Fld Brdg Settings Parameter 616 Series B Series A Series B MKVA 1 30 HP 240VDC 40 100 HP 240VDC 125 300 HP 240VDC umpe 2 60 HP 500VDC 75 200 HP 500VDC 250 600 HP 500VDC 1 42 2 2 18 4 3 8 7 4 2 4 Parm 739 740 Parm 744 Table 8 K Basic Parameters Feedback Scaling Parameter Name K Arm Volts K AC Volts Table 8 K A Description Numerical value used to scale the armature voltage feedback Values to be entered at this time are 6414 for 150 300 rated arm voltage 12321 for 300 850 rated arm voltage Numerical value used to scale the incoming AC line voltage feedback Values to be entered at this time are 3872 for 150 300 rated AC line voltage 7473 for 300 690 rated AC line voltage Bridge Switch Delay Setting Parameter Name Bridge Switch Delay Description Normal Applications
63. 50 0 2048 32767 32767 32767 32767 25000 15000 1000 1000 3 0 15 0 9 20 0 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 32767 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT Process Trim Con Process Trim Con Process Trim Con Process Trim Con trol Set Up trol Set Up trol Set Up trol Set Up Fault Detection SetUp Process Trim Con Process Trim Con Process Trim Con trol Setup trol Set Up trol Set Up Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Auto Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Detection Set Up Tuning S etup Basic Current PI Contro Current PI Contro Current PI Contro l Autotune l Autotune Autotune Field Pl Control Set Up Field Pl Control Set Up Feedback Control Feedback Control Basic Basic AutoTuning S etup Autotune AutoTuning S etup Autotune AutoTuning S etup Autotune Basic Current PI Contro Basic l Autotune SP Control Configuration SP Control Configuration SP Control Configuration SP Control Configuration SP Control Configuration Trend Function Trend Function Trend Function Trend Function Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont
64. 6 14 CEMF Feedback 120 7 23 CEMF Reference 160 7 31 Reg Preload 687 7 54 Circuit Board Jumper Connections 6 18 Communication Control Definition 5 4 Communication Port 1 5 Configuration Definition 5 1 7 1 Configuration Example Using Discrete Adapter Board 5 12 5 13 Configuration of the Drive 5 6 Configuration Parameter Definition 7 1 8 2 Lists 9 1 Contactor Type 622 7 37 Control Armature Current 5 5 Armature Sync and Firing Logic 5 5 Communication 5 4 Drive Logic 5 4 Field Flux 5 5 Field Sync and Firing Logic 5 6 Functional Overview 5 2 Functional Overview Illustration 5 3 Speed Reference Selection 5 4 Torque Reference Select 5 5 Velocity 5 5 Velocity Feedback Select 5 4 Control Boards 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 7 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 7 Control Common 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 15 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 15 Control Logic Source Parameters Table 5 10 Control Voltage Common 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 11 Control Wiring 115VAC Connections 6 25 115VAC Input and Contactor 6 24 6 25 6 27 ECoast Connections 6 23 External Contactor Bypass Jumpers 6 28 Procedure 6 21 TB3 Terminal Descriptions 6 22 Controller Current Output 1 4 ControlNet Adapter Board 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 18 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 22 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 23 Specifications 1 7 Cooling Airflow 6 5 Current Damping Factor 743 7
65. 6 AWG or larger The PLC I O Communication Link must be run in grounded steel conduit The conduit should be bonded to ground at both ends Connect the cable shield at the drive end only Encoder Connections If required must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Connect the cable shield at the motor only Tachometer Connections If required must be routed in grounded steel conduit The conduit must be grounded at both ends Connect the cable shield at the drive end Only Refer to the auxiliary device instruction manual for special grounding recommendations Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 5 1395 Grounding Practices Conduit Ground Conduit Ground SS Conduit Ground mec ami Converter GND Building steel or Building steel or substation ground substation ground Discrete Adapter Board Node Adapter Board if used Encoder cable in steel conduit Grounded wiring Class 8 Encoder Insulated Signal Bus TE Connectto earth ground such as a dedicated ground rod or grid etc Encoder Grounding Motor Leads Not Grounded Power Safety Ground PE Wiring Class 3 or 4 Connect to adjacent building steel girder joist or a floor ground loop Encoder shield must not be grounded at drive Encoder Tach cable in steel conduit Grounded wiring Class 8 L Safety Ground to be Grounded by User i DC Tach rh Indicates Chassis Ground
66. 6 VDC Table 8 G Voltage Measurements 125 300HP 230V and 250 600HP 460V Series B Test Points Expected Voltage Measured Voltage AC VOLTAGES Pp L1 to L2 Rated AC Input L2 to L3 Rated AC Input L3 to L1 Rated AC Input TB8 1 to TB8 3 Rated AC Field Input TB5 4 to TB5 5 115VAC 10 MAIN CONTROL BOARD TP51 to TP52 5 0 15 VDC TP55 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP56 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP58 to TP53 5 0 15 VDC TP54 to TP53 12 0 48 VDC PSI BOARD Tt TP6 to TP3 24 6 VDC Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages 8 7 Chapter 8 Start Up Standard Control 1 0 Checks Parameter Programming Procedures 8 8 The ECOAST Stop and Reset Normal Stop inputs are supplied as basic drive inputs Verify the proper operation of these inputs using the following steps If an input does not produce the expected results verify correct operation of the appropriate power supply 1 2 Apply power to the Drive If a24VDC ECOAST stop circuit is used measure the voltage from TB3 11 to 9 with the ECOAST stop contact open and closed With the contact closed the voltage should be OVDC With the contact open the voltage should be 24VDC If a 115VAC ECOAST stop circuit is used measure the voltage from TB3 4 to 5 with the ECOAST stop contact open and closed With the contact closed the voltage sh
67. 600 HP construction requires field voltage semiconductor fuses rated at 50A use FWH R Fuses 2 The 1395 is supplied with semi conductor fuses for line protection An isolation transformer can also be used In general the 1395 is suitable for direct connection to a correct voltage AC line that has minimum impedance of 3 If the line is lower impedance a line reactor or isolation transformer must be added before the drive to increase line impedance If the line impedance is too low transient voltage spikes or interruptions can create excessive current spikes that will cause nuisance input fuse blowing and may cause damage to the drive power structure Refer to Figures 6 8 6 9 and 6 10 for AC input wiring at the main fuses and to the IMPORTANT note when determining if a line reactor or isolation transformer is required for your installation 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60HP 460VAC Series B IMPORTANT If the AC input power system does not have a neutral or one phase referenced ground an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded highly recommended If the line to line voltages on any phase can exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is always required Chapter 6 Installation Connect incoming three phase AC line power to the AC line fuses or to the bus bar on the 125 600 HP drive The fuses supplied are designed to provide prote
68. 606 BASE MOTOR SPEED Lf 607 REVERSESPEEDLIMT CT Cd 608 FORWARDSPEEDLIMT o o O 69 ENCOERPPR O 610 RATEDMOTORVOLTAGE 611 MOTORARMATUREFLA ss O 612 RATED FIELD MOTOR CURRENT O 63 MOTORINERTIA o O 614 ARMATURE RESISTANCE o y O 615 RATED ARMATURE BRIDGE CURRENT 616 RATED FIELD BRIDGE CURRENT 617 RATED AC LINE VOLTAGE 620 SYSTEMRESETSELECT 621 FEEDBACK DEVICETYPE O ENCODER 14 i i sd 0 ENCODER 1 ARMATURE VOLTS 2 ANALOG TACH 622 623 HARD FAULT SELECT STALL T 4 Z AC VOLTAGE OUT OF TOLERANCE T 5 ZWAITING SAFE ARM VOLTS BIT 7 BRIDGE OVERLOAD 64 MAINTAINED START 1 O MOMENTARY Cd I MANTANED CC 625 TORQUEMOE 1 Fo ZER0 TOROUEWODE I VELOCITYREG OUTPUT 2 EXTERNALTORQUE REF 3 MIN SELECTION OF 1and2 CT y y 4 MAXSELECTIONOF1and2 Cd 5 LOAD RESPONSE OF Land _ 3 FDBK o2 9 4 621 629 6 G2 I 631 633 634 6 636 637 638 639 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Table 9 C Parameter Values cont BIT 0 D ONOM NAB B D WEAKENIN NAB N D A D R B QUN D T 5 RESET 1 60SEC TO TRIP
69. 61 Process Trim Low Limit 717 7 62 Process Trim Low Sum 721 7 63 Process Trim Output Gain 719 7 62 Process Trim Output 119 7 23 Process Trim PI Input 125 7 24 Process Trim Preload 714 7 61 Process Trim Reference 161 7 31 Process Trim Select 628 7 40 Ramp Velocity Reference 103 7 20 Rated AC Line Voltage 617 7 35 Rated Armature Bridge Current 615 7 35 Rated Field Bridge Current 616 7 35 Rated Field Motor Current 612 7 34 Rated Motor Voltage 610 7 34 Reverse Bridge Current Limit 664 7 48 Reverse Speed Limit 607 7 33 SCR Overtemperature Delay 726 7 64 Slave Percent 2 670 7 49 Slave Percent 669 7 49 SP Indirect 1 840 7 70 SP Indirect 2 841 7 71 SP Indirect 3 842 7 71 SP Indirect 4 843 7 72 SP Indirect 5 844 7 72 SP Output 1 10 7 15 SP Output 2 11 7 15 SP Output 3 12 7 15 SP Output 4 13 7 15 SP Output 5 14 7 15 Stall Delay 727 7 64 Start Taper Speed 665 7 48 System Inertia 703 7 58 System Reset Select 620 7 36 Tach Loss CEMF 731 7 65 Tach Loss Velocity 732 7 65 Tach Switch Ki 689 7 55 Tach Switch Kp 690 7 55 Tach Switch Select 691 7 56 Tach Switch Tolerance 688 7 55 Tach Velocity 156 7 30 Torque Command 110 7 21 Torque Mode 625 7 38 Torque Reference 2 167 7 32 Torque Reference 157 7 30 Trend 1 Contiguous Trigger Switch 915 7 76 Trend 1 Enable Trend 916 7 77 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 910 7 75 Trend 1 Opera
70. 68 Current Loop Test 5 14 Current Loop Tune 5 14 Current Test 5 15 Current Tune 5 16 Description 5 15 Current PI Control Block Diagram 5 37 Current Reference Control 5 30 Block Diagram 5 36 Current Requirements 115VAC Control Circuit 6 20 D Data Sample Rate 5 22 5 24 Data Types 7 3 DC Bus Snubbers 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 DC Contactor 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 125 2300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 DC Control Voltage Distribution 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 11 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 15 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 15 DC Current Sensing 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 DC Power Distribution and Control Common 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 15 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 16 DC Tachometer 1 4 DC Tachometer Encoder 1 5 Decel Time 652 7 46 Desired Contour 653 7 46 Desired Current Loop Bandwidth 741 7 68 DI DT Limit 668 7 49 Digital Inputs 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 Digital Outputs 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 2 17 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 4 21 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 3 22 Digital Reference Adapter Board 6 34 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 24VDC Connection 6 34 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 Analog Input 6 36 Digital Input 6 38
71. 7 41 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 634 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 2 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the drive when preset 2 has been selected in the logic command word Parameter 635 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 3 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the drive when preset 3 has been selected in the logic command word Parameter 636 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 4 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the drive when preset 4 has been selected in the logic command word Parameter 637 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 5 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the Drive when preset 5 has been selected in the logic command word Parameter 638 Jog 1 Speed
72. 7 49 Stall Delay 727 7 64 SP Indirect 1 5 840 844 7 10 1 72 SP Output 1 5 10 14 7 15 9 12 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Parameter Reference Listing Alphabetical PARAMETER NAME PARAMETER NO PAGE REFERENCE System Inertia mW 7 8 System Reset Select 620 7 36 Strt Taper Speed 665 7 48 Tach Loss CEMF 731 7 65 Tach Loss Vel 732 7 65 Tach Switch Ki 689 7 55 Tach Switch Kp 690 7 55 Tach Switch Select 691 7 56 Tach Switch Tol 688 7 55 Tach Velocity 156 7 30 Torque Command 110 7 21 Torque Mode 625 7 38 Torque Reference 157 7 30 Torque Reference 2 167 7 32 Trend 1 Contig Trigger Swtch 915 7 76 Trend Constant Signed Value 900 903 7 72 Trend Constant Logic Value 904 907 7 73 Trend Constant Unsigned Value 908 909 7 74 Trend 1 Enable Trend 916 7 77 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 910 7 75 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y 911 7 75 Trend 1 Operator 912 7 15 Trend 1 Output Transmit Rate 917 7 77 Trend 1 Sampling Rate 913 7 16 Trend 1 Samples After Trigger 914 7 76 Up to Speed Tol 709 7 60 Vel Desired BW 700 7 57 Vel Damp Factor 702 7 58 Velocity Error 124 7 24 Velocity Feedback 106 7 20 Velocity Feed Forward 108 7 21 Velocity Filter Sel 631 7 41 Velocity Indirect 1 163 166 7 31 7 32 Velocity Max BW 701 7 57 Velocity PI Output 123 7 24 Velocity Ref Fraction 153 7 29 Velocity Ref Whole 154 7 29 Warning Select 632 7 41 Zero Speed Tol 710 7 60 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Glossary 9 14 Adapter Board
73. 711 CONTROL TACH SWITCH SEL 691 JOG If CEMF gt PARAM 731 and VEL FDBK lt PARAM 732 and if 691 0 SOFT FAULT else if 691 0 WARNING FAULT 5 32 Chapter 5 Functional Description LOGIC CMD 150 151 152 RAMP CONTROL FWD SPEED LIMIT LOGIC CMD 150 151 152 608 COOUR Pre Ramp Jog Ramp 653 Vel Ref Enable 102 Ramp S CONTOUR ACCEL DECEL FILTER To Sheet 2 RAMP 4096 Motor Base Speed ACCEL TIME 651 E DECEL TIME 652 PROCESS 607 TRIM REV SPEED FINAL SELECT 628 LIMIT VEL REF 104 From Sheet 2 AUTO TUNE MEL 504 405 TOOT 5 805450205 550505070207 AUTO TUNE SPEED 699 D PARAMETER 100 LOGIC PARAMETER 150 151 152 LOGIC 1 STATUS BIT DEFINITION COMMAND BIT DEFINITION VEL DESIRED BW 700 ms VEL MAX BW 629 m VEL DAMP FACTOR 702 H FAULTFIELD 0 FAULTFIELD 1 RUN REFERENCE A RUN REFERENCE B AUTO 79N TUNE SYSTEM 703 H AUTO CURRENT ACTIVE LOGIC COMMAND 0 RUN REFERENCE C CUR DESIRED BW 741 TUNE ACTIVE LOGIC COMMAND 1 MOP INCREMENT MCURMAXBW742 AUTO CONTACTOR CLOSE MOP DECREMENT CUR DAMP FACTOR 743 H A c d DRIVE RUNNING RAMP DISABLE ARM BRIDGE TYPE 733 6 RUNNING REVERSE MOP RATE 1 AUTOTUNEILIM698 READY MOP RATE 2 8 AT CURRENT LIMIT COMMAND ENABLE x Pe E a E a ER 9 ATSET SPEED JOG 2 AT ZERO SPEED JOG 1 VELOCITY INDIREC
74. Compensation expressed as a percent of rated armature volts that would be measured with the armature locked and with rated motor armature and field current applied Typical values do not exceed 5 Parameter 615 Rated Armature Bridge Current Rated Arm Brdg I Internal units Amps x 10 Programming Terminal units AMPS Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 20 0 Description The drive armature bridge current per Table 8 1 in Chapter 8 Parameter 616 Rated Field Bridge Current Rated Fld Brdg I Internal units Amps x 10 Programming Terminal units AMPS Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 10 0 Description The drive field bridge current rating Used for Field Current Feedback scaling Field Flux and Field Weakening Control Refer to Table 8 J in Chapter 8 Parameter 617 Rated AC Line Voltage Rated AC Line Internal units Volts x 10 Programming Terminal units VOLTS Minimum Value 150 Maximum Value 690 Default Value 460 0 Description The AC line voltage connected to the drive Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 620 System Reset Select Sys Reset Select Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Description This parameter determines whether terminal TB3 3 provides the System Reset function or the Logic Command Stop function The choices are 0 System Reset 1 Normal Stop The System Reset fun
75. Control 648 288H OP Decel 4 SEC 0 1 0 1 6553 5 EE OP Control 649 289H OP Max Speed RPM 1750 0 16xB S EE OP Control 650 28AH OP Min Speed RPM 0 0 16xB S EE OP Control 651 28BH Accel Time SEC 10 0 1 6553 5 EE Ramp Control 652 28CH Decel Time SEC 10 0 1 6553 5 EE Ramp Control 653 28DH Desired Contour 0 0 100 EE Ramp Control 657 291H Droop Percent 96 0 0 25 5 EE Droop Control S et Up 658 292H Droop Filter 0 0 100 Droop Control S et Up 659 293H KI Velocity Loop 256 0 32167 EE Velocity PI Control Autotune 660 294H KP Velocity Loop 64 0 1600 EE Velocity Control Autotune 661 295H KF Velocity Loop 65535 0 65535 Velocity Control Autotune 663 297H Fwd Brdg Cur Lim 50 0 0244 260 EE Current Ref Control 664 298H Rev Brdg Cur Lim 50 0 0244 260 EE Current Ref Control 665 299H Strt Taper Speed RPM B S 5 4096 16xB S EE Ref Control S et Up 666 29AH End Taper Speed RPM B S B S 4096 16xB S EE Current R ef Control S et Up 667 29BH Min Taper Current 100 0 0244 260 EE Ref Control S et Up 668 29CH DI DT Limit 25 0 0 0244 260 EE Ref Control S et Up 669 29DH Slave Percent 100 200 200 EE Torque Control Set Up Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont PARM NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION P ORT 670 29EH Slave Percent 2 0 200 200 EE Torque Control S etup 672 2A0H KI Flux 1638 0 32767 EE Field Weak Contr
76. Description This is the Fast Sink with its pointer in Parameter 601 Velocity Parameter Select 2 Parameter 165 Velocity Indirect 3 Vel Indirect 3 Internal units Programming Terminal units Description This is the Fast Sink with its pointer in Parameter 602 Velocity Parameter Select 3 7 31 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 32 Parameter 166 Velocity Indirect 4 Vel Indirect 4 Internal units Programming Terminal units Description This is the Fast Sink with its pointer in Parameter 603 Velocity Parameter Select 4 Parameter 167 Torque Reference 2 TORQUE REF 2 Internal units 4096 100 Rated Motor Torque Programming Terminal units Percent Rated Motor Torque Minimum Value NA Maximum Value NA Default Value 0 Function Torque Control Description This is a Parameter Sink that can be used to bring a second Torque Reference into the Drive The data that is linked to this parameter is scaled using the Slave 96 2 parameter and then summed with the Torque Reference value from Parameter 157 Parameter 600 Velocity Parameter 1 Select Vel Param 1 Sel Internal units RPM Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 600 Maximum Value 732 Default Value 600 Description This is the pointer for Parameter 163 Velocity Indirect 1 Parameter 601 Velocity Parameter 2 Select Vel Param 2 Sel Internal units RPM Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 600 Maximum Value 732 D
77. Desired Current Loop Bandwidth 742 Maximum Current Loop Bandwidth In addition the parameters listed below are used by the current loop function during the test and tune procedure These parameters must be set up correctly for the tuning function to work properly Parameter No Description 743 Current Loop Damping Factor 733 Armature Bridge Type Current Test The Autotune Current Test function requires the DC contactor to close and armature current to conduct through the DC motor for the diagnostic tests to work properly and Parameter 734 to be set correctly Full field is applied during autotune slight motor rotation is expected The diagnostic tests first check for shorted SCRs by firing one SCR at a time with the DC contactor open If current conducts through an SCR then the software reports which SCR is shorted However the tests cannot identify multiple shorted SCRs Next the diagnostic tests check for open components open SCRs open gate leads disconnected motor etc in the armature bridge after the DC contactor closes Parameter 733 Armature Bridge Type has to be set properly before the Autotune Current Test is enabled Otherwise if the drive is non regenerative and contains only six armature SCRs the armature tests will erroneously report that the reverse armature bridge did not conduct CP 120 REV SCRS DID NOT CONDUCT Finally the average discontinuous current is measured and parameter 734 K Discontinuous is up
78. EE Configuration 568 238H PtA IN Config 19 Configuration 569 239H PtA IN Config 19 EE Configuration 570 23AH PtA IN Config 21 EE Configuration 571 23BH PtA IN Config 22 EE X Configuration 572 23CH PtA IN Config 23 EE Configuration 573 23DH PtA IN Config 24 EE X Configuration 574 23EH PtA IN Config 25 EE Configuration 575 23FH PtA OUT Config 1 EE Configuration 516 240H PtA OUT Config 2 EE Configuration 577 241H PtA OUT Config 3 EE Configuration 578 242H PtA OUT Config 4 EE Configuration 579 243H PtA OUT Config 5 EE Configuration 580 244H PtA OUT Config 6 EE Configuration 581 245H PtA OUT Config 7 EE X Configuration 582 246H PtA OUT Config 8 Configuration 7 9 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT 583 247H PtA OUT Confg 9 EE Configuration 584 248H PtA OUT Confg 10 EE Configuration 585 249H PtA OUT Config 11 EE Configuration 586 24AH PtA OUT Config 12 EE Configuration 587 24BH PtA OUT Config 13 EE Configuration 588 24CH PtA OUT Config 14 EE X Configuration 589 24DH PtA OUT Config 15 EE Configuration 590 24EH PtA OUT Config 16 EE X Configuration 591 24FH PtA OUT Config 17 EE Configuration 592 250H PtA OUT Config 18 EE Configuration 593 251H PtA OUT Config 19 EE Configuration 594 252H PtA OUT Config 20 EE Configuration 595 253H PtA OUT Config 21 EE Configuration 596 254H PtA OUT Config 22 EE Configuration 597 255H PtA OUT Confi
79. Feedback Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to At Speed 4 Parameter 707 the At Speed 4 bit 14 is set to 1 Otherwise it is set to 0 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 708 At Speed 5 At Speed 5 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed rpm Description This parameter is used to specify the at speed 5 setpoint in the logic status Parameter 100 bit 15 This 1 bit field is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the at speed 5 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally if the Velocity Feedback Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to At Speed 5 Parameter 708 the At Speed 5 bit 15 is set to 1 Otherwise it is set to O Parameter 709 Up To Speed Tolerance Up to Speed Tol Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value base speed 10 Default Value base speed 100 Description This parameter establishes a band around the At Speed setpoints Parameters 704 to 708 that will be used to determine when to update the At Speed bit Parameter 100 bits 11 15 and the At Set Speed bit Parameter 100 bit 9 in the Logic Status word Refer to the descriptions for the At Speed setpoints for more information Parameter 710 Zero Speed Tolerance Zero Speed Tol Internal uni
80. Figure 6 1 Nominal Dimensions Series B 1 30 HP 230V 2 60 HP 460V Dimensions Note Dimension drawings are for estimation only do not use for construction Contact factory for certified prints Side Door Open Weight A B C D E F 230V 460V Lbs kg Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm 1 30HP 2 60HP 45 20 11 9 302 2 11 0 279 4 22 5 571 5 23 5 596 10 75 273 24 0 609 6 6 2 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 2 Nominal Dimensions Series A 40 100 230V 75 200 460V Dimensions are in inches and mm TOP VIEW 11 05 281 E 5 38 Clearance for Service lt Front B Max 23 30 592 Maximum Dimension for Service 0 38 9 7 Dia Mtg Holes amp Slots 4 Pics For Mounting BF NNNNNNNNNNNNNN xha at hs SS with 0 312 7 9 Hardware AN 1 ALLEN BRADLEY 0 5 12 7 SLA ILL A A 4 230V Drive 460V Drive Weight Ib kg B C D E F 40 50HP 75 100HP 110 49 9 29 00 737 212 25 311 12 10 307 27 50 699 11 00 279 1 00 25 34 00 864 15 50 394 12 70 323 33 00 89 14 25 362 0 50 13 6 3 60 100 HP 125 200 165 74 8 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 3 Nominal Dimensions MKVA Series B 125 300 230V 250 600 HP 460V Dimensions are in inches and mm B Um
81. For a damping factor above 1 the velocity loop should not exhibit much overshoot and have a slower rise time for a given velocity loop bandwidth Parameter 703 System Inertia System Inertia Internal units Secs x 100 Programming Terminal units SECS Minimum Value 0 01 Maximum Value 655 0 Default Value 2 0 Description This parameter represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated armature and field current This parameter is calculated by the auto tune velocity system Parameter 704 At Speed 1 At Speed 1 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 rpm Description This parameter specifies a setpoint for determining when the motor has reached a given speed When the motor feedback speed is within the Up to Speed Tolerance Parameter 709 from the AT SPEED 1 setpoint then the AT SPEED 1 output bit 11 in the Logic Status Parameter 100 will be set to 1 Up to speed tolerance sets hysteresis for the At Speed 1 output 7 58 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 705 At Speed 2 At Speed 2 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed 8 rpm Description This parameter specifies a setpoint for
82. NN NEAN 2 00 50 8 isi Intake Air 55 Maximum 9505 5 19 131 8 l pes 230V Drive 460V Drive Weight A B D E 125 300 HP 250 600 HP 515 234 46 1168 32 00 813 18 50 470 44 00 1118 28 00 711 6 4 Cooling Airflow NEMA Type 12 Enclosures Wiring Clearance Disconnect Chapter 6 Installation In order to maintain proper cooling the drive must be mounted in a vertical position fuses in the upper right hand corner Refer to Figures 6 1 through 6 3 for the recommended minimum clearance of each drive The drive design produces up to a 10 C or 18 F air temperature rise when the drive is operated at full capacity Precautions should be taken not to exceed the maximum inlet ambient air temperature of 55 C 131 F If the drive is in an enclosed cabinet air circulation fans or a closed circuit heat exchanger may be required When the drive is mounted ina NEMA Type 12 nonventilated sheet metal enclosure the enclosure must be sized properly to allow adequate convection cooling The drive will dissipate a heat loss that is proportional to the amount of armature current being delivered The following table lists the approximate wattage dissipation of each drive based on its current rating Table 6 A Drive Wattage Dissipation Drive HP Rating 230VAC 460VAC Watts Dissipated 1 5 2 10 100 1 5 15 15 30 225 20 40 295 25 30 50 60 485 40 50 15 100 675 60 75 125 150 905 100 200 12
83. Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value Base Speed Default Value Base Speed 100 Description This parameter indicates the incremental speed above Forward Speed Limit Parameter 608 or Reverse Speed Limit Parameter 607 that is allowable before an absolute overspeed fault is indicated Not active in AVF 1 or No Feedback Device 3 Active in Torque Mode if Encoder or DCTACH is selected Parameter 725 External Overtemperature Delay Ext Overtemp Dly Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 3276 7 Default Value 1 0 Description This parameter specifies the length of time that the motor overtemperature discrete input must be low before a motor overtemperature fault will be indicated 7 63 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 726 SCR Overtemperature Delay SCR Overtemp Delay Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 3276 7 Default Value 1 0 Description This parameter specifies the length of time that the heatsink overtemperature discrete input must be low before an SCR overtemperature fault will be indicated Parameter 727 Stall Delay Stall Delay Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 10 0 Description This parameter specifies the length of time that the drive must be in curre
84. SCR cell There are 6 SCR cells per bridge for armature regenerative construction The non regenerative version has 6 SCRs only There are no reversing SCRs 1R through 6R SCR Cell Snubbers Each SCR cell is protected from rapid rate of voltage change dv dt using a resistor and capacitor network referred to as a Cell Snubber connected in parallel with the SCR cell Figure 4 3 Armature Regenerative Bridge Components Output e S S FS1 N Ne U Ule FS2 1M e FS3 4 among spam ma d b AB0444A To To To To Pulse Transformer Pulse Transformer Pulse Transformer Feedback Board A2 Board A3 Board A4 Board 4 4 Field Bridge Components Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC SCR Cell Fuses Each SCR cell is protected from high currents by a cell fuse located in each leg DC Contactor Output of the armature bridge is connected to the DC motor through the main DC contactor M1 Coil voltage to M1 is controlled by contacts from the pilot relay PR an external 115 VAC control input entering at TB5 Bridge Output Connections Bridge output connections labeled A
85. TD1 1PT CTs ACT 1 2 amp 3 FCT back see Fig 4 8 Wet Ft OCS a OC X 9 Note No resister needed Jumper Selection for Field Current MEVA drives Connection for AC current Feedback Scaling S E feedback burden resistor By User At Start Up Factory Installed 9 Connection to Power MFG Revision No Assembly Part No Stage Interface Table 4 A Feedback Board Jumpers see Table 8 J J1 125 300HP 240VDC Jumper 250 600HP 500VDC Position Field Current Range 1 18 3 42 4 ADC 2 8 6 18 4 ADC 3 2 3 8 7 ADC 4 1 0 2 4 ADC 4 7 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Power Stage Interface A7 The primary function of the Power Stage Interface board Fig 4 6 is to provide interface between the Main Control Board and the Power Bridge boards such as the Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards and the Feedback Board The primary functions performed include e Distribution of DC Control power to Main Control Board Provide 3 phase line synchronization signals to Main Control Board Produce all Armature and Field Bridge SCR gate signals from control signals provided from the Main Control Board e Contactor and other logic control with interface to Main Control Board for these functions 4 8 LU Figure 4 6 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC Power Stage Interface Hardw
86. This board allows the Bulletin 1395 to be controlled using an Allen Bradley PLC controller from either the PLC3 or PLCS family The 5V Node Adapter board power is generated internally in the Drive Board power provided by Drive discrete input 24VDC or 115VAC jumper select able Each channel can be configured as either Allen Bradley Remote I O RIO or Allen Bradley Data Highway DH in terfaces Compatible with PLC3 PLC250 PLC5 15 PLC5 25 PLC5 40 PLC5 60 and Controlview These programmable function blocks can be used to manipulate data One programmable discrete input is avail able 24VDC or 115VAC Catalog Number Explanation 230 Volt AC Input 1 100HP Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication References ControlNet Adapter Board Rev Requirement Requires Main Control Board Revision 8 10 or greater Communication One ControlNet channel with a redundant Channel connector to allow for backup connection in case one fiber optic cable fails Port One Network Access Port 1395 First Position Bulletin No 1395 A61 Second Position Horsepower CL Third Position Contactor Type Non Regenerative Letter A61N A62N A63N A64N A65N A66N A67N A68N A69N 70 ATIN HP 1HP 1 5 HP 2HP 3HP 5HP 7 5 10HP 15 20 25 30HP Regenerative A61 A62 A63 A64 A65 A66 A67
87. Value 0 9 Default Value 0 Description Represents the fractional part of Parameter 734 Discontinuous and together represent the average value of current feedback at the cross over point between discontinuous and continuous armature current This parameter provides additional resolution for parameter 734 K Discontinuous Both parameters are used to calculate the armature current loop gains This parameter is only available with firmware version 10 10 or later Parameter 746 Armature Voltage Offset Calibration Arm Volt Offset Internal units Volts x 10 Programming Terminal units Volts Minimum Value 20 0 Maximum Value 20 0 Default Value 0 Description This parameter is used for calibrating Parameter 105 Armature Voltage feedback to zero This parameter is only available with firmware version 10 10 or later Parameter 780 1395 Version Number 1395 Version No Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Description This non changeable parameter specifies the current firmware version number on the Main Control Board comprising the VP SP and CP Parameter 840 SP Indirect 1 SP Indirect 1 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description When programmed appears as a constant Source Parameter value at Parameter 10 and can be linked to a Sink Parameter ATTENTION For system indirect inpu
88. Voltage 10V Reference f 10V E Power Power Su 7 Suppl pply i COM 30 pply BIO TBs Standard Encoder 20 ENCA1 ChannelA 19 A ENCA1 18 B ENCB1 ChannelB 17 TEE B ENCB1 16 15 14 Supply 18 ENCPWR Voltage ENCGND 12 m 24V Out alo 10 24V Out 24 00 _ 24V ECOAST sesable 6M TEE 24V ECOAST 8 Drive Fault 7 Fault 2 1l Output 7 Fault T 115VAC Common t 5 115V Common Out 115V ECOAST2 115VAC ECOAST 4 3 115V ECOAST1 115VAC alo 5 Reset In D Shell for DHT 24VDC Motor Thermostat Programming Voltage Source J 1 1 Motor Terminal AB0427B lt O Common In 6 35 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 24 Typical Analog Input Connections TB3 IMPORTANT Connect 10V DC P S to either terminal 28 or 29 Not Both 10V DC PS EXT VELOCITY REF Reference 2 5k Ohm Minimum EXT VELOCITY REF P S COMMON TB4 TB 10 on 125 600 HP Uni directional Operation TB3 Forward Reverse 10V DC P S 10V DC P S EXT VELOCITY REF Reference EXT VELOCITY REF 2 5k Ohm Minimum P S COMMON IMPORTANT Connect shield to drive end only Other end is to be insu lated and left floating TB4 TB 10 on 125 600 HP External to the Drive Bi directional Operation Requires Regen Drive Analog Input Velocity and Trim Reference Connectio
89. When setting up a trend buffer the following equation is used for comparison of operand X and Y operand X operator operand Y The example above would result in the following formula When Parameter 106 is greater than Parameter 900 the trend buffer will be triggered Using the setup above parameter 106 would be monitored When its value exceeded 100 RPM the trend buffer would be triggered and 80 more samples at a rate of 1 every 24 ms would be taken Once the sampling is complete the data would be transferred to the output buffer and the trend would be deactivated Trend Setup Description This procedure describes how to setup trend buffers using a 1395 Program Terminal For information on setting up trend buffers from an Allen Bradley PLC refer to the 1395 Node Adapter publication Table 5 C details all parameters associated with trending Chapter 5 Functional Description Table 5 C Trending Parameters Description Trend 1 Parm Num Trend 2 Parm Num Trend 3 Parm Num Trend 4 Parm Num Trend Input Parameter 50 51 52 53 Trend Output Parameter 1 2 3 4 Signed Trend Constant 900 Constants are available to each buffer Signed Trend Constant 901 Constants are available to each buffer Signed Trend Constant 902 Constants are available to each buffer Signed Trend Constant 903 Constants are available to each buffer Bit Trend Constant 904 Constants are available to each buffer Bit Trend C
90. an external source by the user enters the drive at TB2 2 and 3 Fuse F3 provides protection against short circuits on the 115VAC input to the drive Figure 2 9 115 VAC Control Voltage Distribution Chassis Fe BT BEBE 777777777772 7777 5 PSI BD To M1 Relay J2 To PR Relay TB2 PSI Switcher 115 CONTROL 1 p aic F3 E 15 PWR 1 2 Control Voltage Ta a E a i T Feedback M1 6 PR NOTE provide DC Contactor energization a jumper or other external circuitry must be con nected to TB2 6 and 7 TE Signal GRND O TE TB4 FAN 4 PSI Switcher F1 B E To Power Supply DC Control Voltage Distribution The Unit Power Supply located on the PSI Switcher converts 115VAC to 5VDC and to 12VDC control voltages Control Voltage Common Control Voltage Common in the Bulletin 1395 is connected to signal ground at TB2 4 Refer to Chapter 6 for installation detail 2 11 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Relay Logic 2 12 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Main Contactor M1 Control Figure 2 10 illustrates the hardware associated with the control of the coil voltage applied to the Main DC contactor M1 The coil voltage originates at an external 115 VAC source at TB2 1 The source voltage may be interrupted before being
91. are preconfigured for the following signals DRIVE RUNNING and AT ZERO SPEED Analog Inputs Four preprogrammed 12 bit analog to digital inputs These inputs allow 10VDC analog signal to be converted to a 2048 digital signal thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the converted signal can be extended to 32767 The analog inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY TRIM REFERENCE Analog Outputs Four preprogrammed 11 bit digital to analog outputs These outputs allow a 1024 drive signal to be converted to a 10VDC analog output thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The analog outputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK FIELD CURRENT FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK and ARMATURE VOLTAGE FEEDBACK All inputs and outputs have the flexibility to be reconfigured by the user for other signals For a detailed description of the Discrete Adapter refer to the Discrete Adapter manual The Digital Reference Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface This interface supplies the Adapter Board with all logic voltages and communication capabilities The Digit
92. at other line voltages 3 1 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 1 Hardware Overview 3 Phase AC 1 Phase AC Unit Power Feedback TB 1 Supply A6 Board Al J2 J7 J6 J5 J8 Power Main Stage 7 Control Interface AME mere 3 Board A7 rm A8 J2 J9 Snubber A3 Bridge J4 J1 J5 NL Arm P T amp Snubber A2 Fld PT amp Snubber Programming Terminal DHT DMT CONTROL CONTROL POWER INTERFACE 3 2 Armature Bridge Components Isolation Transformer or Line Reactor F1 RR F2 BH F3 4 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC A general description of the components in the armature bridge Figures 3 2 and 3 3 and their operation is detailed here AC Line Reactor When connecting the drive directly to the main distribution system an AC line reactor must be used to guard against system disturbance When an isolation transformer matched to the unit rating is used an AC line reactor is not required Fast acting semiconductor fuses F1 F2 and F3 are standard on all drives Synchronization The three phase input to the drive is tapped and fused using fuses F4 F5 and F6 Fig 3 2 and enters the feedback board The feedback board scales down the voltage before being sent to the power stage interface where it is used to
93. by Minimum Field Regulate Speed Parameter 686 This parameter specifies the minimum speed at which field weakening control and CEMF regulation begins The drive will go into field weakening when actual speed is greater than base speed The CEMF regulation is always active when flux mode select Parameter 627 field weakening bit 1 is enabled The output of these two blocks is applied to a Field Flux Linearization function whose output becomes Field Current Reference Parameter 117 This field current reference value is summed with the field current feedback value in the Field PI Control Field Pl Control Circle 13 Field Current Feedback provided from the Feedback Control indicates the latest field current feedback value and is summed with Field Current Reference and applied to the Field Pl Control Parameter 737 determines the proportional gain and Parameter 738 determines the integral gain The output of the Field PI Control is converted to a time and is sent to the field SCR bridge 5 31 Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 5 1395 Block Diagram VELOCITY REFERENCE CONTROL LOGIC CMD LOGIC CMD LOGIC CMD 150 151 152 150 151 152 SPEED REFERENCE SELECT 180 181 152 VEL REF VEL REF C0 1 2 gt C127 LOGIC CMD BITS SPEED WHOLE FRACTION 2 1 0 REF PARAM 154 153 cor OGD 0 gt gt 0 BIT9 0 Preset Speed 1 633 Select Preset Speed 2 634 5 oT n 1 Preset Speed 3 635 Valu
94. can be modified by entering a new value in the system select parameters 5 9 Chapter 5 Functional Description Table 5 B Conirol Logic Source Parameters Number Function 100 Logic Status 16 bit word used to indicate the present operating condition of the drive 101 Drive Fault 16 bit word used to indicate fault conditions in the drive 102 Pre Ramp VelRef Velocity reference output from the Velocity Reference Control 103 Ramp Vel Ref Velocity reference output from the Ramp Control 104 Final Vel Ref Velocity Reference input to the Velocity Control which is the sum of the output from the Ramp Control Process Trim and Droop functions 105 Arm Voltage Fdbk Actual armature voltage 106 Velocity F dbk Final velocity feedback used as input to the Velocity P Control 107 Position Fdbk Final position feedback used as inputto the position control portion of the Velocity Control 108 Vel Feed Fwd Error term used in proportional path of the velocity regulator 109 Position Error Error between position reference and position feedback P107 110 Torque Command Internal Torque Reference 11 Arm Current R ef Torque command scaled by flux command 112 Arm Current Fdbk Actual armature current 113 Arm Cur PI Out Output of the Armature Current P Control 114 Arm Cur Fire Ang P113 converted to an angle reference modified by discontinuous current adaptation when operating in discontinuous current range 115 Flux
95. converter thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY Analog Outputs Two programmable analog outputs allow a signal to be converted to a 1OVDC analog output through a 11 bit digital to analog converter thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The digital drive signal can be any of the 1395 run time sink parameters All user connections to the board are made at terminal block TB3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive The outputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK All inputs and outputs have the flexibility to be reconfigured by the user for other signals For a detailed description of the Digital Reference Adapter refer to the Digital Reference Adapter manual The Node Adapter Board provides an interface between PLC family devices and the Main Control Board of the 1395 The board allows the 1395 to be controlled using an Allen Bradley PLC Controller from either the PLC3 or PLC5 family The Node Adapter Board is not preconfigured Refer to the Node Adapter manual for hardware integration information The Multi Communication Adapter Board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable
96. determining when the motor has reached a given speed When the motor feedback speed is within the Up to Speed Tolerance Parameter 709 from the AT SPEED 2 setpoint then the AT SPEED 2 output bit 12 in the Logic Status parameter Parameter 100 will become set Up to speed tolerance sets hysteresis for the At Speed 2 output Parameter 706 At Speed 3 At Speed 3 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed 4 rpm Description This parameter is used to specify the at speed 3 setpoint in the logic status Parameter 100 bit 13 This 1 bit field is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the at speed 3 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally if the Velocity Feedback Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to At Speed 3 Parameter 706 the At Speed 3 bit 13 is set to 1 Otherwise it is set to 0 Parameter 707 At Speed 4 At Speed 4 Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed 2 rpm Description This parameter is used to specify the at speed 4 setpoint in the logic status Parameter 100 bit 14 This 1 bit field is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the at speed 4 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally if the Velocity
97. engineering units where possible Maximum Maximum value in engineering units where possible Default Initial default in engineering units where possible Description Brief Description of the use and operation of the parameter Parameter 10 SP Output 1 SP Output 1 Internal Units Programming Terminal units Description This is a fast source from Parameter 840 Parameter 11 SP Output 2 SP Output 2 Internal Units Programming Terminal units Description This is a fast source from Parameter 841 Parameter 12 SP Output 3 SP Output 3 Internal Units Programming Terminal units Description This is a fast source from Parameter 842 Parameter 13 SP Output 4 SP Output 4 Internal Units Programming Terminal units Description This is a fast source from Parameter 843 Parameter 14 SP Output 5 SP Output 5 Internal Units Programming Terminal units Description This is a fast source from Parameter 844 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 100 Logic Status Logic Status Internal Units None Programming Terminal units Bit Field Description This is a word of status data that indicates conditions within the Drive in boolean logic Where a bit is set to 1 the corresponding condition in the drive is true otherwise the condition is false The bits in the Logic Status word are defined as Bit 15 14 13 12 1110 98 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DHT REF BITS 0 T C HANGEA BLE
98. features DESCRIPTION PRESENT VALUE SET TO KF Velocity Loop 45875 Field Flux Reference 100 Auto Tune Limit See Note Auto Tune Speed Base Speed if Possible Velocity Loop Damping Factor Default Value Recommended Armature Bridge Type refer to cat no Current Loop Damping Factor Default Value Recommended NOTE The default value can be used initially If the test fails on motor stalled VP 18 or Profile Timeout VP 50 the Auto Tune Limit Parm 698 may be set too low Current Loop Test The following procedure explains how to tune the current loop To simplify the operation it is recommended that the tuning be done using one of the Bulletin 1300 Programming Terminals 1 Verify that the motor is connected to the Drive 2 Select the Current test option on the Programming Terminal NOTE The field is enabled during part of the current loop test If desired the user can reduce Parm 676 Field Flux Reference to lessen the amount of motor rotation However the current loop test may be less accurate ATTENTION The current loop test closes the Drive contactor and applies power to the motor armature Potentially fatal voltages may be present at this time IMPORTANT The drive start command must be true for the entire time the test is being performed If a stop command is issued anytime during the test the motor will stop and the test will be aborted Check Parameter 624 Maintain Start to determine if the start command is la
99. here Supply Voltage Two of the three supply voltage phases are routed to the input of the field supply power bridge 1 1 and 1 2 Field Current Feedback Current at transformer FCT provides field current feedback information to the PSI Switcher board The PSI Switcher board rectifies the single phase feedback and scales the DC voltage using a burden resistor selected by the position of Jumper J1 on this board The DC voltage representing field current feedback is sent to the main control board Surge Suppression Surge suppressor 5 protects the field power bridge from high voltage line spikes and line surges on the incoming AC line MOV6 protects the motor field windings from line spikes on the output of the field bridge Inductor Inductor L1 protects the field power bridge SCRs from rapid rate of current changes di dt SCR Modules Field bridge SCRs are contained in one single phase full wave module PM7 Field Pulse Transformer The Field Pulse Transformers on the Power Board provide the gate firing pulses for the field SCRs Voltage Transient Protection RC networks contained on the power board are used to protect the SCRs against voltage transients dv dt Bridge Output Connections The output of the field bridge is connected to the Power Board Connections of the motor field is at TB1 3 and TB1 4 on the Power Board Figure 2 4 Field Bridge Components To PSI Switcher Bd J5 2 5
100. input to the drive at TB2 1 by the use of externally controlled contacts These external contacts may include an external master coast stop PLC controlled contacts permissive contacts etc Main contactor M1 coil voltage is controlled within the 1395 through the PSI Switcher Board Pilot Relay PR Control and K2 contacts in series with the 115 VAC Coast Stop input to the drive control coil voltage to the Pilot Relay K3 ECOAST Stop The ECOAST Stop as defined and illustrated is a contingency circuit designed to remove power from the motor in event of a malfunction in the solid state interface drive software which conforms to NEMA for electromechanical E Stop of a micro controlled drive When an ECOAST Stop is initiated the DC loop contactor is de energized and the motor will coast to a stop unless the drive is equipped with optional dynamic braking circuitry Relay K1 on the Power Stage Interface is the 24V ECOAST Stop relay and is controlled by 24VDC As shown in Figure 2 10 24VDC from the PSI Switcher Board is connected to TB3 12 and 11 At this point an external dry 24 VDC ECOAST stop contact could be used to control the application of 24VDC to K1 through TB3 9 TB3 12 and 10 should always be jumpered together to provide a return path for 24VDC If an external 24VDC ECOAST Stop contact is not used then TB3 9 and 11 must be jumpered In addition to the 24VDC ECOAST Stop there is an 115VAC ECOAST Stop circuit w
101. is 0 Drive Active From Logic Command 2 BIT 8 IGNORED Logic Command 1 Checked A Stop request from any Logic Command word will always be acknowledged regardless of the state of the command enable bit Jog 2 Bit 9 A I bit field specifying the drive to select the Jog 2 Speed Parameter 639 When set to 1 the contactor will close and velocity regulation will begin The drive will continue to run using the Jog 2 Speed reference until this bit is set to 0 At this time velocity reference will be set to zero and the drive will regenerate to a stop Once the motor has stopped velocity regulation will stop The contactor will remain closed for the time specified by Jog Dwell Parameter 711 The ramp function can be selected while jogging by properly programming JOG RAMP ENABLE Parameter 626 Jog 1 Bit 10 A I bit field specifying the drive to select the Jog 1 Speed Parameter 638 When set to 1 the contactor will close and velocity regulation will begin 7 27 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 28 The drive will continue to run using the Jog 1 speed reference until this bit is set to 0 At this time velocity reference will be set to zero and the drive regenerate to a stop Once the motor has stopped velocity regulation will stop The contactor will remain closed for the time specified by Jog Dwell Parameter 711 For jogging the ramp function may be using the Jog Ramp Enable Parameter 626 Normal St
102. is accomplished using a 9 pin type connector physically mounted on the end of TB3 The cable coming from the D shell connector is connected to J4 on the Main Control Board For a detailed description of the Programming Terminal refer to the Programming Terminal Installation and Operation Manual Figure 2 11 Programming Terminal 8 ALLEN BRADLEY LOCAL PROGRAMMING TERMINAL 2 EA REMOTE INC AB0446A Note The Programming Terminal can be hand held or door mounted when used with the mounting kit Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Adapter Boards External control devices such as a PLC discrete operators devices etc are interfaced with the Main Control Board through one of the two microbus ports labeled Port A J7 and Port B J6 on the Main Control Board The microbus is a 60 line bus designed specifically for the transfer of data between microprocessors The microbus is used on the Main Control Board to transfer data between devices on the board Additionally hardware on the Main Control Board allows data transfer between the microprocessor on the Main Control Board and external devices through the two microbus Ports Information coming from external devices must be changed first to the format req
103. is to be de energized the voltage at TP2 will be 24VDC Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Figure 4 13 Relay Logic NOTE A jumper 115 VAC VAC must be used if external cotacts Com sen 3 Phase Armature aren t used at AC TB5 6 amp 7 ga External 11 Contacts NOTE Topro 7 c vide DC Contac OC tor energization a jumperoroth m er external cir t cuitry must be connected to See Fig 4 12 9 TB5 8 and 9 J1 115 VAC Common E o w LET NOTE 24 VDC must not be used for any purpose other than ECOAST TB3 24 V OUT 12 24V T 11 OU 24VDC 24 V ECOAST 10 ECOAST Optional _ 24 V ECOAST 9 RDY FLT2 8 Closed When 8 Drive is not RDY FLT1 7 Faulted g 115V COMMON OUT 6 olo 115V ECOAST 2 5 ECOAST ECOAST 115V ECOAST 1 4 24VDC aL Reset In 3 or 115VAC 0 Source Reset Motor Temp In 2 O O Motor 2 Common In 1 Thermostat Common NOTE An explanation FAULTED Po wer of terminals 1 2 and 3is Stage provided on SYSTRIP SYSTRIP Interface 6 22 EINER Pg DCPILOT 4 17 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Options 4 18 Programming Terminal Interface Both versions of the handheld Programming Terminal are used to access information in the firmware of the 1395 Keypads on both the handheld programming terminal and
104. not in use 7 14 F UNCTIO rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun Trend Fun Trend Fun rend Fun ICLASSIFICATION PORT ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction ction Parameter Descriptions Parameters Numerical Chapter 7 Programming Parameters This section provides a brief description of the parameters in the Bulletin 1395 The programming terminal for the 1395 is also used for other products Parameters not used by the 1395 will appear as follows NOT USED NOT CHANGEABLE Information is provided in the following format Parameter Number Parameter Name Parameter Name as it appears on the Programming Terminal Internal Units Definition of per unit numbers used internally by the Bulletin 1395 Control Programming Terminal Units Scaled engineering units which appear on the Programming Terminal Minimum Minimum value in
105. operators devices etc are interfaced with the Main Control Board through one of the two microbus ports labeled PORT A J7 and PORT B J6 on the Main Control Board The microbus is a 60 line bus designed specifically for the transfer of data between microprocessors The microbus is used on the Main Control Board to transfer data between devices on the board Additionally hardware on the Main Control Board allows data transfer between the microprocessor on the Main Control Board and external devices through the two microbus Ports Information coming from external devices must be changed first to the format required by the microbus before being input to the microbus Port The processing of data is accomplished through the use of the following adapter boards Figure 3 16 Construction and Location of Adapter Boards AB0654A Adapter Boards Discrete Adapter Board Digital Reference Adapter Board Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC The Discrete Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface All user connections to the board are made at Terminal Block TB 3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive Digital Inputs The Discrete Adapter Board c
106. output contact of the Ready Fault relay located on the Power Stage Interface Board The contacts are rated for 1A at 24VDC or 0 6A at 115VAC 6 Wire 115VAC Supply Voltage It is recommended that the user ground the 115V secondary of the transformer The drive Does Not derive its own control voltage Therefore 115 VAC must be supplied to the drive from an external source A control transformer having a primary of 230V or 460V based on the drive rating and a secondary of 115V is recommended Primary and secondary must be fused to meet NEC code Fuse type FRN and FRS are recommended Terminal Connections and VA loads for the different ratings are outlined in Table 6 N 6 24 Chapter 6 Installation Table 6 N 115VAC Connections Drive Rating 115VAC Input Connection 1 30 HP 230VAC TB2 2 and 3 see Fig 6 13 2 60 HP 460VAC 60 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC TB5 4 and 5 see Fig 6 15 TB2 4 and 5 see Fig 6 14 Figure 6 14 115VAC Input and Contactor Control Connections 40 100 HP on 230VAC Series A 75 200 HP on 460VAC Series Line Reactor or Armature Isolation Bridge Transformer Optional External Control Contacts Power Stage Interface Board 460VAC See Step 4 8 L ISISISISISISISSIS S 7 Wire External Contactor Control Contacts Terminals TB2 or TB5 depending on horsepower rating provide connection to the exter
107. the Field Current Feedback derived from the current transformers in the incoming AC line to the Field Bridge The error between the field current reference and feedback produces a field Phase Angle which is sent to the Field Sync and Firing Logic 5 5 Chapter 5 Functional Description Configuration 5 6 Field Sync and Firing Logic The Phase Angle output from the Field Current Control is converted to a time reference which is synchronized to the Line Sync signal from the Armature Sync and Firing Logic to produce the gate firing pulses for the SCRs Figure 5 2 shows an overview of the parameters associated with configuration of the drive The 1395 has been designed to accept control input through the use of Adapter Boards A portion of the drive control has been designed to act as a black box from the point of view of external devices In order to perform the control functions required by the specific application it is necessary to configure various control and reference information such as logic commands speed reference and torque reference Additionally for the external control equipment to monitor the operating conditions in the drive logic status actual speed actual armature current etc configuration provides a way for this information to be transferred to the external devices Sink Parameters Several parameters associated with the control logic have been set aside specifically for the task of receiving input informati
108. used to support operation of the microprocessor program The primary functions performed include e Microbus interface e Control firmware e Analog signal interface Develop gate control signals sent to the Power Stage Interface Figure 4 7 Main Control Board Hardware Location P gt 45 Connection to Power Connection to Connection To Power Stage Interface Board Programming Terminal Stage Interface Board TP2 TP5 TP13 a TPi20 1 2 3 Er o J10 Y Tis 21 Connection 4 5 3 TP24 To TP23 Encoder Encoder O O 9 Voltage TP25 TP32 Selection o TP27 TP26 a 9 123 0 28 TP35 5 6 O1J8 o TP31TP29 J1 2 o 5v 12V J13 TP17 TP39 1 2 3444 TP38 TP30 o o J12 ps 1 2 2 10 3 4 TP43 TP 9 o o pis 20 50 45 47 44 46 UMC8 TP20 o o 49 SP TP58 o 7 1 lo Main Control 2lo Board O tps3 ISOH2V IGND 150 5 TP51TP52 56 55 57 123 48V DGND T2V 12V AGND Port A Port B To Adapter Board To Adapter Board rj X 4 10 E lt AB0667A Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Armatur
109. user in programming the drive for a specific application after initial start up Drives are shipped programmed with default values and are preconfigured for the options installed The drive parameters can be divided into the following categories Basic The basic parameters that must be programmed at the time of start up Setup The Setup parameters are default values that may require changing during start up Speed Reference The speed reference parameters are used as speed reference sources for the drive Input The input parameters accept information from sources outside the drive Autotune The autotune parameters are automatically set by the drive control during start up Occasionally they may require modification by the user Status The status parameters provide information about the drive and its operation The definition of terms related to the parameter table include Configuration The process of linking Sink to Source parameters Configuration Parameters Parameters used to transfer data between the drive control and external devices The Configuration Parameters are categorized into two types 1 Source Parameters Fast parameter used as a source of data 2 Sink Parameters Fast parameter used to receive data input Drive Units The actual value of the parameter as it is stored within the Drive parameter table The drive units may be converted to engineering units or to hexidecim
110. with screw terminals used to mount the board also used as the connections to the incoming AC line and DC bus Figure 3 9 Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Hardware Location Armature Pulse Be LE Board Pad N AB0666A Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A5 The primary functions of the Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Figure 3 10 include e Isolate power bridge circuitry from control circuitry Provide dv dt protection across SCRs The board is physically mounted on the field power bridge buswork with the screw terminals used to mount the board also being used as the connections to the incoming AC line and DC bus Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 10 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Hardware Location MFG Spare Part Connection to Power Stage Revision No Kit No Interface SCR Gate Pulses Connection to SCRs Connection to SCRs in PM7 of Field Bridge in PM8 of Field Bridge Peripheral Devices Unit Power Supply A6 The Unit Power Supply 115VAC input comes from the user external 115VAC power supply The AC voltage is rectified and regulated to produce 5 and 12VDC control voltages which are distributed to the 1395 control boards through the Power Stage Interface Figure 3 11 shows the location of components on the Unit Power Supply Figure 3 11 Unit Power
111. 0 10 DB Conductor Crimp Lug Hole Size 10 10 10 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 5 16 5 16 5 16 5 16 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 3 8 Lug Kit Cata log N 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 1370 umber LG40 LG52 LG56 LG68 LG92 LG104 LG110 LG120 LG140 LG160 LG180 LG204 LG228 LG248 LG268 LG280 The Rated Motor Armature Currentis taken directly from the motor nameplate or motor data The current listed in the table column 1 is the maximum current allowed for the Armature Conductor Size column 3 and the DC Contactor Rating column 2 The armature conductors are sized by multiplying the Rated Armature Current by 1 25 as provided for in NEC 430 22 1987 The DC lug ratings are determined from NEC Table 310 16 1987 for copper conductors insulation temperature rated at 75 C 167 atan ambient temperature of 30 C 86 F If conditions are other than shown in NEC Table 310 16 then refer to applicable codes The dynamic braking DB conductors are sized as in Note 2 but at half ampacity due to the short time duration of current flow in these conductors and has been sized to satisfy NEMA Standard ICS 3 302 62 Dynamic Braking If the load inertia is larger than that of the motor calculations must be made to determine correct conductor sizing and DB resistor wattage per NEMA Standard ICS 3 302 62 If the wire size of the DB condu
112. 0 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Programming Terminal Interface The handheld Programming Terminal is used to access information in the firmware of the 1395 Keypads on both the handheld programming terminal and the door mounted terminal shown in Figure 3 15 can be used to perform the following functions Monitor real time parameter values Change parameter values Start Stop the drive depending on Model of Programming Terminal Sets drive configuration e Backup parameter values to EEPROM e Monitor fault information Interface between the 1395 Main Control Board and the handheld Programming Terminal is accomplished using a 9 pin type connector physically mounted on the end of TB3 The cable coming from the D shell connector is connected to J4 on the Main Control Board For a detailed description of the Programming Terminal refer to the Programming Terminal Installation and Operation Manual Figure 3 15 Programming Terminal AB ALLEN BRADLEY LOCAL PROGRAMMING TERMINAL REMOTE INC AB0446A Note The Programming Terminal can be hand held or door mounted when used with the mounting kit 3 19 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Adapter Boards External control devices such as a PLC discrete
113. 00h 1 pu position Programming Terminal units None Description Position Error indicates the difference between the Position Reference and Position Feedback Parameter 107 Position Reference is the integrated value of Parameter 104 Final Vel Ref and has the same units as Parameter 107 Position Feedback Position Error when multiplied by the KI Velocity Loop gain becomes the integral part of the Torque Command Parameter 110 Parameter 110 Torque Command Torque Command Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU 100 rated torque Programming Terminal units Percent rated torque Description Torque Command indicates the latest torque reference value 10046 rated torque is the motor torque produced at rated motor armature current and rated motor field current The source of the Torque Command is determined by the selection made in Torque Mode Parameter 625 Parameter 111 Armature Current Reference Arm Current Ref Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU 100 rated arm current Programming Terminal units Amps Description The parameter indicates the latest armature current reference value This is the Torque Command after it has been divided by the Flux Command range limited to the forward and reverse current limits and then slew limited to the di dt limit value Parameter 668 7 21 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 22 Parameter 112 Armature Current Feedback Arm Current Fdbk Internal Units 4096
114. 1 gt e 1 223 P DISABLE P RATE 1 1 iT P RATE 2 1 a LLI 2 v Ou QU r U2 C2 0 8 MAND ENABLE i O 1l o elo OG uM T 11 NORMAL STOP T 13 CLOSE CONTACTOR T 14 CLEAR FAULT T 15 PROCESS TRIM MAND 3 REFERENCE A 1 20 e REFERENCE C P INCREMENT P DECREMENT P DISABLE o o 2 1 P RATE 2 MAND ENABLE 1 1 1 co N Hu elo n i gt 1 I 0G 1 T 11 NORMAL STOP VELOCITY REFERENCE FRACTION VELOCITY REFERENCE WHOLE TACH VELOCITY TORQUE REFERENCE FLUX FEED FORWARD CEMF REFERENCE PROCESS TRIM REFERENCE PROCESS TRIM FEEDBACK VEL INDIRECT 1 PAR 600 VEL INDIRECT 2 PAR 601 VEL INDIRECT 3 PAR 602 VEL INDIRECT 4 PAR 603 TORQUE REFERENCE 2 Linked To Parameter DHT PARAM 200 HARD LINKED 9 3 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Parameter Value List Record all parameter values or PLC references as finalized during start up in the following tables Table 9 C Parameter Values 600 VELOCITYPARAM1SEL PARI63 o SC 601 VELOCITY PARAM 2 5 164 o o y 602 VELOCITY PARAM 3 SEL PAR 165 Po 603 VELOCITY PARAM 4 SEL PAR 166 SC
115. 1 and A2 Fig 4 3 correspond to the NEMA standards for connection to the Al and A2 leads of the DC motor A general description of the components in the field bridge Figure 4 4 and their operation is covered here Supply Voltage The bridge requires two phases fused from an external source This is connected to TB8 1 and 3 as detailed in Chap 6 Installation Field Current Feedback Current Transformer FCT provides field current feedback information to the Feedback board at TB1 8 and 9 The Feedback board rectifies the single phase feedback and scales the DC voltage using a burden resistor selected by the position of Jumper J1 on the Feedback Board before being sent to the Power Stage Interface The DC voltage representing field current feedback is passed directly through the Power Stage Interface and sent to the Main Control Board Surge Suppression Surge suppressor 3MOV protects the field power bridge from line voltage spikes and line surges on the incoming AC line 2MONV protects the motor field windings from line spikes on the output of the field bridge Line Choke Line Choke protects the field power bridge SCRs from rapid rate of current changes di dt SCR Modules Field bridge SCRs are contained in modules made up of two 2 SCRs per package PM1 and PM2 SCR Snubbers Each forward and reverse armature SCR combination is protected from rapid rate of voltage changes dv dt using a series combinati
116. 14 Wn Filter 693 7 56 Z Zero Potential Bus TE 6 8 6 10 Zero Speed Tolerance 710 7 60 1 15 This Page Intentionally Left Blank 1 16 N 1 N 2 N 3 N 4 N 5 N 6 N 7 N 8 N 9 N 10 N 12 N 13 N 14 www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Br hlstra3e 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 6356 9077 Fax 65 6356 9011
117. 14 125 200 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 14 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 14 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 14 115VAC Input and Contactor Control Connections 1 30 HP 2 60 HP 6 24 125 300 HP 250 600 HP 6 27 40 100 HP 75 200 HP 6 25 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 115VAC Control Voltage 4 14 115VAC Control Voltage Illustration 4 14 AC Current Feedback 4 3 Adapter Board 4 1 4 19 Adapter Board Illustration 4 19 Analog Inputs 4 20 4 21 Analog Outputs 4 20 4 21 Armature Bridge Components 4 3 Armature Bridge Components Illustration 4 3 Armature Pulse Transformer Boards A2 A3 A4 4 11 Armature Pulse Transformer Boards Illustration 4 11 Armature Regenerative Bridge Components Illustra tion 4 4 Bridge Output Connections 4 5 Control Boards 4 7 Control Common 4 15 ControlNet Adapter Board 4 22 DC Contactor 4 5 DC Control Voltage Distribution 4 15 DC Power Distribution and Control Common Illustra tion 4 15 Digital Inputs 4 20 Digital Outputs 4 20 4 21 Digital Reference Adapter Board 4 20 Digital Reference Input 4 20 Discrete Adapter Board 4 20 ECOAST Stop 4 16 Feedback Board 4 7 Feedback Board Illustration 4 7 Feedback Board Jumpers 4 7 Field Bridge Components 4 5 Field Bridge Components Illustration 4 6 Field Current Feedback 4 5 Field Pulse Transformer 4 12 Field Pulse Transformer Illustration 4 12 Fuses 4 3 Ha
118. 150 COOLED MIR 60 Q RIP 200 COOLED MIR 60 O TRIP 2 0 MIR 0 CP FAULTS 1 35 49 RADIAN FILTER 00 9 5 Chapter 9 Reference Materials 9 6 649 650 651 652 653 657 658 659 660 661 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 698 699 700 701 102 103 Table 9 C Parameter Values cont DROOP PERCENT KP VELOCITY LOOP START TAPER SPEED END TAPER SPEED IN TAPER CURRENT 704 705 106 707 708 709 710 711 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 780 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Table 9 C Parameter Values cont ATSPEED PATSPEED2 ATSPEED3 PATSPEEDA PROCESS TRIM KI GAIN PROCESS TRIM HI LIM SCR OVERTEMP DLY AC LINE TOL DLY FIELD FAULT THRESHOLD 1 Cd a f FIELD FAILURE DLY y y KP FIELD LOOP CUR MAX BW CUR DAMP FACTOR 9 7 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Table 9 D Internal Configuration Parameters Param Internal Param Linked to Fast Sink Param gao SPINDRECTI 1 841 SP INDIRECT 2 842 SP INDIRECT 3
119. 2 GAIN C1 FILTER PROCESS PROCESS TRIM ae mud 4 PROC TRIM PROCESS TRIM CONTROL 713 HIGH LIM 718 PROC TRIM LOGIC CMD OUTPUT 150 151 152 mum 119 628 VALUE PROCESS TRIM REF 161 C15 gt lt gt o 4096 1PU i PROCESS TRIM PROC TRIM Le PROCESS 7 TRIM ENABLE PROCESS TRIM 717 CONTROL PROC TRIM Qo LO LIM VELOCITY FEEDBACK CONTROL 0 STOP LOGIC BASE MOTOR SPEED 606 Ferr 609 ENCODER 4096 BASE MOTOR RPM ENCODER PPR FEEDBACK DELTA Q POSITION ENCODER 0 ACCUMULATOR FEEDBACK AT POSITION INTEGRATOR Forward SCALING Pulses DIGITAL ENCODER ENCODER ENCODER VELOCITY CALCULATION VELOCITY 120 FDBK TACH 4096 Base Motor Speed TACHOMETER VELOCITY FEEDBACK VELOCITY 156 ARNIATURE VOLTAGE FILTER ARM VOLTAGE id GAIN 692 FDBK105 VLT gt Par i CEMF VELOCITY FDBK 0 LE ARM CURRENT EMF FLUX FDBK DEVICE sp FDBK 112 lt AMP gt CR PEUX TYPE 621 L Rn FEEDBACK fod ARM RESISTANCE FLUX DEVICE 614 Ra COMPENSATION SELECT IR CEMFFEEDBACKTO VEL FILTER SELECT 631 FLUX COMMAND COMPENSATION FLUX CONTROL FEEDBACK ON Sheet 3 FILTER SELECT Wy 693 5 34 Chapter 5 Functional Description VELOCITY PI CONTROL KF VELOCITY KP VELOCITY LOOP LOOP Final 661 Velocity 660 Feed Forward Vel Ref p _ 108 TACH SWITCH KP PM MG 690 KF GAIN KPGAN 65536 x 8 FEED FORWARD d AUTO TUNE GAIN 4
120. 25 1 Parameter 124 Velocity Error VELOCITY ERROR Internal units 4096 base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the difference between the Final Velocity Reference Param 104 and Velocity Feedback param 106 Parameter 125 Process Trim PI Input PTRIM PI INPUT Internal units 4096 1 per unit Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the input to the Process Trim Regulator Parameters 100 125 may not be reliable if the drive is hard or soft faulted As a result precautions should be taken when using these outputs for PLC s analog outputs to meters discrete outputs etc The ready faulted output on TB3 is designed to indicate drive fault status ATTENTION of the source outputs of the Drive 7 24 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 150 Logic Command 1 Logic 1 Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit Field Description This is a word of fast data used to control drive logic operation The information is contained in binary boolean form If a bit is set the associated function is enabled otherwise the function is disabled inactive The functions contained in Logic Command 1 are similar to those in Logic Command 2 and 3 The software ch
121. 395 Drive Control Boards Power Stage Interface Board Control Signal Common 1 30 230VAC 40 100 HP 230VAC 2 60 460VAC 75 200 460VAC TE TB 4 TB Terminals 4 amp 5 TB2 125 300 HP 230VAC NU N 250 600 HP 460VAC TB 10 Terminals 10 amp 11 TB5 Terminals 6 amp 7 TB2 On a multi drive system assure that the TE bus of each drive is directly connected to the system TE bus In addition the Safety Ground PE of each drive must be directly connected to the system PE bus IMPORTANT PE must be connected in a star fashion and not daisy chained 6 12 Power Wiring 1 2 3 Rated Motor Arm Current ADC 40 52 56 68 92 104 110 120 140 160 180 204 228 248 268 280 DC Contactor Rating ADC 56 56 56 110 110 110 110 180 180 180 180 280 280 280 280 280 Chapter 6 Installation It is recommended that an Allen Bradley DC Loop Contactor Lug Kit be ordered for proper wire terminations Table 6 E provides a listing and description of the available lug kits Table 6 E Allen Bradley Armature DC Loop Contactor Lug Kits Armature Conductor Size AWG 2 0 3 0 4 0 250MCM 300MCM 350MCM 400MCM 500MCM DB Conductor Size AWG A oS 3 0 Arm Conductor Crimp Lug Hole Size 10 10 10 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 5 16 5 16 5 16 5 16 1 2 10 10 1
122. 5 Relay Logic 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 12 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 13 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 16 125 200 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 17 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 17 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 18 Renewal Parts 1 30HP 2 60HP Series B 10 1 125 300 250 600HP Series B 10 8 40 100 75 200HP Series A 10 5 Resistor Burden 8 10 Reverse Bridge Current Limit 664 7 48 Reverse Speed Limit 607 7 33 S S Ramp 1 5 Safety Ground Connections 6 11 Safety Signal Ground 6 11 Scaling Circuit Illustration 6 32 6 37 SCR Cell Fuses 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 SCR Cell Snubbers 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 4 SCR Modules 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 5 SCR Overtemperature Delay 726 7 64 SCR Packaging 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 4 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 SCR Snubbers 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 Set Up Parameter Definition 7 2 Setting Trend Buffer Output Rate 5 23 Setting Trend Buffer Type 5 23 Set Up Parameters 8 12 Sink Definition 5 2 Parameters 5 6 Slave Percent 2 670 7 49 Slave Percent 669 7 49 Source Definition 5 2 Parameters 5 9 Source and Sink Parameters Partial Illustration 5 7 Table 5 8 SP Indirect 1 840 7 70 SP Indirect 2 841 7 71 SP Indirect 3 842 7 71 SP Indirect
123. 5 control to perform the drive functions is stored in the Parameter Table Each parameter entry in the parameter table contains the information illustrated in Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Parameter Entry Units 4 Name i e E Min E oe _Max_ 25 2 The parameter data may be obtained by the Programming Terminal or by external devices connected to either Port A or Port B using the appropriate Adapter Board The various elements of the parameter data are defined as Parameter Number The parameter number in decimal Hex Parameter number in hexidecimal Units Indicates the units displayed for the parameter value using the Programming Terminal and displaying the value using engineering units Name Parameter name as it appears on the Programming Terminal Init Value Parameter value as it will appear after the Drive Initialize command has been sent from the Programming Terminal The Init values are the same as the default values listed in the Parameter Descriptions section of this chapter Min Minimum allowable value for the parameter If no min value is given the parameter has not been assigned a minimum limit Max Maximum allowable value for the parameter If no max value is given the parameter has not been assigned a maximum limit EE Indicates whether the parameter can be ba
124. 65 125 200 250 400 2122 250 300 500 600 3456 The NEMA Type 12 enclosure should be sized such that 10 watts of power are dissipated for each 1 square foot of enclosure surface This area should not include the enclosure bottom or surfaces of the enclosure mounted against a wall The heat loss for additional equipment that is mounted in the enclosure should be added to the heat loss of the drive Although the minimum clearance should be maintained for proper cooling this space may not always provide proper wiring clearance The minimum allowable wire bending radius may necessitate that extra space be provided to accommodate power wiring Consult the governing code for the proper wiring method IMPORTANT The user is responsible for completing the installation of the drive system and to comply with all National and Local Electrical Codes The following information is to be used as a reference only 6 5 Chapter 6 Installation Wire Size and Type 6 6 if drive is not installed correctly The National Electrical Code NEC and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage WARNING Hazard of electric shock or equipment damage exist A main disconnect and lockout device with cabinet interlo
125. 75 200 HP Drives 3 13 Pilot Relay PR Control 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 12 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 16 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 17 Port 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 Definition 5 1 Position Error 109 7 21 Position Feedback 107 7 21 Post Samples 5 22 Setting the Rate 5 24 Power Board 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 6 Switch and Hardware Location 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 7 Power Connections Standard Field Voltage 6 15 6 16 6 17 Power Distribution 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 11 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 14 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 14 Power Feeder 6 8 Power Stage Interface 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 8 125 200 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 9 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 9 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 10 Jumper Settings 6 19 Pre Ramp Velocity Reference 102 7 20 Pre Power Checks 8 3 Checklist 8 4 Preset Speed 1 633 7 41 Preset Speed 2 634 7 42 Preset Speed 3 635 7 42 Preset Speed 4 636 7 42 Preset Speed 5 637 7 42 Preset Speeds 1 5 1 11 Process Trim 5 27 Process Trim Control Block Diagram 5 34 Process Trim Feedback 162 7 31 Process Trim Filter Constant 713 7 61 Process Trim High Limit 718 7 62 Process Trim High Sum 722 7 63 Process Trim KI Gain 715 7 61 Process Trim KP 716 7 61 Process Trim Lo
126. 910 and 911 for the trend trigger evaluation The available operators are 1 Greater Than GT 2 Less Than CLT 3 Equals EQ 4 Not Equals NE 5 Logical AND AND 6 Logical NAND NAND 7 Logical OR OR 8 Logical NOR NOR Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 913 Trend 1 Sampling Rate Tr 1 Sample Rate Internal units 1 0 001 secs Programming Terminal units Secs Minimum Value 0 004 Maximum Value 30 0 Default Value 0 020 Description This parameter specifies the interval at which the data for the fast source parameter linked with the Trend fast sink parameter is sampled It is programmable in increments of 4ms All values are rounded down to the nearest 4ms Parameter 914 Trend 1 Samples After Trigger Condition is True Tr 1 Post Samples Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 99 Default Value 30 Description This parameter specifies the number of data samples for the fast source Parameter to gather once the trigger evaluation becomes true Parameter 915 Trend 1 Contiguous Trigger Switch Tr 1 Cont Trigger Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies the type of trend The choices are One Shot Trend 0 Once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken as
127. 95 to be controlled using an Allen Bradley PLC Controller from either the PLC3 or PLCS family For a more detailed description of the Node Adapter refer to the Node Adapter Manual The Multi Communication Adapter Board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable of communicating over serial communications links The Multi Communication Adapter is not preconfigured Refer to the Multi Communication Board Software Hardware Reference Manual for hardware and integration information Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC ControlNet Adapter Board 4 22 The CNA board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable of communicating over ControlNet This adapter has the following features e One ControlNet channel with a redundant connector to allow for backup connection in case one cable fails e Compatible with all Allen Bradley PLCs and other products that support Programmable Controller Communication Commands e Compatible with Allen Bradley 1395 Drives equipped with Version 8 10 or greater software Introduction Terminology Chapter Functional Description Chapter 5 contains a general description of the functionality of the 1395 drive This description is intended to provide sufficient background information to support other procedures in this manual and to enable the reade
128. Board Board Three Phase Disconnect To Field im Drive Logic Communication Control Control Bridge D MEME Armature Current Feedback I B Interface with Parameter Table Three P hase AC Voltage Feedback 3 Ph Line Sync Armature Current Voltage r 4 Torque g J Reference Reference Armature Current Reference Armature Sync 8 External Select Control amp Firing Logic Bridae Torque d Reference Torque Reference DC Current Feedback Velocity Control Armature Voltage Feedback Line Sync _ Arm Ramp Control Encoder Veloci E Velocity Feedback Optional Velocity UU Feedback DC Device External Speed Reference Feedback Select Optional DC Tach Feedback Preset 1 Preset 2 Preset 3 Speed Preset 4 Reference Select E 5 Nos Field Flux Angle Field Sync amp Single Phase Control Firing Control Field Bridge To Discrete Board Field Current Feedback m Control Hardware Single Phase AC inel Supply from Three Software Phase Drive Input LL Hardware S oftware Interface 5 3 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 4 Communication Control The Communication Control block controls all of the data transfer The Programming Terminal communicates with the drive through an RS 422 serial communication link Internal commu
129. Command Output of the field flux control 116 AC Line Voltage Actual three phase input line voltage 117 Fld Current Ref Flux command scaled by the Field Flux Linearization Table 118 Fld Current F dbk Actual field current 119 Proc Trim Output Output of velocity trim control Linking Source to Sink Parameters In order for information from a Source parameter to be input to a Sink parameter a link must be made between the two desired parameters For example to send the information from Parameter 400 first Source parameter associated with Port A to Parameter 151 pre defined as Logic Cmd 2 input then Parameter 151 must be linked to Parameter 400 Linking of Parameter 151 to 400 is shown in Figure 5 3 Linking of parameters is accomplished using the drive Setup Mode on the Programming Terminal The drive will allow a total of 20 links to be made There are two fixed links that cannot be altered or reconfigured thereby allowing a maximum of 18 user configurable links Linking of Sources to Sinks is referred to as Configuring the drive For a complete description of how to use the Programming Terminal to configure the drive refer to the Programming Terminal Instruction Manual It should be 5 10 Chapter 5 Functional Description noted that the 1395 drive is shipped from the factory pre configured The user has the capability of reconfiguring the drive as required Figure 5 3 Linking Sources to Sinks Programming T
130. Config 14 EE Configuration 539 21BH PtB OUT Config 15 EE X Configuration 540 21CH PtB OUT Config 16 EE X Configuration 541 21DH PtB OUT Config 17 EE Configuration 542 21EH PtB OUT Config 18 EE X Configuration 543 21FH PtB OUT Config 19 EE Configuration 7 8 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT 544 220H PtB OUT Cnfg 20 EE X Configuration 545 221H PtB OUT Confg 21 EE X Configuration 546 222H PtB OUT Confg 22 EE Configuration 547 223H PtB OUT Config 23 EE Configuration 548 224H PtB OUT Config 24 EE Configuration 549 225H PtB OUT Config 25 EE Configuration 550 226H PtA IN Config 1 EE X Configuration 551 221H PtA IN Config 2 EE X Configuration 552 228H PtAIN Config 3 EE Configuration 553 229H PtA IN Config 4 EE Configuration 554 22AH PtA IN Config 5 EE Configuration 555 22BH PtA IN Config 6 Configuration 556 22CH PtA IN Config 7 EE X Configuration 557 22DH PtA IN Config 8 EE Configuration 558 22EH PtA IN Config 9 EE X Configuration 559 22FH PtA IN Config 10 EE Configuration 560 230H PtA IN Config 11 EE Configuration 561 231H PtA IN Config 12 EE Configuration 562 232H PtA IN Config 13 EE Configuration 563 233H PtA IN Config 14 EE Configuration 564 234H PtA IN Config 15 EE X Configuration 565 235H PtA IN Config 16 EE Configuration 566 236H PtA IN Config 17 EE Configuration 567 237H PtA IN Config 18
131. Current 1395 5 9 Oct 1995 Node Adapter I amp O Manual Ver 3 01 CURRENT 1395 523 Apr 1995 Encoder Drive Module N A CURRENT 1395 5 33 March 1992 Multi Comm Hardware amp Software Manual Ver 1 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 33 March 1995 Multi Comm Hardware amp Software Manual Ver 1 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 33 Apr 1996 Multi Comm Hardware amp Software Manual Ver 1 06 CURRENT 1395 522 Jan 1991 Digital Reference Adapter Board Ver 1 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 55 Apr 1996 Digital Ref Adapter Hardware amp Software Ver 1 02 CURRENT Reference Manual 1395 5 45 Jul 1997 Troubleshooting Manual Ver 1 8 CURRENT 1300 5 4 Aug 1989 1300 EHT CURRENT 1300 5 5 Aug 1989 1300 DMT CURRENT 1395 5 37 Sep 1998 ControlNet Adapter Manual Ver 1 5 CURRENT 1395 6 0 Mar 2002 Renewal Parts All CURRENT RENEWAL PARTS A current renewal parts publication is packaged with each unit at the time of shipment Contact your Rockwell Automation sales support office if additional renewal parts information is needed IMPORTANT Drives with Motor Control Center MCC Construction have a different User manual configuration Contact your local Rockwell Automation sales support office for more information NOTE Publication Date information is as of date of this manual Manuals may be updated and have newer Publication Dates than what is shown above Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and
132. Digital Reference Input 6 34 Encoder Connections 6 34 Example Configuration 6 35 Scaling Circuit 6 37 Tach Velocity 6 36 Typical Analog Input Connections 6 36 Digital Reference Board Specifications 1 6 Digital Reference Input 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 Dimensions 1 30 HP 230V 2 60 HP 460V 6 2 125 300 HP 230V 250 600 HP 460 6 4 40 100 HP 230V 75 200 HP 460V 6 3 Disconnect 6 5 Discrete Adapter Board 6 29 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 16 115VAC Connection 6 29 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 20 24VDC Connection Digital Input 6 31 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 21 Analog Input 6 31 Analog Output 6 33 Digital Reference Adapter Board 6 34 Example Configuration 5 12 6 30 Example Configuration Illustration 5 13 Scaling Circuit Illustration 6 32 Specifications 1 5 Tach Velocity 6 32 Typical 24VDC input Connections 6 31 Typical Analog Input Connections 6 31 Drive Accessories 1 3 Inspection 1 3 Publication References 1 10 Receiving Information 1 3 Specifications 1 4 Standard Features 1 2 Storage 1 3 Unpacking 1 3 Drive Calibration Verification 8 17 Drive Configuration 5 6 Drive Fault 101 7 18 Drive Logic Control Definition 5 4 Drive Options 1 2 Drive Ready Faulted 1 5 Drive Tuning Current Loop Test 8 19 Current Loop Tune 8 20 Drive Setup Autotune Current 8 19 Field Flux Tuning 8 21
133. Dly Fault Report Fault Select Fdbk Device Type Field Economy Delay Field Economy Ref Field Fault Threshold Final Vel Ref Fld Cur Ref Fld Cur Fdbk PARAMETER NO 724 116 651 733 114 113 111 112 614 105 746 704 698 699 606 744 120 160 687 622 743 741 742 652 653 668 101 658 657 122 609 666 725 630 623 621 675 674 729 104 117 118 708 PAGE REFERENCE 7 63 7 22 7 45 7 65 7 22 7 22 7 21 7 22 7 35 7 20 7 70 7 58 7 60 7 56 7 57 7 33 7 69 7 23 7 31 7 54 7 37 7 43 7 68 7 68 7 46 7 46 7 49 7 18 7 47 7 46 7 24 7 33 7 48 1 63 7 41 7 37 7 36 7 50 7 50 7 64 7 20 7 22 7 23 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Parameter Reference Listing Alphabetical PARAMETER NAME PARAMETER NO PAGE REFERENCE Fid Failure Delay 730 765 Fld Flux Ref 676 7 51 Fld I 0 8 Flux 677 7 51 Fld I 1 8 Flux 678 7 51 Fld I 2 8 Flux 679 7 52 Fld I 3 8 Flux 680 7 52 Fld I 4 8 Flux 681 7 53 Fld I 5 8 Flux 682 7 53 Fld I 6 8 Flux 683 7 53 Fld I 7 8 Flux 684 7 53 Fld I 1 0 Flux 685 7 54 Fld Weakened Speed 686 7 54 Flux Feed Forward 159 7 23 Flux Command 115 7 22 Flux Mode Select 627 7 39 Flux Trim 121 7 23 Fwd Brdg Cur Lim 663 7 48 Fwd Speed Lim 608 7 33 Jog Dwell 711 7 60 Jog Ramp Enable 626 7 39 Jog 1 Speed 638 7 42 Jog 2 Speed 639 7 43 K AC Volts 740 7 67 K Arm Volts 739 7 67 K Disc Fraction 745 7 70 K Discontinuous 734 7 66 KF Velocity Loop 661 7 47 KI Arm
134. ERIES B 10 8 Manual Objectives Who Should Use This Manual Chapter Objective gt Chapter Introduction Inspection and Storage and Publication References The purpose of this manual is to provide the user with the necessary information to install program start up and maintain the1395 DC Drive This manual should be read in its entirety before operating servicing or initializing the 1395 Drive This manual must be consulted first as it will reference other 1395 manuals for troubleshooting or option initialization This manual covers three different series of 1395 Drive and is organized with each topic broken down by horsepower range This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing the 1395 DC Drive You must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology programming procedures required equipment and safety precautions as typical applications will consist of a properly rated DC motor with or without feedback based on performance requirements a line impedance device line reactor or isolation transformer and the 1395 A programming terminal is required to set up the drive and for enhanced monitoring and diagnostics and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the Drive Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage WARNING Only perso
135. Fault Field 0 Fault Field 1 Active Logic Command 0 Active Logic Command 1 Contactor Closed Drive Running Running Reverse Ready At Current Limit At Set Speed At Zero Speed At Speed 1 At Speed 2 At Speed 3 At Speed 4 15 At 5 DEFINITIONS BO o Jor o m 11 Fault Field 0 1 Bits 0 1 This 2 bit field denotes the fault status of the Drive as follows Fit 1 Fit Fid 0 DEFINITION 0 0 No Fault 0 Warning Fault 1 0 Soft Fault 1 1 Hard Fault Active Logic Command 0 1 Bits 2 3 This 2 bit field denotes the logic command the Drive is acting upon as follows Logic 1 Logic CMD DEFINITION 0 1 Parameter 150 1 0 Parameter 151 1 1 Parameter 152 7 16 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Contactor closed Bit 4 A 1 bit field indicating the status of the contactor 1 denotes contactor closed and 0 denotes open Drive running Bit 5 A 1 bit field when set to 1 indicates the drive has acknowledged the start or jog inputs in the logic command and is regulating speed 1 denotes Drive is running and zero not running Running reverse Bit 6 A 1 bit field indicating the motor is moving at a non zero velocity in the reverse direction 1 denotes reverse rotation and 0 denotes zero or forward rotation Ready Bit 7 A 1 bit field when set to 1 indicates the drive is ready to accept a start command and regulate to the speed or torque selected Set to 0 indicates no
136. H 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x BS RPM Maximum Value 0 RPM Default Value 6 x Base Speed RPM Description This parameter is associated with the Speed trim option of the Process Trim Select Parameter 628 1 Parameter 721 will be in use when the speed trim option is enabled and the Process Trim Regulator has been enabled The value in Parameter 721 will be used as the lower limit on the sum of the Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 103 and the output of Process Trim Parameter 119 The limited sum will appear as the Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 Parameter 722 Process Trim High Sum Proc Trim High Sum Internal units 4096 1000H 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 RPM Maximum Value 6 x BS RPM Default Value 6 x BS RPM Description This parameter is the upper limit on the sum of the Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 103 and the output of Process Trim Parameter 119 Parameter 722 will be in use when the speed trim option is enabled and the Process Trim Regulator has been enabled The value in Parameter 722 will be used as the high limit on the sum of the Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 103 and the output of Process Trim Parameter 119 The limited sum will appear as the Final Velocity Reference Parameter104 Parameter 724 Absolute Overspeed ABS Overspeed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed
137. H PtB IN Par9 Fast Source 309 135H PtB In 10 FastSource 350 15EH Out Par1 Fast Sink 351 15FH Out Par 2 Fast Sink 352 160H Out Par 3 Fast Sink 353 161H PtB Out Par 4 Fast Sink 354 162H Out Par5 Fast Sink 355 163H PtB Out Par 6 Fast Sink 356 164H Out Par 7 Fast Sink 357 165H Out Par 8 Fast Sink 358 166H Out Par 9 Fast Sink 359 167H PtB Out Par 10 Fast Sink 400 190H PtA IN Parl Fast Source 401 191H In Par 2 Fast Source 402 192H PtA In Par 3 Fast Source 403 193H In Par 4 Fast Source 404 194H PtA In Par5 Fast Source 405 195H In Par 6 Fast Source 406 196H PtA IN Par 7 Fast Source 407 197H PtA IN Par8 Fast Source 408 198H PtA IN Par 9 Fast Source 409 199H PtA IN Par 10 Fast Source 450 1C2H PtA OUT Par1 FastSink 451 1C3H Out Par 2 Fast Sink 452 1C4H Out Par 3 FastSink 453 1C5H PtA OUT Par4 FastSink 454 1C6H PtA OUT 5 Fast Sink 455 1C7H PtA OUT Par 6 FastSink 456 1C8H PtA OUT Par 7 FastSink 45 1C9H PtA OUT Par8 FastSink 458 1CAH PtA OUT Par 9 FastSink 459 1CBH PtA OUT Par 10 FastSink 500 1 4 PtB IN Cnfg 1 EE Configuration 501 1F5H PtB IN Cnfg 2 EE X Configuration 502 1F6H PtB IN Cnfg 3 EE X Configuration 503 1F7H PtB IN Cnfg 4 EE Configuration 504 1F8H PtB IN Cnfg 5 EE Configuration 505 1F9H PtB IN Cnfg 6 EE Configuration 7 7 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MI
138. Jog 1 Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the Drive when Jog 1 has been selected in the logic command word 7 42 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 639 Jog 2 Speed Jog 2 Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the Drive when Jog 2 has been selected in the logic command word Parameter 641 Mop Accel 1 MOP Accel 1 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the acceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 1 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to accelerate from 0 to base speed Parameter 642 Mop Accel 2 MOP Accel 2 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the acceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 2 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to accelerate
139. Jumper Settings connected jumpers Jumper 5VDC Position 12 0 Position Purpose J8 1 2 2 3 Encoder Voltage Selection 19 129 2 3 Encoder Voltage Selection J10 122 2 3 Encoder Voltage Selection NOTE The encoder jumpers J8 J10 are set for the voltage output of the encoder Jumper Position Purpose 14 1 2 EE Write Enabled 2 3 EE Write Disabled Chapter 6 Installation Control Connections 6 20 position To guard against possible damage to the Main Control ATTENTION Jumpers J8 through J10 must all be in the same Board ensure that jumpers are positioned correctly for your application Table 6 K Main Control Board Jumper Settings non connected jumpers Jumper 5VDC Position 12VDC Position Purpose J12 No Connection No Connection Internal Use Do Not Use 113 No Connection No Connection Internal Use Do Not Use 15 No Connection No Connection Internal Use Do Not Use jumpers J12 J13 and J15 Making connection at these jumpers ATTENTION No connections should be attempted on could cause damage to the Main Control Board A user installed 115 VAC power supply is required to power the Power Stage Interface Board power supply DC contactor and fans It is recommended that a control transformer be used to provide the 115 VAC supply Refer to Table 6 L for current requirements and Figure 6 13 or Figure 6 14 for connection information Table 6 L 115VAC Control Circuit Current Requirements 230V Drive 1 15 HP 20 30 H
140. KTK R F4 F5 F6 250V 1A MDL F7 250V 5A MDX F8 Fuses Line Heat Sink Thermoswitch Pilot Relay Suppressor Control 115VAC 4 MOV Suppressor Field 2 3 MOV Suppressor Pilot Relay SP 2 Suppressor Three P hase 1 MOV SCR Armature SCR Field Transformer 24V Supply Quantity fe fe le Chapter 10 Renewal Parts 10 6 20 22 behind fuse plate 4 f a fF 6 back of first 5 swing down panel AB0673A 16 bottom of drive Chapter 10 Renewal Parts SEEN 10 7 Chapter 10 Renewal Parts 125 300HP 230VAC Reference 250 600HP 460VAC Number Description Quantity SERIES B 2 Armature Pulse Board 3 3 Digital Reference Adapter Board 1 4 Discrete Adapter Board 1 5 Feedback Board 1 6 Field Pulse Board 1 7 Main Control Board 1 8 Multi Communication Adapter Board 1 7A Control Net Adapter Board 1 9 Node Adapter Board 1 9 Power Stage Interface Board 1 10 Power Supply Board 1 11 Contactor 1 12 Fans 3 13 Fan Switch 3 Fuses 14 600V 20A KTK R F1 F2 F3 3 15 250V 1 5A MDL F5 1 16 250V 7A MSL F4 1 17 SCR F7 to F12 6 18 Pilot Relay 1 19 SCR Cell Assembly 3 20 SCR Field 2 21 Suppressor Control 115
141. Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Description Parameter 622 selects the location of the contactor in the circuit The choices are AC Contactor Mode 0 Contactor interrupts AC supply Contactor will not automatically close open with Drive Start Stop operation DC Contactor Mode 1 Contactor interrupts DC armature circuit Contactor will automatically close open with Drive Start Stop operation Parameter 623 Fault Select Fault Select Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit adjustable units Minimum Value All bits off Maximum Value All bits on Default Value All bits set to 1 Description This word indicates the boolean selection of soft or warning configurable faults for the drive If a bit is set to 1 the corresponding fault is treated as soft otherwise it is considered a warning Soft faults disable drive operation Warning faults are only reported and the drive may continue to run Refer to Chapter 2 in the Troubleshooting Manual for a detailed description of these faults The bits in this word are selected as follows Bit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 76 54 3 2 1 0 SCR OVERTEMP 1 MOTOR OVERTEMP OVERLOAD TRIPPED STALL AC VOLTAGE WAITING SAFE ARM VOLTS WAITING ZERO ARM CURR BRIDGE OVERLOAD NOT USED 9 NOT USED 10 NOT USED 11 NOT USED 12 NOT USED 13 USED 14 NOT USED 19 NOT USED DEFINITIONS COIN o Aje Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 624 Maint
142. N MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT 506 1FAH PtB IN Confg 7 EE Configuration 507 1FBH PtB IN Confg 8 EE X Configuration 508 1FCH PtB IN Confg 9 EE X Configuration 509 1FDH PtB IN Config 10 EE X Configuration 510 1FEH PtB IN Config 11 EE Configuration 511 1FFH PtB IN Config 12 EE X Configuration 512 200H PtB IN Config 13 EE X Configuration 513 201H PtB IN Config 14 EE Configuration 514 202H PtB IN Config 15 EE X Configuration 515 203H PtB IN Config 16 EE Configuration 516 204H PtB IN Config 17 EE Configuration 517 205H PtB IN Config 18 EE Configuration 518 206H PtB IN Config 19 EE Configuration 519 207H PtB IN Config 20 EE Configuration 520 208H PtB IN Config 21 EE Configuration 521 209H PtB IN Config 22 EE Configuration 522 20AH PtB IN Config 23 EE Configuration 523 20BH PtB IN Config 24 EE Configuration 524 20CH PtB IN Config 25 EE Configuration 525 20DH PtB OUT Config 1 EE Configuration 526 20EH PtB OUT Config 2 EE X Configuration 521 20FH PtB OUT Config 3 EE Configuration 528 210H PtB OUT Config 4 EE Configuration 529 211H PtB OUT Config 5 EE Configuration 530 212H PtB OUT Config 5 EE X Configuration 531 213H PtB OUT Config 7 EE Configuration 532 214H PtB OUT Config 8 EE Configuration 533 215H PtB OUT Config 9 EE X Configuration 534 216H PtB OUT Config 10 EE Configuration 535 217H PtB OUT Config 11 EE Configuration 536 218H PtB OUT Config 12 EE Configuration 537 219H PtB OUT Config 13 EE X Configuration 538 21AH PtB OUT
143. P 250 600 HP Drives 4 10 125 200 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 10 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 11 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 11 Jumper Settings 6 19 6 20 Main Control Relay 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 12 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 16 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 17 Maintained Start 624 7 38 Manual Audience 1 1 Objectives 1 1 Maximum Current Loop Bandwidth 742 7 68 Microbus 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 Definition 5 1 Minimum Tapered Current 667 7 49 MOP 1 5 Mop Accel 1 641 7 43 Mop Accel 2 642 7 43 Mop Accel 3 643 7 43 Mop Accel 4 644 7 44 MOP Control Block Diagram 5 32 Mop Decel 1 645 7 44 Mop Decel 2 646 7 44 Mop Decel 3 647 7 44 Mop Decel 4 648 7 45 Mop Max Speed 649 7 45 Mop Min Speed 650 7 45 Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks 8 16 Motor Armature Full Load Amp 611 7 34 Motor Connection 6 8 for CCW Rotation 6 14 Motor Inertia 613 7 34 Motor Operated Pot 1 5 Motor Overload Select 629 7 40 Motor Thermostat 1 5 Mounting 6 1 Multi Communication Adapter Board 6 40 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 17 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 21 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 22 Specifications 1 6 N NEMA Type 12 Enclosures 6 5 Node Adapter Board 6 40 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 17 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 21 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 22 N
144. P 40 50 HP 60 75 HP 100 HP 460V Drive 2 30 HP 40 60 HP 75 100 HP 125 150 HP 200 HP Total Sealed Current 1230 2 083 2283 2910 310 Total Inrush Current 2 210 3 600 8 150 12 790 16 150 125 to 600 HP drives require a 0 750 kVA control transformer The current required for the 115V discrete inputs and outputs must be added to the control circuit current requirement for proper sizing of the control transformer Input and output signals can be 24VDC but will require a separate 24VDC power supply in addition to basic 115VAC control circuit requirement All control wiring to external devices except for contactor control is terminated in the drive at terminal block TB3 Signal definitions for terminals 1 20 have been predetermined and are independent of drive application Figure 6 12 illustrates these terminals with their signal definitions TB3 is attached to a mounting rail at the bottom of the drive chassis It provides a wiring connection for customer supplied control and signal devices along with encoder interface and auxiliary peripheral devices Chapter 6 Installation Additional individual terminal blocks can be attached to the mounting rail to meet application requirements These additional terminal blocks are supplied when using an adapter board to allow for I O to and from the drive Control Wiring Procedure l Wire Encoder to TB3 If an encoder is used refer to the encoder instruction manual for proper wiring to t
145. PM Description Velocity Feedback indicates the latest measured motor velocity This information could originate from a digital encoder analog tachometer or armature voltage feedback depending upon the selected feedback device Parameter 621 7 20 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 107 Position Feedback Position Fdbk Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU 1 pu position Programming Terminal units None Description Position Feedback indicates the latest measured angular motor position This information could originate from a digital encoder analog tachometer or armature voltage feedback depending upon the selected feedback device Parameter 621 This signal will be scaled so that 31250 represents the change in motor position that will occur over 1 second when running at base motor speed It is also true that the position change per motor revolution is equal to 1 875 000 base motor speed in RPM Parameter 108 Velocity Feed Forward Vel Feed Fwd Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description Velocity Feed Forward indicates the difference between the Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 multiplied by the KF term and Velocity Feedback Parameter 106 This value when multiplied by the KP Velocity Loop gain divided by 8 becomes the proportional part of the Torque Command Parameter 109 Position Error Position Error Internal Units 4096 10
146. Processor Faults 1 Select Velocity Processor Faults Parameter 631 Velocity Feedback Filter Select Vel Filter Selct Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Description This parameter selects a 2 pole feedback filter or a lead lag velocity feedback filter When option 3 is selected Parameters 692 KN Filter and Parameter 693 Wn Filter must be configured One of four selections can be made as follows 0 No filter 35 49 radian filter 2 20 40 radian filter 3 Lead Lag velocity filter Parameter 632 Warning Select WARNING SELECT Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit field Minimum Value All bits off Maximum Value All bits on Default Value 1 Description This parameter can enable disable certain warning fault detection If set to a 1 that particular fault will not be reported in the fault word Parameter 101 or in the fault queue If set to 0 the fault will be detected and reported as usual The following bits define the fault Bit 0 Motor overload pending Bit 1 Excessive Armature volts demand Bit 2 Bridge overload pending Parameter 633 Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 1 Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This will be the velocity reference used by the drive when preset 1 has been selected in the logic command word
147. Reference Ramp Vel Ref Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description This parameter indicates the value of the Ramp Velocity Reference after being processed by the Linear Accel Decel Ramp and S Contour filter The number contained in this variable is conditionally offset by the output of the Droop and Process Trim functions and then becomes the Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 The value of Parameter 103 represents the most significant 16 bits or upper word when a 32 bit speed reference is in use Parameter 104 Final Velocity Reference Final Vel Ref Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description This parameter indicates the value of the Ramp Velocity Reference after being offset by the Droop Compensation and Process Trim output variables The value of Parameter 104 represents the most significant 16 bits or upper word when a 32 bit speed reference is in use Parameter 105 Armature Voltage Feedback Arm Voltage Fdbk Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU rated Motor voltage Programming Terminal units volts Description This parameter indicates the present value of the armature voltage feedback It is scaled in internal units so that a value of 4096 represents rated motor voltage Parameter 106 Velocity Feedback Velocity Fdbk Internal Units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units R
148. Reference Input 10 Discrete Inputs 5 Discrete Outputs 24VDC 2 Analog Inputs 10 2 Analog Outputs 10VDC Accessories Receiving Unpacking Inspection Storing Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication References e Node Adapter Board Provides an interface between external push buttons pots devices and the Bulletin 1395 The board allows the Bulletin 1395 to be controlled using an Allen Bradley Programmable Controller from the PLC3 or PLCS family Multi Communications Adapter Board Contains the hardware necessary to connect the 1395 to Allen Bradley s RIO or Data Highway Plus communication links ControlNet Adapter Board contains the hardware necessary to connect the 1395 to a ControlNet Network e Normally Closed DB contact on the main motor contactor Auxiliary Contact on the motor contactor for special interlocks 1 N O 1 N C e ine Reactors e Dynamic Braking It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company Check the item s received against the purchase order If any items are obviously damaged it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking it is again the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent The shipping contai
149. S lt gt FDBK RATED MOTOR VOLT 4096 RATED V 739 ARM VOLT 5 37 Chapter 5 Functional Description This Page Intentionally Left Blank 5 38 Chapter Objectives Environment Mounting Chapter Installation The following data will guide you in planning the installation of Bulletin 1395 drives rated at 1 300HP 230VAC and 2 600HP 460VAC For 1395 drives rated at or above 700HP 460 VAC or 750HP 575VAC 660VAC refer to publication 2361 5 01 for installation instructions Since most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed IMPORTANT The end user is responsible for completing the installation wiring and grounding of the 1395 drive and for complying with all National and Local Electrical Codes proper installation The National Electrical Code and any other governing regional or local code will overrule this information The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation WARNING The following information is merely a guide for The drive must be mounted in a clean dry location Contamination from oils corrosive vapors and abrasive debris must be kept out o
150. SWITCH KP Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 10 Function Tach Loss Recovery Description This parameter establishes the Kp gain that will be used in the Velocity Regulator following an automatic Tach Switchover to Armature Voltage Feedback Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Available in Version 5 01 and Later Firmware 7 56 Parameter 691 Tach Switch Select TACH SWITCH SEL Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Function Tach Loss Recovery Description This parameter selects the automatic Tach Switchover to Armature Voltage Feedback feature When set to a one a malfunction of the selected velocity feedback device will cause a warning to be reported and the drive will continue to run using Armature Voltage feedback When set to a zero default value a tach loss condition will cause a soft fault to occur and the drive will coast stop Parameter 692 Kn Filter Internal units Programming Terminal units Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 512 Description When using a lead lag filter and Parameter 631 3 the gain of the filter can be selected The transfer function G s kn 256 s n s wn describe the filter Parameter 693 Wn Filter Internal units Programming Terminal units Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 500 D
151. Supply Hardware Location gt Unit Power T A Supply Board AB0663B 3 13 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Power Distribution 115VAC Control Voltage Figure 3 12 illustrates the distribution of 115VAC control voltage within the Bulletin 1395 Single phase 115 VAC control voltage provided from an external source by the user enters the drive at TB2 4 and 5 Fuse F8 provides protection against short circuits on the 115VAC input to the drive TB5 an internal terminal block distributes control voltage to components within the 1395 Figure 3 12 115 VAC Control Voltage Distribution TB2 To Fe 14 See To M1 Relay Motor E Fig Field 3 4 To PR Relay 3 115 VAC F8 F7 Control I di H1 X1 Power Common See L PE 3 13 x2 SPARE NOTE To provide DC Contactor energization a jumper or other ex ternal circuitry must be connected between TB2 8 and TB2 9 8 14 i 1PT E EX TIE T 68 oof xil ol o 8 e 4 MOV Power Stage Interface Number of fans varies with Drive size Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC DC Control Voltage Distribution The Unit Power Supply c
152. System tests 1 Select the Velocity Loop Tune option Drive Setup Autotune Vel Tune on the program terminal 2 The program will display the maximum bandwidth possible and allow you to de tune the loop from there Enter a new bandwidth or press ENTER to accept the current value 3 The Drive will now calibrate the velocity loop gains and return the status of the tuning procedure 4 If the tune was successful continue to the Field Flux Tuning Procedure otherwise refer to the troubleshooting manual The test just performed writes the value of Parameter 659 660 and 700 when option to save in EEPROM is executed Field Flux Tuning This procedure will setup the field flux table Parameters 677 through 684 and the rated motor field current Parameter 612 based on the actual motor characteristics 1 Record the value of the field flux reference Parm 676 2 Set the field flux reference and the field economy reference to 100 8 21 Chapter 8 Start Up Application Setup 8 22 3 Set KI KP for the CEMF regulator Parameters 672 673 to their default value 4 Set Parameter 612 the rated motor field current to the actual value referring to the motor nameplate data IMPORTANT The Drive start command must be true for the entire time the test is being performed If a stop command is issued anytime during the test the motor will stop and the test will be aborted Check Parameter 624 maintain start to determine
153. T PUT PUT ATUS TACTOR CLOSE VE RUNNING DY T9 SET SPEED T 10 AT ZERO SPEED T 11 AT SPEED 1 T 12 AT SPEED 2 T 13 AT SPEED 3 T 14 AT SPEED 4 T 15 AT SPEED 5 DRIVE FAULT PRE RAMP VELOCITY REFERENCE RAMP VELOCITY REFERENCE Linked To Parameter 9 1 Chapter 9 Reference Materials 9 2 Param 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 Param 150 Table 9 A Fast Source Parameters cont Description Linked To Parameter FINAL VELOCITY REFERENCE URE VOLTAGE FEEDBACK VELOCITY FEEDBACK POSITION FEEDBACK VELOCITY FEED FORWARD POSITION ERROR RQUE COMMAND TURE CURRENT REFERENCE ATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK TURE CURRENT PI OUTPUT ATURE CURRENT FIRING ANGLE FLUX COMMAND AC LINE VOLTAGE FIELD CURRENT REFERENCE FIELD CURRENT FEEDBACK PROCESS TRIM OUTPUT m 22 z gt zo gt gt 22 m 22 gt m gt Table 9 B Fast Sink Parameters Configuration and Linking 0 12 START 13 CLOSE CONTACTOR T 14 CLEAR FAULT T 15 PROCESS TRIM Param 151 N 153 154 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Table 9 B Fast Sink Parameters cont Description LOGIC COMMAND 2 T 0 RUN REFERENCE T 1 RUN REFERENCE B T 2 RUN REFERENCE C P INCREMENT P DECREMENT 1 9 I
154. T stop contact is not used then TB3 9 and 11 must be jumpered In addition to the 24VDC ECOAST stop there is a 115 VAC ECOAST stop circuit which is provided as standard in the 1395 115 VAC enters the Power Stage Interface from TB6 and is distributed to TB3 4 Between TB3 4 and 5 an external ECOAST stop contact may be connected If an external 11S VAC ECOAST stop circuit is not used TB3 4 and 5 must be jumpered 115VAC is returned to the Power Stage Interface from TB3 5 and sent to the contacts K2 From here it proceeds to the contacts of K3 on the Power Stage Interface The 115 VAC ECOAST stop signal is also sent to an isolation circuit which converts the 115VAC to a 5VDC control signal ECOAST which is sent to the Main Control Board Main Control Relay K3 on the Power Stage Interface is the main control relay which controls turn on voltage to the coil of the pilot relay PR K3 is controlled by logic signals from the Main Control board entering the Power Stage Interface through ribbon connector 19 The two signals which control K3 are the SYSTRIP and the DCPILOT signals In order for K3 to cause PR to be energized there must be no system fault and there must be a DC pilot relay turn on command If both these conditions are met K3 is energized and PR is in turn energized The control voltage being applied to K3 may be monitored on the Power Stage Interface at TP2 If K3 is being commanded to energize the voltage at TP2 will be OVDC If K3
155. TOP START CLOSE CONTACTOR CLEAR FAULT Digital Outputs Five programmable solid state outputs are provided These 24VDC outputs can be connected to any source parameter such as the logic status word All five outputs have LEDs indicating when the signal is on These outputs are preconfigured for the following signals ZERO SPEED DRIVE RUNNING READY AT CURRENT LIMIT AT SET SPEED Analog Inputs Two programmable analog inputs allow a 10 Volt signal through a 12 bit A to D converter thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY Analog Outputs Two programmable analog outputs allow a signal to be converted to 10VDC analog output through a 11 bit digital to analog converter thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The digital Drive signal can be any of the 1395 run time parameters All user connections to the board are made at terminal block TB3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive The outputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK All inputs and outputs have the flexibility to be reconfigured by the user for other signals For a detailed description of the Digital Reference Adapter refer to the Digital Reference Adapter Manu
156. TS Bon AT SPEED 1 NORMALSTOP 4 12 ATSPEED2 START C16355 VEL PARAM 1 SEL 1 MERC 601 AT SPEED 3 CLOSE CONTACTOR i VEL IND 2 VEL PARAM 2 SEL AT SPEED 4 CLEAR EAUUT VEL IND 3 VEL PARAM 3 SEL AT SPEED 5 PROCESS TRIM VEL IND 4 VEL PARAM 4 SEL 2 tee NOTE PARAM 600 603 can specify where to direct data in the range of Param 600 732 PARAMETER 624 MAINTAINED START Param 600 603 cannot be programmed when the drive is running AMEN ART L Bit 8 of 152 1 MAINTAINED SYSTEM m 2 SOFTWARE COAST REGENSTOP IND OPTION 840 5 SP OUTPUT 1 1527 8 ALL COAST STOP OPTION i 841 HT SP OUTPUT 2 E CONTROL SP OUTPUT 5 844 lt gt Bit 8 of 150 LOGIC COMMAND CONTROL 542 SP IND 3 GE CUTPUT OR C 151 5 E PARAMETER 620 SYSTEM RESET SELECT SP IND 4 0 System Reset with TB3 3 1 Normal Stop with TB3 3 843 SP OUTPUT 4 C150 gt H NOTE PARAM 840 844 can specify any constant in the range of 32 767 5 33 Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 5 Sheet 2 of 3 1395 Block Diagram PROC TRIM HI SUM 4096 BASE MTR SPD 722 RPM Ramp Vel Ref 103 _ From 4096 Base Motor Speed Q Q vest 1 DROOP FILTER lt gt lt gt DROOP PERCENT 4096 100 657 658 721 9 DROOP PROC TRIM DROOP CONTROL 100 LOW SUM LOGIC CMD DROOP 150 151 15
157. U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Publication 1395 5 40 February 2004 P N 148902 02 Supersedes October 2002 Copyright 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
158. URE VOLTS 230V 460V ATE 500V 240V SELECTION 3 24 SENSING 1 2 3 ee e 1 1 i e s 230 466 23 3 2 1 s30 Torque Bus Bar Screws to 28 in Ibs Connection to PSI Switcher Motor Field Connection Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC PSI Switcher Board 2 8 J5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 o o T 9 r2 1 s 4 Ale ft EOS Ja Pg IR R J FIELD Q1 CURRENT SCALING Ti le J2 F1 C10 1M1 AUX1 ELI 2M1 AUX2 TP25 3M1 COILL p 4M1 COIL2 e 5 Chassis J14 MOTOR TEMP TB1 FEEDBACK TB3 TRIP T2 d le 979 9 BURDEN BURDEN 1COM IN 23 2 MOTOR TMP 24V 115 1P24 RESET RESET 4 E COASTI 5 2 amp COM QUT 24v 115V e 7 RDY FLT1 TP22 TP23 TP6 TP4 5 2 45V COM 12V 12V 12 50 ICOM 9 E COAST 11 424V J10 12 24VCOM J13 e TP17 TP19 TP18 TP15 TP12 TP10 TP9 5R 1R 6F FLD2 2R 4R 3F 20 14 16 TP13 11 8 7 The primary function of the board Figure 2 7 is to provide interface between the Main Control Board and the Power Board The PSI Switcher board also provides the following e Distribution of DC logic power to the Main Control Board Three Phase line synchronization signals to the Main Control Board Contactor and other logic control interface with the Main Control Board Rectification and Regulation of the external 115VAC
159. VAC SP MOV Bottom 1 22 Suppressor Field 2 3 MOV 2 23 Suppressor Pilot Relay SP Top 1 24 Suppressor Three P hase 1 MOV 1 25 Transformer 24V Supply 1 1 Not included with SCR Cell Assembly 19 2 Includes Snubber Boards bottom of assembly but does not include Armature Pulse Boards 2 10 8 Bp a 75 D 10 back of swing down panel AB0675A AB0676A 10 9 Chapter 10 Renewal Parts This Page Intentionally Left Blank 10 10 Numbers 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 115VAC Control Voltage 2 11 115VAC Control Voltage Illustration 2 11 AC Current Feedback 2 3 AC Line Reactor 2 3 Adapter Board 2 1 2 15 Adapter Board Illustration 2 15 Analog Inputs 2 16 2 17 Analog Output 2 16 Analog Outputs 2 17 Armature Bridge Components 2 3 Armature Bridge Components Illustration 2 3 2 4 Bridge Output Connections 2 4 2 5 Bus Bar 2 6 Control Voltage Common 2 11 ControlNet Adapter Board 2 18 DC Bus Snubbers 2 4 DC Contactor 2 4 DC Control Voltage Distribution 2 11 DC Current Sensing 2 4 Digital Inputs 2 16 Digital Outputs 2 16 2 17 Digital Reference Adapter Board 2 16 Digital Reference Input 2 16 Discrete Adapter Bo
160. Vel Sys Test option on the program terminal IMPORTANT The Drive start command must be true for the entire time the test is being performed If a stop command is issued anytime during the test the motor will stop and the test will be aborted Check Parameter 624 maintain start to determine if the start command is latched or momentary ATTENTION The Velocity Motor Test closes the Drive contactor and operates the motor up to speed specified by Parameter 699 3 Start the Drive when requested to do so by the program terminal The motor and load will begin to accelerate to the speed specified by Parameter 699 Auto Tune Speed at the armature current specified by Parameter 698 Autotune I Lim When it reaches that speed it will begin to decelerate to zero speed Note If the test fails on a motor stalled VP 18 or Profile Timeout VP 50 the Auto Tune I Limit Parameter 698 may be set too low Increase the value of Parameter 698 and run the test again When the test is complete the Drive contactor will drop out and the program terminal will indicate the status of the test 4 Ifthe test was successful continue to the Velocity Loop Tuning Procedure otherwise refer to the Troubleshooting Manual The test just performed writes the value of Parameters 703 and 701 when option to save in EEPROM is executed Velocity Loop Tuning This procedure tunes the velocity loop of the Drive based on the information supplied by the Motor and
161. Volts RPM rating of the tach refer to tach name plate Multiply this rating times the absolute maximum speed the motor will be commanded to accelerate to This value should also be programmed in Parameter 607 Rev Speed Lim and 608 Fwd Speed Lim to assure that the velocity command will be properly clamped Volts RPM Rating x Max Speed Max Volts Output 2 The Max Volts output must then be scaled to a level within the 10V analog input channel range This can be accomplished by using a voltage divider network external to the drive The voltage divider will take the Max Volts output and scale it to a maximum 9V input This allows for protection against 10 overshoot Figure 6 25 uses a 10 ohm resistor across the input channel represents the dropping resistor for the scaling network To determine the value of RI use the equation that follows Figure 6 25 Scaling Circuit Ri Analog In 4 TB3 33 Tach Velocity 10k Ohm 20k Adapter Board Input Impedance Analog In TB3 34 Tach Velocity Max Volts Output x 6666 QV 6666 R1 3 The analog input channel on the adapter board must now be scaled to represent an accurate velocity feedback signal First determine the analog input signal for base speed Parameter numbers are given in where applicable Base Motor Speed 606 x 9V Input Max Speed ase Speed Inpu 6 37 Chapter 6 Installation 6 38 4 The input voltage at base
162. ads the desired bandwidth the current processor recalculates the maximum bandwidth Parameter 742 and limits the desired bandwidth Next the current loop gains are calculated based on the damping factor desired bandwidth maximum discontinuous current and the AC line frequency which is measured by the current processor When Autotune Current Tune is executed the present values for the desired bandwidth and damping factor specify the desired dynamic behavior of the current loop If the user wants to tune the current loop with a different value of damping factor the parameter has to be updated before the tune is executed The current loop will be more responsive and reproduce the current reference more accurately if the bandwidth is increased However the current may exhibit more noise and overshoot as the current loop bandwidth is increased Typically the bandwidth should be set to about 90 of maximum to provide fast performance yet minimize the effects of noise and possible excessive overshoot The damping factor influences the amount of overshoot the current loop will exhibit during a transient The current will typically exhibit more overshoot and become oscillatory underdamped as the damping factor is reduced below one For a damping factor above one armature current should not exhibit much overshoot and have a slower rise time for a given current loop bandwidth The velocity loop tuning functions enable you to calibrate the drive to th
163. ained Start Maintain Start Internal units None Programming Terminal units 0 1 selection Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 3 Default Value 2 Description Parameter 624 selects the type of Start signal required in the logic command word Choices are 0 Start signal treated as a momentary input The drive will latch the start input A Stop bit will be required to unlatch the start function and regen to a stop 1 Start signal treated as a maintained input The motor will regen to a stop should the Start bit become 0 or the Stop bit become 1 2 Software Coast Regen Stop option The start signal will be treated as a maintained input The Drive will Regen Stop when the start bit is removed The Drive will Coast Stop when the Stop bit is set 3 All Coast Stop option The start signal will be treated as a maintained input The Drive will Coast Stop phase back SCR firing and open Main Contactor under all Stop conditions Remove Start bit e Set Stop bit e Remove Jog bit ATTENTION Refer to Ch 6 Installation for important information and warnings regarding stop mode interfaces with the 1395 Parameter 625 Torque Mode Torque Mode Internal units None Programming Terminal units 0 1 selection Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 5 Default Value 1 Description Parameter 625 selects the torque command source within the Drive Choices are 0 Zero torque command under all conditions 1 Velocity regulator output 2 External to
164. ains of the CEMF PI Control constant and independent of motor shaft speed The CEMF regulator with the gains nonzero Parameter 672 673 can offset the feed forward term To disable CEMF regulation when using the external feed forward set the KI KP gain to zero The Field Weaken Enable bit must also be on for this option to be effective 7 39 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 40 Bit 4 CEMF Hold When set this bit holds the integral term and output of the CEMF regulator to the last value before the bit was set When clear the CEMF regulator is not affected Bit 5 CEMF Reset When set this bit will cause the integral term and out put of the CEMF regulator to be preset to the value found in CEMF Preload Parameter 687 When clear the CEMF regulator is not affected Bit 6 Disable Field Loss Detection When set this bit will disable the check for field loss This feature could be used in applications where external field supplies or permanent magnet motors are used When clear field loss detection is active Caution should be used when disabling the Field Loss Detection feature Damage to equipment or injury to personnel could occur during an un detected field loss with non permanent magnet type motors Bit 7 No Flux Compensation When set the torque command will not be divided by Flux to Produce the Armature Current Command As a result the flux will be treated as 100 even if the field is weakened If bit 7 i
165. al The Node Adapter Board provides an interface between external devices and the Main Control Board of the 1395 The board allows the 1395 to be controlled using an Allen Bradley PLC Controller from either the PLC3 or PLCS family The Node Adapter Board is not preconfigured Refer to the Node Adapter Manual for hardware and integration information The Multi Communication Adapter Board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable of communicating over serial communications links The Multi Communication Adapter is not preconfigured Refer to the Multi Communication Board Software Hardware Reference Manual for hardware and integration information Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC ControlNet Adapter Board The CNA board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable of communicating over ControlNet This adapter has the following features e One ControlNet channel with a redundant connector to allow for backup connection in case one cable fails e Compatible with all Allen Bradley PLCs and other products that support Programmable Controller Communication Commands e Compatible with Allen Bradley 1395 Drives equipped with Version 8 10 or greater software 3 23 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC This Page Intentionally Left Blank Introduction
166. al Reference Adapter has the following inputs and outputs Digital Reference Input One digital frequency reference input which produces a digital velocity reference command for the Drive The Adapter Board is set up by default for the encoder input signal to be single channel dual edge ie both the rising edge and falling edge are used by the counting logic Digital Inputs Ten programmable discrete inputs for 24VDC signals They can be connected to any Sink parameter such as the Logic command word All ten inputs are LED indicated for high input level visibility These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches etc Node Adapter Board Multi Communication Board Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals RUN REFERENCE SELECT A B C RAMP DISABLE JOG 2 JOGI NORMAL STOP START CLOSE CONTACTOR CLEAR FAULT Digital Outputs Five programmable solid state outputs are provided These 24VDC outputs can be connected to any source parameter such as the logic status word All five outputs have LEDs indicating the bits of the state of the output on or off These outputs are preconfigured for the following signals ZERO SPEED DRIVE RUNNING READY AT CURRENT LIMIT AT SET SPEED Analog Inputs Two programmable analog inputs allow a 10 Volt signal through a 12 bit A to D
167. al for display using the Programming Terminal or may be displayed directly in drive units All internal values in the drive are in terms of Per Unit numbering Engineering Units A label given to parameter data which specifies what units are to be used to display the parameter value on the Programming Terminal Examples of engineering units include RPM etc Fast Parameter Fast parameters are all parameters whose values are updated every 4 milliseconds Fast parameters are used for the real time data input and output of the drive Fast parameters are NOT backed up in non volatile memory 7 1 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters 7 2 Non Volatile Memory Data memory in the drive which retains the values of all data even when power is disconnected from the drive control EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory chips are used for the 1395 non volatile memory to store some of the drive parameters Parameter Table Table of parameter entries for all configuration and setup parameters used in the drive Parameter Entry Information stored in the drive which contains the parameter number parameter data and all other information related to the specific parameter Parameter Memory location used to store drive data Each parameter is given a number called the parameter number The parameter value may be specified in decimal or in hexadecimal When specified in hexadecimal the word Hex will
168. appear after the parameter value Per Unit Numbering Per Unit numbering is a numbering system which defines a specific numeric value as representing 100 of a particular quantity being measured The number 4096 is used in many places in the drive to represent 1 Per Unit 100 pu For Example The number 4096 in Parameter 106 Velocity Fdbk represents base motor speed The number 4096 in Parameter105 Arm Voltage Fdbk represents rated motor armature voltage Real Time Data Real Time data is defined as any data which is updated at a rate equal to or faster than that required by the control in order to regulate the drive within the desired bandwidth All Fast Parameters are considered to be real time within the 1395 drive Set Up Parameter Parameter which is used to store information required by the drive in order to perform the regulation functions of the drive Setup parameters include parameters used for calibration scaling and some selection functions required to setup the drive for operation Data stored in Setup parameters may be backed up in non volatile memory EEPROM IMPORTANT The user should become familiar with the programming terminal manual 1300 5 55 before attempting any change of parameters DO NOT INITIALIZE THE DRIVE UNDER EEPROM MODE PRECONFIGURED DATA AND PARAMETERS WILL REVERT TO DEFAULT VALUES Parameter Table Structure Data Types Chapter 7 Programming Parameters All data used by the 139
169. arameter to determine when an absolute overspeed fault will occur Note that the value entered for this parameter must be negative Parameter 608 Forward Speed Limit Fwd Speed Limit Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed Description This parameter sets a limit on velocity reference in the positive direction and is dependent on the value entered for Base Motor Speed Parameter 606 The full numerical range for Parameter 607 is 0 to 6 x the value entered in Parameter 606 The forward motor speed will not be allowed to exceed this value This parameter is also used together with the Absolute Overspeed Parameter to determine when an Absolute Overspeed Fault will occur Parameter 609 Encoder PPR Encoder PPR Internal units pulses per revolution Programming Terminal units PPR Minimum Value 100 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 1024 Description Pulse Per Revolution rating of feedback device when using an encoder mounted on the motor The encoder is used to determine motor feedback velocity Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 610 Rated Motor Voltage Rated Motor Volt Internal units volts x 10 Programming Terminal units VOLTS Minimum Value 75 Maximum Value 850 Default Value 240 Function Torque Control Description Nameplate rated motor voltage This should be the measured armatu
170. arameter 616 to be programmed 2 1 as explained in Chapter 8 f Refer to Figure 6 11 and both NEC code and local codes for fusing requirements g On 1 30 HP 230 volt and 2 60 HP 460 volt remove factory installed wires at TB1 1 and TB1 2 on the power board and remove these same wires at the other end at 1L1 and1L3 on the drive side of the main fuses Wire the transformer as shown in Figure 6 11 ATTENTION The motor field supply is phase sensitive To guard against possible drive motor damage ensure that the connections are properly made according to Figure 6 9 Figure 6 9 Power Connections Standard Field Voltage 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Series A TOP VIEW OF IMPORTANT DRIVE If the AC input power system does not have a neutral or one phase referenced ground an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended If the line to line voltages on any phase can exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary NS grounded is always required DC Motor Armature DC Contactor Line Reactor or Isolation Transformer 6 16 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC MKVA Series B Current Transformers IMPORTANT If the AC input power system does not have a neutral or one phase referenced ground an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommen
171. ards 2 16 ECOAST Stop 2 12 Feedback Circuitry 2 6 Field Bridge Components 2 5 Field Bridge Components Illustration 2 5 Field Connections 2 6 Field Current Feedback 2 5 Field Current Range Jumper Selections 2 9 Field Pulse Transformer 2 5 Gate Firing Pulses 2 6 Hardware Description 2 1 Hardware Overview 2 1 Hardware Overview Illustration 2 2 Inductor 2 5 Interface 2 1 Line Reactor 2 4 Main Contactor M1 Control 2 12 Main Control Board 2 10 Main Control Board Hardware Location 2 10 Main Control Relay 2 12 Microbus 2 1 Multi Communication Adapter Board 2 17 Node Adapter Board 2 17 Options 2 14 Pilot Relay PR Control 2 12 Port 2 1 Power Board 2 6 Power Board Switch and Hardware Location 2 7 Power Board Location Illustration 2 6 Power Distribution 2 11 Programming Terminal 2 1 Programming Terminal Illustration 2 14 PSI Switcher Board 2 8 PSI Switcher Board Hardware Location 2 8 PSI Switcher Board Jumper Settings 2 9 Pulse Transformers 2 4 Relay Logic 2 12 Relay Logic Illustration 2 13 SCR Modules 2 5 SCR Packaging 2 4 Supply Voltage 2 5 Surge Suppression 2 4 2 5 Synchronization 2 3 Terminology 2 1 Voltage Transient Protection 2 4 2 5 2 6 115VAC Connections 6 25 115VAC Control Circuit Current Requirements 6 20 115VAC Control Voltage 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 11 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 11 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4
172. are Location Power Stage 77 Interface Board MFG Revision No J10 5 2 x a g a Bar Code 1 PILOT 2 PILOT RTN 8 Mt 1 MOTOR TEMP 4 1 2 988 9358 sitsvaTN 119 24 6 115 VAC 212 188 1 115 124 2 MOTOR TEMP TP 8 RESET aw 1 4 15V E COAST 5 115 E COAST2 6 115V 7 COMMON 12 107 12107 12107 7 RDY FLT 1 K3 M TE 5 26 8RDYFLT2 6 ur 12V 9 24V E COAST TP6 1024V eu E COAST 11 24V OUT 1824V OUT TP8 C30 20 20 20 I O I I ususuusuund I 48855255225 2 1558185 l 115 59528889 1 5 J4 1 J3 10 16 I zsss55255 I 1152825 1 15 8982208 1 J6 1 ge 1 2 TP9 S e J9 1 J8 1 T D y 0657 4 9 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Main Control Board Figure 4 7 illustrates the major hardware points on the board The board performs all control functions of the Bulletin 1395 drive Hardware located on the board is
173. assed when performing a stop function with a MOP reference selected MOP rate 1 2 Bits 6 7 A 2 bit field that will specify the accel and decel rates to be used by the MOP controller There are four possible rates Accel and Decel rates are separately adjustable by Parameters 641 to 648 The Table for this two bit field is shown in Table 7 C 7 26 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 C Logic Command Word Bits 6 7 MOP 1 accel decel 0 1 MOP 2 accel decel 0 0 MOP 3 accel decel 1 1 MOP 4 accel decel Bit 7 Bit 6 Selected Parameters 641 645 642 646 643 647 644 648 Command Enable Bit 8 A 1 bit field used to select one of the three logic commands in the Drive For details see table 7 D If the command enable bit is set to 1 in Logic Command 3 then Logic Command 3 is the active logic command accepted by the Drive If the command enable bit in logic command 3 is set to 0 then the Logic Command 1 is checked If the command enable in Logic Command 1 is set to 1 then Logic Command 1 is the active logic command accepted by the drive If the command enable in Logic Command 1 is set to 0 the Logic Command 2 is the active logic command accepted by the Drive The Logic Command 2 enable bit is ignored Table 7 D Logic Command Word Bit 8 1 Drive Active From Logic Command 1 Logic Command 1 Logic Command 2 BIT 8 IGNORED Drive Active From Logic Command 3 Logic Command 3 If Logic CMD 3
174. asurements 24VDC Measurement Points TP25 with respect to TP6 TP5 with respect to TP23 TP6 with respect to TP3 Measured Voltage Horsepower Drive Voltage 1 30 230VAC 2 60 460VAC 40 100 230VAC 75 200 460VAC 125 300 230VAC 250 600 460VAC Table 8 E Voltage Measurements 1 30HP 230V and 2 60HP 460V Series B Test Points Expected Voltage AC VOLTAGES L1 to L2 Rated AC Input L2 to L3 Rated AC Input L3 to L1 Rated AC Input TB1 1 to TB1 2 Rated AC Field Input TB2 2 to TB2 3 115VAC 10 _ MAIN CONTROL BOARD 227 TP51 to TP52 5 0 15 VDC TP55 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP56 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP58 to TP53 5 0 15 VDC TP54 to TP53 12 0 48 VDC PF i y PSI BOARD Pp TP25 to TP6 24 6 VDC Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 F Voltage Measurements 40 100HP 230V and 75 200HP 460V Series A Test Points Expected Voltage Measured Voltage AC VOLTAGES i y L1 to L2 Rated AC Input L2 to L3 Rated AC Input L3 to L1 Rated AC Input TB1 1 to TB1 5 Rated AC Field Input TB2 4 to TB2 5 115VAC 10 MAIN CONTROL BOARD TP51 to TP52 5 0 15 VDC TP55 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP56 to TP57 12 0 48 VDC TP58 to TP53 5 0 15 VDC TP54 to TP53 12 0 48 VDC PSI BOARD fe TP5 to TP23 24
175. ation 3 13 Up To Speed Tolerance 709 7 60 V Velocity Control Definition 5 5 Velocity Damping Factor 702 7 58 Velocity Desired Bandwidth 700 7 57 Velocity Error 124 7 24 Velocity Feed Forward 108 7 21 Velocity Feedback Control 5 26 Block Diagram 5 34 Velocity Feedback Filter Select 631 7 41 Velocity Feedback Select Definition 5 4 Velocity Feedback 106 7 20 Velocity Indirect 1 163 7 31 Velocity Indirect 2 164 7 31 Velocity Indirect 3 165 7 31 Velocity Indirect 4 166 7 32 Velocity Loop Motor Test 5 14 Velocity Loop System Test 5 14 Velocity Loop Tune 5 14 Definition 5 16 Velocity Loop Motor Test 5 17 Velocity Loop System Test 5 17 Velocity Loop Tune 5 17 Velocity Maximum Bandwidth 701 7 57 Velocity Parameter 1 Select 600 7 32 Velocity Parameter 2 Select 601 7 32 Velocity Parameter 3 Select 602 7 32 Velocity Parameter 4 Select 603 7 32 Velocity PI Control 5 27 Block Diagram 5 35 Velocity PI Output 123 7 24 Velocity Reference Control 5 25 Block Diagram 5 32 Velocity Reference Fraction 153 7 29 Velocity Reference Whole 154 7 29 Voltage Measurement 8 5 1 30 HP and 2 60 HP 8 6 115VAC 8 5 125 300 HP and 250 600 HP 8 7 24VDC 8 6 40 100 HP and 75 200 HP 8 7 Field AC 8 5 Voltage Transient Protection 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 2 5 W Warning Select 632 7 41 Wire Size and Type 6 6 Wiring Clearance 6 5 Power 6 13 Procedure 6
176. ature Loop 736 7 66 KI Field Loop 738 7 66 KI Flux 672 7 50 KI Velocity Loop 659 7 47 KP Armature Loop 735 7 66 KP Field Loop 737 7 66 KP Flux 673 7 50 KP Velocity Loop 660 7 47 Logic Command 1 150 7 25 Logic Command 2 151 7 28 Logic Command 3 152 7 29 Logic Status 100 7 16 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Parameter Reference Listing Alphabetical PARAMETER NAME PARAMETER NO PAGE REFERENCE Maintain Start 624 738 Minimum Tapered Current 667 7 49 MOP Accel 1 4 641 644 7 43 7 44 Mtr Overload Sel 629 7 40 MOP Decel 1 4 645 648 7 44 7 45 MOP Max Speed 649 7 45 MOP Min Speed 650 7 45 Motor Arm FLA 611 7 34 Motor Inertia 613 7 34 Overload Pending 720 7 62 Position Error 109 7 21 Position Feedback 107 7 21 Preramp 102 7 20 Preset Speed 1 5 633 637 7 41 7 42 Process Trim Feedback 162 7 31 Process Trim Filter 713 7 61 Process Trim Hi Sum 722 7 63 Process Trim Select 628 7 40 Process Trim Hi Lim 718 7 62 Process Trim KI Gain 715 7 61 Process Trim Lo Lim 717 7 62 Process Trim Lo Sum 721 7 63 Process Trim Output Gain 719 7 62 Process Trim Preload 714 7 61 Process Trim PT Input 125 7 24 Process Trim Ref 161 7 31 Process Trim Output 119 7 23 Rated AC Line 617 7 35 Rated Arm Brdg 1 615 7 35 Rated Field Brdg 1 616 7 35 Rate Fld Mtr Cur 612 7 34 Rated Motor Volt 610 7 34 Ramp Vel Ref 103 7 20 Rev Brdg Cur Lim 664 7 48 Rev Speed Lim 607 7 33 SCR Overtemp Dly 726 7 64 Slave Percent 2 670
177. ay be at potentially fatal voltage if not properly grounded If an oscilloscope is used to measure high voltage wa veforms use only a dual channel oscilloscope in the differential mode with X 100 probes It is recommended that the oscilloscope be used in the A minus B Quasi differential mode with the oscillo scope chassis grounded to an earth ground Refer to equipment safety instructions for all test equipment before using with the 1395 WARNING Only qualified personnel familiar with the 1395 DC Drive and its associated machinery should plan and implement the installation startup and subsequent maintenance of the Drive Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage 8 1 Chapter 8 Start Up Terminology Required Tools and Equipment Recommended Tools and Equipment General 8 2 CAUTION The CMOS devices used on the control circuit boards can be destroyed or damaged by static charges If personnel will be working near static sensitive devices they must be appropriate ly grounded If you are not familiar with static control procedures before servicing reference Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook A brief description of new terms and concepts covered in Chapter 8 includes Configuration Parameter Parameter used to transfer data between the Drive control and external devices The Configuration Parame
178. back Boards 8 f Tl Ts fel idii bii el Is G TB2 TB3 29 aE o js AB0656A 3 8 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Power Stage Interface A7 The primary function of the board is to provide interface between the Main Control Board and the Power Bridge boards such as the Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards and the Power Bridge boards such as the Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards and the Feedback Board The primary functions performed include e Distribution of DC Control power to Main Control Board e Provide 3 phase line synchronization signals to Main Control Board Produce all Armature and Field bridge SCR gate signals from control signals provided from the Main Control Board e Contactor and other logic control with interface to Main Control Board for these functions 3 9 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 7 Power Stage Interface Hardware Location See Page 6 19 Power Stage Interface Board J9 MFG ASSEMBLY TB a 1 SPARE PART KIT NO J2 1 TP2 TP3 1 ooooogoogq t Plot
179. bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is greater than the At Speed 5 setpoint Otherwise set to 0 Internally in the drive if the Feedback Velocity Parameter 106 is greater than or equal to At Speed 5 Parameter 708 the At Speed 5 bit is set to 1 Parameters 100 125 may not be reliable if the drive is hard or soft faulted As a result precautions should be taken when using these outputs for PLC s analog outputs to meters discrete outputs etc The ready faulted output on TB3 is the most reliable indicator of drive fault status ATTENTION Any of the source outputs of Drive Parameter 101 Drive Fault Drive Fault Internal units None DHT units Bit field Description A status word maintained by the Drive stating a fault is true bit set to 1 or false bit set to 0 Fault Report param 630 determines if Velocity Control faults will be reported 630 1 or if Current Control faults will be reported 630 2 0 Bit 15 is a status bit that indicates which control faults are being reported If bit 15 1 velocity control faults are being reported If bit 15 0 current control faults are being reported The bits in the drive fault word are defined as Chapter 7 Programming Parameters IF VELOCITY CONTROL FAULTS ARE SELECTED 630 1 Bit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 765 4 3 2 1 0 DHT REF BITS 0 T C HANG EA BLE Feedback Loss ECOAST status Absolute overspeed Field Regulation loss
180. by the user for other signals For a more detailed description of the Discrete Adapter refer to the Discrete Adapter Manual The Digital Reference Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface This interface supplies the Adapter Board with all logic voltages and communication capabilities The Digital Reference Adapter has the following inputs and outputs Digital Reference Input One digital reference input which produces a digital reference command for the Drive The Adapter Board is set up by default for the encoder input signal to be single channel dual edge ie both the rising edge and falling edge are used by the counting logic Digital Inputs Ten programmable discrete inputs for 24VDC signals They can be connected to any Sink parameter such as the Logic command word All ten inputs are LED indicated for high input level visibility These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches etc Node Adapter Board Multi Communication Board Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals RUN REFERENCE SELECT A B C RAMP DISABLE JOG 2 JOGI NORMAL STOP START CLOSE CONTACTOR CLEAR FAULT Digital Outputs Five programmable solid state outputs are provided These 24VDC outputs can be connected to any source parameter such a
181. cates that the armature current reference will be allowed to change by no more than rated motor current in a 4 0 msec period Parameter 669 Slave Percent SLAVE PERCENT Internal units None Programming Terminal units Minimum Value 200 Maximum Value 200 Default Value 100 Description The torque reference Parameter 157 will be multiplied by slave percent when the torque mode in Parameter 625 2 3 4 5 Parameter 670 Slave Percent 2 SLAVE PERCENT 2 Internal units 4096 1000h unity gain Programming Terminal units Percent gain Minimum Value 200 Maximum Value 200 Default Value 096 Description Torque Reference 2 will be scaled by the gain specified in this parameter The scaled torque will then be summed with the scaled torque reference value from Parameter 157 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 672 KI Flux KI Flux Internal units gain 3277 Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 1638 Description This parameter controls the integral gain of the CEMF Regulator For example If KI flux is equal to 32767 then 1 pu CEMF error will produce 1 pu flux command in 1 second The CEMF Regulator is a classical PI regulator that is activated by setting an enable bit in Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 It is used to trim the flux command based on the difference between CEMF Reference Parameter 160 and CEMF Feedback Trim is limited to a minimum
182. ce and Sink Parameters are defined by the hardware of the Discrete Board Parameter 400 by definition of the Discrete Board must be linked in the Drive to to one of the logic command Sink parameters In this example Parameter 400 is linked to Parameter 151 Logic Command 2 so the four digital inputs to the Discrete Board will directly control four of the bits in Logic Command 2 Parameter 401 which is associated with the first analog input to the Discrete board is linked to Parameter 154 which means the analog signal entering the Discrete Board is defined as the External Velocity Reference input to the Control Logic Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 4 Discrete Adapter Board Configuration Example Programming Terminal Programming 1395 Drive Interface Terminal Control Logic Sources Sinks 200 249 150 Programming d Terminal C Logic Cmd2 Sinks 152 Cs Logic ema 3 154 Discrete Port A C Velocity Ref Whole Adapter Interface Port A 156 Sources eL RN 157 eH LL C Torque Ret AID d Sources 100 Logic Status o o o o o laca Sinks 101 ME 450 lt gt Drive Fault 451 lt Velocity Feedback eH CD m Pee oed 452 AP Arm Current Fdbk o H ITE CD Port B Port B Interface Sources 300 349 J Port B Sinks 350 399 5 13 Chapter 5 Functional Description Auto tuning 5 14 In this example the speed feedback is being provid
183. cess Trim 3 Velocity Regulator Modified integrator in the PI regulator for current limit switching Example switch from motoring to regen or vice versa 4 regulator Modify IR compensation so that is now equal to 100 at FULL LOAD Previously 1PU was the motor nameplate voltage at no load Old CEMF Terminal Volts IR New Terminal Volts IR 1 R 5 Field Flux Auto Tune Enhanced a Allow CEMF regulator to trim flux reference to near zero formerly limited to 1076 minimum during autotune Summary of Changes 8 10 9 20 10 10 9 30 b Increase wait time for each flux table measurement from 5 seconds to 15 seconds c Change test for up to speed during field flux autotune to use a constant 5 instead of being tied to the speed tolerance parameter to reduce the occurrence of Motor not up to speed faults SP 1 Slave percent 2 P670 Enhanced EEprom Save and Recall function for this parameter 2 CEMF feedback P120 Change conversion formula and units display from volts to percent 4096 100 to accommodate CEMF regulator change see 4 under VP CP 1 Auto tune test Modified autotune to work with a wider range of motors inductance related 2 Change diode to enhance CP 15 24V PS Loss reporting 3 Change diodes to enhance CP 06 Phase Loss reporting Rev 1 Released Note 8 03 to 8 10 only updated the micro s Functionality did no
184. change is made the drive will check to make certain the feedback from the primary feedback device is within the tach loss window If it is the switch will be honored and the parameter values will be restored to their previous values If not the switchover will not be allowed 2 Issue a Clear Faults command to the Drive The fault will be cleared and the Drive will be reset to it s previous feedback device gains and field flux level Note that this command is only honored when the Drive is not running 5 29 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 30 Current Reference Control Circle 9 The output of the Torque Reference Select block is applied to a limiting function block Forward Bridge Current Limit Parameter 663 and Reverse Bridge Current Limit Parameter 664 specify the largest allowable positive and negative motor armature current that can be commanded The limited current is then applied to a Torque Taper function block Start Taper Speed Parameter 665 defines the motor speed above which torque tapering will begin End Taper Speed Parameter 666 defines the speed above which the Minimum Taper Current Parameter 667 will be used as the upper limit for armature current reference The output of these function blocks is the Armature Current Reference Parameter 111 This value is scaled using Parameters 611 and 615 and summed with Armature Current Feedback The difference between the reference and feedback value is fi
185. cked up in EEPROM Function Classification Indicates the control function to which the parameter is associated and its classification The Actual Value portion of the parameter entry for each parameter in the parameter table is a 16 bit word The data represented by this 16 bit word is one of the three following types Numerical Data 16 bit binary integer which can represent signed integers from 32 768 to 32767 or unsigned integers from 0 to 65535 16 Bit Field Select 16 bit word where each bit is used to enable disable a specific drive function 7 3 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter Table Storage 74 1 Bit Field Select A single bit used to enable disable a specific drive function For 1 bit field select type data the entire 16 bit word is stored in the parameter entry but only the first bit bit 0 is used Whenever power is applied to the drive control the entire parameter table is copied from EEPROM to RAM Random Access Memory All information stored in RAM is lost when power is disconnected All Set Up parameters in the drive required for the basic calibration and scaling of the control functions must be retained even when power is disconnected from the drive so that the setup information does not need to be re entered into the drive every time power is re applied EEPROM memory is used to store the values of the Setup Parameters when the drive is not powered up Whenever a parameter valu
186. cks must be provided by the user This device must be wired in the isolation transformer or reactor primary circuit The device must be sized to handle 115 of the primary current plus any additional loads that are connected to the control system Proper branch circuit protection for the drive and additional devices must be provided according to NEC and local codes IMPORTANT Refer to Tables 6 R and 6 S for drive current ratings to aid in properly sizing wire Wire sizes must be selected individually observing all applicable safety and NEC regulations The minimum permissible wire size does not necessarily result in the best operating economy Due to the drive overload capacity the conductors for the transformer primary and secondary must be sized at a minimum for 125 of the maximum rated motor current The motor armature conductors must also be rated for 125 of the full load motor current Motor field conductors should be run with no less than 14 gauge wire The distance between the drive and motor may affect the size of the conductors used Shielded type wire is recommended in control circuits for protection against interference A shielded wire is required for all signal wires The recommended conductor size must be a minimum of 24 AWG The best interference suppression is obtained with a wire having an individual shield for every pair Table 6 B provides a listing and description of cable types and wiring recommendations Figure 6 4 show
187. cription A parameter which scales the analog line voltage feedback 5 volt 1024 A D value into ten times the actual RMS AC voltage K AC VOLTS should be equal to ten times the line voltage required to produce 5 volts on TP 4 The typical value depends on the feedback board installed in the Drive The typical value for a 460 V feedback board is 7225 and the typical value for a 230V feedback board is 3800 The Programming Terminal can be used to determine the proper value for K AC Volt Enter the typical value for K ARM VOLT Measure the line voltage to the Drive and compare it to the reading on the Programming Terminal at Parameter 116 Increase K AC VOLT if the armature voltage read from the Programming Terminal is low or decrease it if the line voltage reading is too high Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 741 Desired Current Loop Bandwidth Cur Desired BW Internal units None Programming Terminal units RAD Sec Minimum Value 40 Maximum Value 1000 Default Value 500 Description This parameter specifies the armature current loop bandwidth requested by the user and determines along with Parameter 743 the dynamic behavior of the current loop The desired bandwidth is limited to the maximum achievable bandwidth which is calculated by the current processor CP The current loop becomes more responsive and reproduces the current reference more accurately as the bandwidth is increased However the current may exhibit mo
188. ction against short circuits for the drive semiconductors and associated output wiring They are not to be considered a substitute for the user supplied motor branch circuit protective devices that are required by the National Electrical Code Refer to Tables 6 R and 6 S for proper sizing of the AC power and branch fuses guard against possible drive motor damage assure that the ATTENTION The motor field supply is phase sensitive To connections are properly made according to Figure 6 8 amp 6 9 Figure 6 8 Power Connections Standard Field Voltage Alt A2 Line Reactor or Isolation Transformer Factory Wiring Factory Wiring FRONT VIEW OF is DRIVE Typical motor connection Refer to motor DC Motor Shunt Field data for specific motor connections Chapter 6 Installation 3 If the DC motor field is not compatible with the field DC output of the drive an external field control transformer must be used Refer to the following example for transformer selection information EXAMPLE 10 HP 240 Volt Armature 17 2A 240 Volt Field 2 0A a The Field Control Transformer will have 230V primary 460V secondary single phase 60 Hz b 2A x 460VAC x 1 5 1 38 1 5 is closest c J1 Field jumper selection is in location 3 as the motor field is 2A d Rated Field Motor Current parameter 612 to be programmed 2 as stamped on the motor nameplate e Rated Field Bridge Current p
189. ction requires a Normally Open operator device which closes to cause a reset A reset then allows the 1395 to perform its power up sequence Any data not previously stored in EEPROM will be lost The Logic Command Normal Stop function requires a Normally Closed operator device When opened the drive will stop The stop method ramp stop coast stop regen stop etc will be determined by the setting of Parameter 624 maintain start and the logic command parameter that has control of the Drive Parameter 621 Feedback Device Type Fdbk Device Type Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 1 Description Is the selected source for motor velocity feedback Choices are 0 Encoder feedback 1 Armature voltage feedback This limits the motor speed application to base speed or less Note Setting this value to 1 will not limit the motor to base speed or less This value must be used with parameters 607 608 to properly configure the top motor speed 2 Analog tachometer feedback When choosing this function an analog input should be linked to Parameter 156 Tach Velocity 3 No feedback device in use This will disable the speed regulator and tach loss fault detection This is used in torque mode applications 7 36 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 622 Contactor Type ContactorType Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0
190. ctor does not fit on the DB grid connection install a terminal block near the DB resistors and use multiple wire runs between the resistors and the terminal block 6 13 Chapter 6 Installation Power Wiring Procedure 6 14 The following procedure provides the steps needed to properly perform the power wiring connections to the 1395 drive Using Table 6 F verify that the motor field is compatible with the DC field voltage output of the drive Table 6 F Standard Field Voltage Output AC Incoming DC Supply Output Voltage to Drive Voltage to Field 230VAC 120 150VDC 38VAC 200250000 4IVAC 22007000 460VAC 24030NDC 1 Connect the motor armature and field leads to produce proper direction of motor rotation Table 6 G lists the connections required to produce counterclockwise rotation of the motor when viewed from the commutator end with a positive speed reference input to the drive Table 6 G Motor Connections for CCW Rotation Drive Terminal Connection Drive Connection Motor Lead Motor Field 1 30 HP 230VAC TB1 3 2 60 HP 460VAC TB1 4 F2 40 100 HP 230VAC TB2 1 F1 75 200 HP 460VAC TB2 2 F2 125 300 HP 230VAC TB7 1 F1 250 600 HP 460VAC 7 3 F2 Motor Armature 1 100 HP 230VAC Al Al 2 200 HP 460VAC A2 2 125 300 HP 230VAC Al Al 250 600 HP 460VAC A2 2 Refer to Figures 6 8 and 6 9 for power wiring with a standard field voltage Note that 125
191. d The data contained in this word represents the high order whole number portion of a 32 bit velocity reference Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 156 Tach Velocity Tach Velocity Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Description This word supplies a motor velocity feedback signal when an analog tachometer is used This input will typically be linked to an analog input parameter from the Discrete Adapter Board The analog scaling for the adapter should be set up so that a value of 4096 in this parameter represents base motor speed When Tach Velocity is used for velocity feedback a value of 2 must be entered in Feedback Device Type Parameter 621 Parameter 157 Torque Reference Torque Reference Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu 100 rated motor torque Programming Terminal units Percent rated motor torque Description This word supplies an external motor torque reference to the Drive The external torque reference can be selected by setting Torque Mode Parameter 625 to a value of 2 The external torque reference can also be modified by summing the Process Trim output when the Process Trim Select Parameter 628 contains a value of 2 The external torque reference input is also used when either the minimum or maximum torque modes are selected Parameter 625 These functions automatically make a selection between the external torque reference val
192. d Units are measured in seconds taken to decelerate from base speed to 0 speed The deceleration ramp applies to speed changes toward zero speed in either the forward or reverse direction The velocity ramp function can be bypassed by setting a bit 5 to 1 in the logic command word Parameter 653 Desired Contour Desired Contour Internal units 4096 1000h 100 contour effect Programming Terminal units Percent of full contour Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 096 Default Value 096 Description This parameter specifies the rounding of the edges of the velocity profile or S filtering This parameter affects the gain of a single pole filter that is cascaded with the velocity ramp function Increasing the value of this parameter causes the edges of the velocity reference curve to be more rounded 10046 contour represents maximum velocity reference filtering 096 contour will disable the velocity filter function Parameter 657 Droop Percent Droop Percent Internal units droop effect x 10 Programming Terminal units Percent of base speed full load current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 25 5 Default Value 096 Description This parameter specifies the percent of base speed that the velocity reference will be reduced when at full load current For example given a motor running at base speed and no load for 5 droop the speed becomes 95 of base speed at full load current 0 Droop disables the Droop function 7 46 C
193. d backup the data in the Drive using EEPROM function in the Programming Terminal Table 8 Q Drive Configuration Table Link Sink Parameter Linked to Source Parm CO Ni BY Coy Po hyo 18 19 20 200 100 Cannot be changed by the user Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks IMPORTANT Prior to checking motor polarity it is recommended that 8 16 Parameters 607 608 663 and 664 be set at less than 25 of their final value in order to limit speed and torque at a low level for initial power checks and to avoid possible component damage 1 Turn off and lock out all power to the drive 2 When checking motor polarity the drive will have power applied and the motor will rotate It is recommended that the motor be temporarily uncoupled from the load 3 If the motor cannot be uncoupled from the load the following motor checks are recommended a All electrical connections are tight b The brushes are properly seated c The motor shaft 1s free to rotate Verification of Drive Calibration 10 1 Chapter 8 Start Up Connect DC Voltmeter to Terminal A1 and A2 at the output of the main contactor Apply power to the drive Rotate motor shaft in CCW counter clockwise direction as viewed from the commutator end using an externally applied mechanical force to the motor shaft Measure the voltage at Al and A2 Set the meter range to 50VDC to start with
194. dard 1395 enclosures 700 to 1750 HP 460VAC in MCCs 750 to 2250 HP 575VAC in MCCs 750 to 2500 HP 660VAC in MCCs Non regenerative 1 30 HP and 125 to 300 HP 230VAC in standard 1395 enclosures 400 to 700 HP 230VAC in MCCs 2 to 60 HP and 250 to 600 HP 460VAC in standard 1395 enclosures 700 to 1750 HP 460 VAC in MCCs 750 to 2250HP 575VAC in MCCs 750 to 2500HP 660VAC in MCCs NOTE For information on high horsepower 1395 drives packaged in MCCs refer to publication 2361 5 01 This publication contains hardware descriptions of 1395 drives rated at or above 700 HP 460VAC 750HP 575 660VAC Fused AC input e DC Contactor e Field regulation over a 6 to 1 speed range e Programmable Functions Independent Acceleration Deceleration adjustment Preset Speeds Jog Speeds Current Limit Tapered Current Limit e Protective Features Instantaneous Overcurrent Motor Overload Feedback Loss Field Loss Field Economy e Open Chassis Construction e UL Listed CSA Approved Basic Input Outputs Options e Discrete Adapter Board Provides 4 Digital Inputs 120VAC 2 Digital Outputs Contact type 125 VAC 4 Analog Inputs 4 Analog Outputs 10VDC e Discrete Adapter Board Provides 4 Digital Inputs 24VDC 2 Digital Outputs Contact type 24VDC 4 Analog Inputs 4 Analog Outputs 10VDC e Digital Reference Adapter Board Provides 1 Digital
195. dated If the maximum discontinuous current varies from pulse to pulse by too much 12 5 percent of full load then the drive will fault Parameter 734 is a function of the DC motor inductance connected to the drive The diagnostic tests also verify that the armature voltage has the correct polarity while measuring the maximum discontinuous current or else the tests will report a fault Chapter 5 Functional Description Velocity Loop Tuning 5 16 Current Tune The Autotune Current Tune calculates the maximum current loop bandwidth and current loop gains The KP and KI Armature Loop gains Parameters 735 and 736 are based on the maximum discontinuous current Parameter 734 desired Current Loop Bandwidth Parameter 741 and Damping Factor Parameter 743 Parameter 734 is used by autotuning to calculate the current loop gains because Parameter 734 is inversely proportional to the armature inductance Autotuning does not look at the actual current loop response to determine the gains or verify the actual bandwidth Therefore the desired bandwidth should be used as a measure of relative performance and not absolute performance For example if maximum performance is desired then the desired bandwidth should be set equal to the maximum bandwidth The current processor limits the desired bandwidth that the user has entered to the maximum bandwidth calculated by the drive which cannot be modified by the user Whenever the user enters or re
196. ded If the line to line voltages on any phase can exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is always required Chapter 6 Installation ATTENTION The motor field supply is phase sensitive To guard against possible drive motor damage ensure that the connections are properly made according to Figure 6 10 A Figure 6 10 Power Connections Standard Field Voltage Line Reactor Isolation Transformer 4 NOTE Wires must be tapped off before current transformers User Installed Semiconductor Fuses 50A Type FWH refer to Note 2 in Figure 6 11 L1 AC Field Input N Bus Bars FRONT VIEW OF DRIVE DC Field Output Front Bus Bar Back Bus Bar DC Motor Shunt Field A2 DC Motor Armature 4 Typical external field transformer connections are shown in Figure 6 11 for a motor rated 240 volt armature 240V field Chapter 6 Installation ATTENTION The motor field supply is phase sensitive To A guard against possible drive motor damage ensure that the connections are properly made according to Figure 6 8 6 9 6 11 and 6 12 Figure 6 11 External Field Transformer Connections FU L1 Field Transformer 1 30 230VAC Series B 60 Hp 460VAC FU e L3 L1 d 40 100 230 Field Transformer Series A 75 _ 200 HP 460VAC Secondary L3 U TB8 FU L1
197. develop the synchronizing information to be used by the Main Control Board AC Current Feedback Current Transformers ACT 1 ACT 2 Figure 3 2 are used to provide current feedback information to the feedback board The feedback board rectifies the three phase feedback and scales the DC voltage before being sent to the power stage interface The DC voltage representing the current feedback is passed directly through the power stage interface and sent to the main control board Figure 3 2 Armature Bridge Components INPUT L1 L2 To TB1 L3 Fig 3 4 Field Bridge CH2 CH3 H4 CH5 6 CH7 To Feedback Board TB1 5 6 7 Figure 3 5 S AC Current Feedback To Feedback Board TB1 11 13 15 Figure 3 5 Burden Resistor TB2 Figure 3 5 3 3 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Surge Suppression Surge suppressor 1 MOV Fig 3 2 protects the armature power bridge from high voltage line spikes and line surges Line Chokes Line Chokes CH2 through CH7 are used to protect the power bridge SCRs in each of the six legs of the power bridge from rapid rate of current changes di dt SCR Packaging SCR packaging in the 1395 in bridge ratings 111 345 consists of 2 SCRs per module Pulse Transformer Snubber Boards All three boards are identical and are mounted directly to the armature bridge bus bars R C networks contained on the board are used to p
198. djustments programmable 24VDC or 120VAC 10 mA NOTE A separate board and part number is used for each voltage rating Dry relay contacts rated at 0 6 amps at 125VAC or 2 0 amps at 30VDC 0 to 10 VDC differential input imped ance 20K ohms 10 to 1OVDC minimum output impedance 200 ohms 10VDC 4mA maximum 10VDC 4mA maximum Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication R eferences Digital Reference Board Digital Reference In put 1 Digital Inputs 10 Discrete Outputs 5 Analog Inputs 2 Analog Outputs 2 Power Supply for external use Node Adapter Board Multi Communications Adapter Board Power Supply Communications Channels 2 Function Blocks 4 Discrete Input 1 Current source and sink input for high common mode noise immunity Nominal 5VDC or 12VDC interface internal hard ware configurable 10mA nominal cur rent source sink requirements 24VDC Nominal 18 minimum 28VDC maximum 10 mA nominal 25 16 6 24VDC nominal Current sourcing type driver Diode clamped for inductive load 18VDC minimum 28VDC maximum 1 5VDC saturation 100mA maximum load 0 to 10 VDC differential input imped ance differential gt 1m ohm 20K ohms single ended to analog common 10 to 10VDC 2 5mA maximum output impedance 200 ohms 10VDC 4mA maximum 10VDC 4mA maximum
199. drive The programming terminal is provided in two packages digital handheld terminal and door mounted terminal Figure 2 1 provides an overview of the hardware components associated with the 1 30 HP 230VAC and 2 60 HP 460VAC drives This chapter describes in general all of the major hardware components Figures provided in this chapter are drawn based on hardware functionality Some components may be repeated in several different diagrams Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages 2 1 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Figure 2 1 Hardware Overview 3 Phase AC 1 Phase 115 VAC J7 J6 J5 Main Control Switcher Board J2 J10 Board J9 SCR Bridge J1 Programming Terminal DHT DMT CONTROL CONTROL POWER INTERFACE 2 2 Armature Bridge Components L1 Isolation Transformer or Line Reactor Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC A general description of the components in the armature bridge Figures 2 2 and 2 3 and their operation is detailed here AC Line Reactor When connecting the drive directly to the main distribution system an AC line reactor must be used to protect the power bridge from rapid rate of current changes di dt When an isolation transformer matched to the unit ratin
200. e motor and the system connected to the motor The velocity loop function can effect the following parameters Parameter No Description 613 Motor inertia 659 KI Velocity Loop 660 KP Velocity Loop 700 Velocity Loop Desired Bandwidth 701 Velocity Loop Maximum Bandwidth 703 System Inertia Chapter 5 Functional Description In addition the parameters listed below are used by the velocity loop function during test and tune These parameters must be set up properly for the tuning function to work properly Parameter No Description 698 Auto Tune I Lim 699 Auto Tune Speed 702 Velocity Loop Damping Factor Velocity Loop Motor Test The motor test calculates the motor inertia Parameter 613 by running the drive through a defined velocity profile When the profile is complete torques and acceleration deceleration times are used to calculate motor inertia The armature current used during the test is set by Parameter 698 The default is 2596 of rated Motor Current Parameter 611 If acceleration time is excessive during Velocity Loop Autotune Parameter 698 may have to be increased The maximum velocity that the motor will run at is determined by Parameter 699 The test is most accurate when Parameter 699 is set to base speed However acceptable results can be achieved at lower speeds In all cases the motor must be disconnected from the load system process or machine for this test to yield accurate results Velocit
201. e 1 I 2 1 Preset Speed 4 636 Of Bits os 1 MOP FWD Preset Speed 5 637 Jog Spd 2 MOP REV SPEED 639 MOP REFERENCE JOG SELECT SELECT REFERENCE SELECT MOP CONTROL LOGIC CMD LOGIC CMD MOP 150 151 152 150 151 152 Max Spd C 6 7 649 LOGIC CMD RPM 150 151 152 MOP ACCEL 1 641 SEC MOP RATE SELECT MOP ACCEL 2 642 SEC SEC Select Lm BIT Based On Decimal 1 Of Bits 6 7 1 UM FWD REV 650 SELECT RATE MOP MOP SELECT Min Spd Bits 1 and 2 of 150 151 152 must both 1 for this block to be enabled LOGI MOP RATE TM MOP ACCEL 3 643 7 ACCEL DECEL MOP ACCEL 4 644 641 MOP DECEL 1 645 oe MOP DECEL 2 646 643 644 MOP DECEL 3 647 MOP DECEL 4 648 WN WARNING SELECT 632 SCR OVERTEMP MOTOR OVERTEMP FAULT REPORT OVERLOAD TRIP STALL S W FAULT SELECT 623 AC VOLT OUT OF TOL FIELD LOSS DISABLE 627 WAITING SAFE ARM VOLTS MOTOR OVERLOAD SELECT 629 WAITING ZERO CUR BRIDGE OVERLOAD TACH SWITCH SEL 691 OVERLOAD PENDING LEVEL 720 MOTOR OVERLOAD SELECT 629 ABS OVERSPEED 724 MOTOR OVERTEMP DELAY 725 OEE n SCROVERTEMPoeLA 72 200 60SEC COOLED MTR STALL DELAY 727 150 60 SEC AC LINE TOLERANCE DELAY 728 sie FIELD FAULT THRESHOLD 729 WARNING SELECT 632 FIELD FAILURE DELAY 730 WARNING BI TYPE NOORWNM O 0 MOTOR OVERLOAD PENDING 1 EXCESSIVE ARMATURE VOLTS DEMAND i a _ 2 BRIDGE OVERLOAD PENDING CONTACTOR
202. e Drive contactor and operates the motor up to speed specified by Parameter 699 IMPORTANT The Drive start command must be true for the entire time the test is being performed If a stop command is issued anytime during the test the motor will stop and the test will be aborted Check Parameter 624 maintain start to determine if the start command is latched or momentary 3 Start the Drive when requested to do so by the program terminal The motor will begin to accelerate to the speed specified by Parameter 699 Auto Tune Speed at the armature current specified by Parameter 698 Autotune I Lim When it reaches that speed it will begin to decelerate to zero speed Note If the test fails on a motor stalled VP 18 or Profile Timeout VP 50 the Auto Tune I Limit 698 may be set too low Increase the value of Parameter 698 and run the test again When the test is complete the Drive contactor will drop out and the program terminal will indicate the status of the test 4 If the test was successful continue to the Velocity System Test otherwise refer to the Troubleshooting Manual Velocity Loop System Test This procedure calculates the system inertia Parameter 703 maximum bandwidth Parameter 701 If these values are known they can be entered directly and you can proceed to the Field Flux Tuning procedure 1 Connect the motor to the machine Chapter 8 Start Up 2 Select the Velocity System Test Drive Setup Autotune
203. e Pulse Transformer Boards 2 A4 Figure 4 8 illustrates the major hardware points on the board The primary functions performed include e Isolate power bridge circuitry from control circuitry Provides Gate Pulses to the SCRs There are three Armature Pulse Transformer Boards Each board is associated with a single phase of the incoming AC line The board is physically mounted on the armature power bridge buswork with the screw terminals used to mount the board also used as the connections to the incoming AC line and the DC bus Figure 4 8 Armature Pulse Transformer Board Hardware Location O Armature Pulse Transformer Board AB0659A 4 11 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Field Pulse Transformer Boards A5 Figure 4 9 illustrates the major hardware points on the board The primary functions performed include e Isolate power bridge circuitry from control circuitry Provide dv dt protection for SCRs The board is physically mounted on the field power bridge buswork with the screw terminals used to mount the board also being used as the connections to the incoming AC line and the DC bus Figure 4 9 Field Pulse Transformer Board Hardware Location Field Pulse Transformer Board
204. e Transformer and Snubber Board 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 5 3 12 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 13 Field Sync and Firing Logic Definition 5 6 Field Transformer Connections 6 18 Field Voltage 1 4 Output 6 14 Field Weakened Speed 686 7 54 Field Weakening Control Block Diagram 5 36 Final Velocity Reference 104 7 20 Flux Command 115 7 22 Flux Feed Forward 159 7 30 Flux Mode Select 627 7 39 Flux Trim 121 7 23 Forward Bridge Current Limit 663 7 48 Forward Speed Limit 608 7 33 Functional Description 5 1 Terminology 5 1 Fuses 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 3 G Gate Firing Pulses 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 Ground PE 6 8 6 10 Grounding Illustration 6 9 Procedures 6 8 Safety Ground Connections 6 11 Safety Signal Ground 6 11 Stand Alone Drive Illustration 6 10 System Grounding Illustration 6 12 H Hardware Description 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 Hardware Overview 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 2 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 2 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 2 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 2 I O Checks Standard Control 8 8 Incoming Device 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 3 Indirect Parameters 5 9 Inductor 1 30 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 Input Frequency 1 4 Max Rat
205. e drive interprets a high voltage at TB3 2 as a normal expected condition Refer to Figure 6 13 for further connection information 4 Reset Normal Stop This input is programmable to provide either a System Reset function or a Normal Stop function It accepts a 115VAC or 24VDC input voltage System Reset Select Parameter 620 determines which function this input provides The System Reset function requires a N O operator device which closes to cause a reset A reset input causes the drive to perform a power up sequence Any data not previously stored in EEPROM memory will be lost The Normal Stop function requires a N C operator device When opened the drive will stop the type of stop is determined by Parameter 624 This may be used to provide an additional stop to the drive 6 23 Chapter 6 Installation The voltage used must be the same as the voltage supplied for the motor thermostat input IMPORTANT The 24VDC provided at TB3 11 and 12 must only be used for the 24VDC ECOAST circuit Figure 6 13 115VAC Input and Contactor Control Connections 1 to 30 HP 230VAC 2 60HP 460VAC Reactor AC P n Isolation rmature Supply Transformer 13 Bridge Optional 2 Fuse NE mmm 1 H 1er 115V AC op 14 230 or 460VAC See 77 Eo PSI Switcher Board 5 Wire External drive Ready Indicator Terminals TB3 7 and 8 provide connection to the
206. e is changed either from the Programming Terminal or through an external device connected to Port A or B the new information is stored in the RAM of the drive If this data will be stored in the EEPROM the Drive must be commanded to copy the parameter data from the RAM to the EEPROM This is done using a write to EEPROM command available on the Programming Terminal through the EEPROM mode In addition to the parameter values the configuration information linking Source to Sink parameters is also stored in the RAM of the drive Whenever a change to the configuration is to be backed up in EEPROM the EEPROM write command must be given For details on saving parameters refer to the Programming Terminal Operation Manual HEX 2H 3H 4H AH BH CH DH EH 032H 033H 034H 035H 64H 65H 66H 67H 68H 69H 6AH 6BH 6CH 6DH 6EH 6FH 70H 71H 72H 73H 74H 75H 76H 78H 79H 7AH NAME Trend 1 Output Trend 2 Output Trend 3 Output Trend 4 Output SP Output 1 SP Output 2 SP Output 3 SP Output 4 SP Output 5 rend 1 Input Trend 2 Input Trend 3 Input Trend 4 Input Logic Status Drive Fault Pre Ramp Vel Ref Ramp Vel Ref Final Vel Ref Arm Voltage Fdbk Velocity Fdbk Position Fdbk Vel Feed Fwd Position Error Torque Command A A A A Flux Command AC Line Voltage Fld Current R ef Fld Current F dbk Proc Trim Output CEMF Feedback Flux Trim m Current Ref m Current F dbk m Cur PI Out m Cur Fire Ang
207. e of Change 1 4 Input Parameters 8 13 Input Power 1 4 Input Voltages 1 4 Interface 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 125 300 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 Description 5 1 J Jog 1 Speed 638 7 42 Jog 2 Speed 639 7 43 Jog Dwell 711 7 60 Jog Ramp Enable 626 7 39 Jog Speeds 1 5 Jumper Connections Circuit Board 6 18 Jumper Settings Field Current 6 19 Main Control Board 6 19 6 20 Power Stage Interface Board 6 19 K K AC Volts 740 7 67 K Armature Volts 739 7 67 K Discontinuous Fraction 745 7 70 K Discontinuous 734 7 66 KF Velocity Loop 661 7 47 KI Armature Loop 736 7 66 KI Field Loop 738 7 66 KI Flux 672 7 50 KI Velocity Loop 659 7 47 Kn Filter 692 7 56 KP Armature Loop 735 7 66 KP Field Loop 737 7 66 KP Flux 673 7 50 KP Velocity Loop 660 7 47 L Line Choke 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 3 5 Line Current Burden Resistor 8 10 Line Reactor 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 Linking Source to Sink Parameters 5 10 Illustration 5 11 Logic Command 1 150 7 25 Logic Command 2 151 7 28 Logic Command 3 152 7 29 1 8 Logic Description 5 25 Logic Status 100 7 16 Main Contactor M1 Control 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 12 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 16 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 17 Main Control Board 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 10 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 10 125 300 H
208. ecks the state of this signal in Logic Command 3 It then checks to see if the Command Enable Signal is present in Logic CMD 1 before making the selection of Logic Command 1 or 2 In Logic Command 2 the command enable bit is ignored Regardless of the selected Logic Command word 1 2 or 3 a Stop request from any Logic Command word will be honored The bits in the Logic Command words are defined as follows Bit 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Run Reference Select A Run Reference Select B Run Reference Select C LS Increment MOP Decrement Ramp Disable MOP Rate 1 CM MOP Rate 2 Command Enable Jog 2 Jog 1 9 10 11 12 DEFINITIONS 1 0 ORO o Normal Stop Start Close Contactor Clear Fault Process Trim Enable In addition to the basic bit definitions provided above several bits are used together for the purpose of selection Bits 0 1 2 are grouped to determine which speed reference is used for input to the velocity control Bits 6 and 7 are used to determine which MOP Accel Decel rates are in effect Bit usage is defined in tables 7 B and 7 C Run Reference Select bits 0 1 2 These three bits select the velocity reference for the motor The Start input in the logic command will close the contactor and the drive will run the motor at the velocity selected by these run reference select bits For each run reference select combination there corresponds a speed reference parameter
209. ed Max Volts Output 2 The Max Volts output must then be scaled to a level within the 10V analog input channel range This can be accomplished by using a voltage divider network external to the drive The voltage divider will take the Max Volts output and scale it to a maximum 9V input This allows for protection against 10 overshoot Figure 6 20 uses a 10 ohm resistor across the input channel represents the dropping resistor for the scaling network To determine the value of RI use the equation that follows R1 should be rated for 0 5W 1 Figure 6 20 Scaling Circuit Ri Analog In TB3 24 Tach Velocity Resistors 0 5W 1 10k Ohm 20k Adapter Board Input Impedance Analog In 3 23 Tach Velocity Max Volts Output x 6666 9 6666 R1 Chapter 6 Installation The analog input channel on the adapter board must now be scaled to represent an accurate velocity feedback signal First determine the analog input signal for base speed Parameter numbers are given in where applicable Base Motor Speed 606 x 9V Base Speed Input Max Speed The input voltage at base speed is then converted to Raw Adapter Units according to the following equation Base Speed Input x 2048 Raw Adapter Units 10 The Raw Adapter Units are then used to determine the correct scaling parameter value according to the equation below 4096
210. ed by a DC tachometer The standard drive control is set up to use a digital Encoder for speed feedback therefore the standard hardware of the drive does not have an input for DC tach feedback In this case the DC tach feedback must be provided through the Discrete Board as an analog input as shown in Figure 5 4 The speed feedback derived from the tach appears at Parameter 402 and is linked to Parameter 156 which is the Tach Velocity input to the Control Logic and is used for external speed feedback In a similar manner information from the Control Logic is linked to Sink parameters associated with Port A to provide digital and analog outputs from the Discrete Board as shown in Figure 5 4 Data flow between the Control Logic and other Adapter Boards may be traced in the same manner For detailed information pertaining to the hardware and parameters associated with each Adapter Board refer to the Installation and Maintenance Manual for that specific board The 1395 drive contains software that enables the drive to test and tune its current loop velocity loop and field flux loop upon command These features can be operated from the available program terminals or through a PLC program Several of these tests require that the motor be capable of running at base speed The choices available are detailed below Current Loop Test This feature checks the drive armature bridge for shorts or open circuits verifies that armature voltage sensing i
211. ed with the corresponding Microbus Port but until the Sink and Source parameters associated with the port are linked to control logic Source and Sink parameters no transfer of data to the drive control will occur Example Configuration Using Discrete Adapter Board Figure 5 4 shows a Discrete Adapter Board connected to Port A The Discrete Adapter Board provides for up to four 24VDC 115VAC digital inputs four analog inputs two digital output contacts and four analog outputs Wiring to the actual discrete devices is provided through terminal TB3 in the drive package Logic in the drive allows for scaling of input information for each analog input before it is sent to the respective Source parameters There are four Source parameters associated with the analog inputs Parameters 401 404 for PortA and Parameters 301 304 for Port B The four digital inputs to the drive are all sent to bits in a single 16 bit word which is to be used as a logic command input word Parameters 400 for Port A and 300 for Port B are used for this purpose Each of the four digital inputs to the Discrete Board can be configured to go to any of the 16 bits in the logic word for each port The hardware of the Discrete Board therefore defines the possible usage for each of the Source and Sink parameters associated with the specific Port to which the Board has been connected In Figure 5 4 the Discrete Board has been connected to Port A so only the Port A Sour
212. eedback Parameter 106 The No Feedback option is typically used for drives operating as torque regulators torque mode select Chapter 5 Functional Description Velocity Control Circle 5 Compares the speed reference value from the Velocity Reference Control to the actual motor speed from the Velocity Feedback Control The Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 is modified by KF Velocity Parameter 661 This parameter controls the amount of velocity reference that will be summed with velocity feedback This is filtered and modified through a Proportional Integral PI Control function The proportional gain of the PI Control is determined by the value of KP Velocity Loop Parameter 660 A value of 8 in Parameter 660 will provide a gain of 1 The integral gain of the PI Control is determined by the value of KI Velocity Loop Parameter 659 The output of the velocity control firmware is a torque reference which is limited before being applied to the torque selection block Process Trim Circle 7 Process Trim Reference Parameter 161 and Process Trim Feedback Parameter 162 are summed to provide the error signal into the filter block Process Trim Filter Constant Parameter 713 determines the gain of a single pole filter used in the process trim The output of the filter is used as the input to the process trim P I regulator Process Trim KI Gain Parameter 715 controls the integral gain and Process Trim KP Pa
213. efault Value 300 Description Filter Frequency Break Point 3db When using a lead lag filter and Parameter 631 3 the natural frequency of the filter can be selected The transfer function G s kn 256 s on s describe the filter Parameter 698 Auto Tune Current Limit Auto Tune I Lim Internal units 4096 1000H 100 Programming Terminal units 96 Minimum Value 0244 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 25 Description This parameter specifies the armature current that is applied to the motor during the Velocity motor test and Velocity system test Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 699 Auto Tune Speed Auto Tune Speed Internal units 4096 1000H 1 pu Base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value Base Speed Maximum Value Base Speed Default Value Base Speed Description This parameter is the top speed of the motor during an auto tune velocity motor test velocity system test and field flux tune For a field flux tune the motor must be at the auto tune speed before performing the field flux tune Parameter 700 Velocity Desired Bandwidth Vel Desired BW Internal units RAD x 10 Programming Terminal units RAD Sec Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 150 Default Value 5 Description This parameter specifies the velocity loop bandwidth requested by the user and determines along with Parameter 702 the dynamic behavior of the velocity loop The des
214. efault Value 601 Description This is the pointer for Parameter 164 Velocity Indirect 2 Parameter 602 Velocity Parameter 3 Select Vel Param 3 Sel Internal units RPM Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 600 Maximum Value 732 Default Value 602 Description This is the pointer for Parameter 165 Velocity Indirect 3 Parameter 603 Velocity Parameter 4 Select Vel Param 4 Sel Internal units RPM Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 600 Maximum Value 732 Default Value 603 Description This is the pointer for Parameter 166 Velocity Indirect 4 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 606 Base Motor Speed Base Motor Speed Internal units RPM Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 6000 Default Value 1750 Description Nameplate base motor speed in RPM Parameter 607 Reverse Speed Limit Rev Speed Limit Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 6 x base speed Maximum Value 0 Default Value base speed Description This parameter sets a limit on velocity reference in the negative direction and is dependent on the value entered for Base Motor Speed Parameter 606 The full numerical range for Parameter 607 is 0 to 6 x the value entered in Parameter 606 The reverse motor speed will not be allowed to exceed this value This parameter is also used together with the absolute overspeed p
215. egulated or torque follower drives can all be calibrated with this feature In order to calibrate the field flux properly the actual motor speed must match the value specified in Parameter 699 Also best results are obtained if the motor is run at base speed Gains must also be entered for KI Flux Parameter 677 and KP Flux Parameter 673 The defaults are recommended The 1395 has four internal trend buffers which can be programmed to monitor select fast parameters These buffers are particularly useful during the commissioning of the drive They can be used to monitor motor status logic command or other important information Each trend has the following features e The parameter to be trended can be specified e The parameter number operand X whose value will be monitored for a trigger condition can be specified The parameter number operand Y whose value will be compared against the monitored parameter to determine if a trigger should occur can be specified e The operator used to determine what condition s will cause a trigger is established e The rate at which the chosen parameter is selected is changeable e The number of samples taken after the trigger has ocurred is changeable e Each trend can be setup as one shot or multiple occurrence When setup as one shot the trend has to be enabled after each trigger occurrence When setup as multiple occurrence the trend buffer will restart immediately after the trend da
216. ence are adjustable by changing the values of Forward Speed Limit Parameter 608 and Reverse Speed Limit Parameter 607 Forward Speed Limit sets the maximum speed reference for the forward direction and Reverse Speed Limit sets the maximum speed reference for the reverse direction Pre Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 102 indicates the value of the velocity reference that has been currently selected by the Velocity Reference Control Parameter 102 is also the input to the Ramp Control Two parameters control the accel and decel rates of the Ramp function Accel Time Parameter 651 defines the time in seconds for the output of the Ramp to go from zero to base speed linear beyond base speed This rate applies to both forward and reverse speed references Decel Time Parameter 652 defines the time in seconds for the output of the Ramp to go from base speed to zero speed reference in both the forward and reverse directions In addition to the Ramp function an S filter function has been provided Desired Contour Parameter 653 specifies the rounding of the edges of the velocity profile or 5 filtering These functions can be bypassed by setting bit 5 in Logic Command Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 103 is the output of the Ramp and Contour function blocks The value of this parameter is conditionally offset by the Droop function if used to become the Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 The output of the Droop Cont
217. erminal Programming 1395 Drive Interface Terminal Control Logic Sources Sinks 200 249 150 151 Programming i Terminal Logic Cmd 2 Sinks CS Logic cma 3 Velocity Ref Whole Port A Port A Interface Sources C 2 Tach Velocity Torque Ref Sources 400 lt gt Logic Status Drive Fault Velocity Feedback lt gt Arm Current Fdbk 451 J Port B Port B Interface Sources Trend Buffer 300 1 49 Source 50 99 Links 349 Sinks 350 399 5 11 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 12 The specific function and data requirements for each source parameter associated with the ports is defined by the Sink parameter from the control firmware to which it is linked For example in Figure 5 3 Parameter 400 is linked to Parameter 151 Logic Cmd 2 Because Logic Cmd 2 has been pre defined as a 16 bit control word parameter 400 must be handled by the Adapter Board and in turn by the external control devices as the 16 bit control word Logic Cmd 2 i e parameter 400 takes on the meaning of Logic Cmd 2 The same condition is true for Sink parameters associated with the Microbus Ports For this reason Sink and Source parameters associated with the ports have no meaning until they are linked to Source and Sink parameters from the control logic Information may be flowing between the hardware connected to the Adapter Boards and the Source and Sink parameters associat
218. ero volts as shown in Fig 6 16 Figure 6 16 Typical 115VAC Digital Input Connections 115V AC 115V AC COMMON DIGITAL COMMON DIGITAL IN 1 DIGITAL IN 2 DIGITAL IN 3 DIGITAL IN 4 Internally Referenced to Common TB3 115V AC Common DIGITAL COMMON 115VAC ur di O DIGITAL IN 1 Jog 2 O DIGITAL IN 2 Start O DIGITAL IN 3 Clear Faults O DIGITAL IN 4 Not Referenced to Common External to the Drive 6 29 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 17 Example Discrete Adapter Board Configuration Shield Common Mil 784 7810 for Med KvA 1395 Drive TB3 Discrete Adapter PortA Digital Common 4 Digital 8 Inputs Bit 1l 115VAC or 24VDC Stop 58 Bi i External Power Supply Jog2 8 584 Select Bit9 50 m i Start 585 mE 51 Clear Faul 586 T 0 10V Re 5 Bit14 Sources Sinks 410V 2 Sua 5 16 Bits 400 151 J Logic Command 2 33 Ref Common Analog Inputs Trim Velocity Re 51 ane 551 550 Trim Velocity Re 29 Offs
219. et _ Scale 401 161 Trim Velocity Ref 28 553 552 2 omet Scale 402 26 External Velocity Re R External Velocity Re 25 D cae 403 154 External Velocity Ref i 24 557 556 DC Tach Velocity Offset Scale 6 10k Tach Velocity 23 0 404 156 Tach Velocity Option See Encoder Digital Outputs 46 5 P558 Bit Zero 2 dt Sources Speed T Q 4 100 Logic Status glo Sinks Drive L ae Running 4 411 1685 450 P559 37 Analog Outputs Velocity Feedback is Cannon aj 0 025 451 106 Velocity Feedback 36 578 577 Field Current Feedback 0 set Scale Field Current Common al 0 025 4 lt n Feedback 35 580 579 Armature Current Feedback O Offset Scale Amature Current Common g 0 025 4 CE Feedback A 582 581 Armature Voltage Feedback O Offset Scale Amature Voltage Common 51 0 025 4 Eti 105 Feedback TB3 Standard Encoder 20 Channel 9 vs ENGAL A 2 8 1 ENCB1 1 ia TU B 6 ENCB1 5 9 OQ 4 Supply 3 ENCPWR Voltage ENCGND 2 1 O 24V Out 4 alo s 24V Out umper Location See 24VDC ECOAST Bi os 5 24V ECOAST l 24V Drive Fault _ 1 gt bini Closed if there are no Soft or Hard Faults SS Output z Fault 1 115VAC Common 5 115V Common Out ro Oo USEC ECOAST O 4 115V ECOAST2 115V ECOASTI Reset L 8 3 LISVAC or id
220. external 115VAC source The source voltage may be interrupted before being input to the drive at TB2 3 by the use of externally controlled contacts These external contacts may include an external master coast stop PLC controlled contacts permissive contacts etc Main contactor M1 coil voltage is controlled within the 1395 through the Power Stage Interface when M1 is energized This signal is rectified and optically isolated to produce a 5V logic signal CVERIFY which is sent to the Main Control Board Pilot Relay PR Control K2 and contacts in series with the 115 VAC Coast Stop input to the drive control coil voltage to the Pilot Relay ECOAST Stop The ECOAST Stop as defined and illustrated is a contingency circuit designed to stop the motor in event of a malfunction in the solid state interface drive software When an ECOAST Stop is initiated the DC loop contactor is de energized and the motor will coast to a stop unless the drive is equipped with optional dynamic braking circuitry The optional dynamic braking circuitry is designed to develop 150 200 of rated motor torque for braking when an ECOAST Stop is initiated Braking torque decreases with speed This option is not recommended for repetitive operation Relay K2 on the Power Stage Interface is the ECOAST Stop relay and is controlled by 24VDC As shown in Figure 3 14 24VDC from the Power Stage Interface is connected to TB3 12 and 11 At this point an e
221. f the enclosure Temperatures around the drive must be kept between 0 C and 55 C 32 F and 131 F NOTE For drives mounted in Bulletin 2100 MCCs the ambient temperature may not exceed 40 C Humidity must remain between 5 to 95 non condensing The drive can be applied at elevations of 3300 feet 1 000 meters without derating The drive current rating must be derated by 3 for each additional 1 000 feet 300 meters Above 10 000 feet 3 000 meters consult the local Allen Bradley Sales Office The 1395 drive is of the open type construction and is designed to be installed in a suitable enclosure The selection of enclosure type is the responsibility of the user The heat sink is electrically isolated and is used as a mounting surface Refer to the following figures for dimensions WARNING Shock hazard exists at motor armature terminals if A gravity drop out contactor does not open The drive must be mounted in the vertical position Failure to observe this mounting practice can result in personal injury or death 6 1 Chapter 6 Installation that all cutting drilling tapping and welding can be accom plished with the drive removed from the enclosure The drive is of the open type construction and any metal debris must be kept from falling into the drive Metal debris or other foreign matter may become lodged in the drive circuitry resulting in component CAUTION The installation of the drive must be planned such damage
222. for armature time constants in range of 1 to 100 mS value should be set to 0 Non Zero Values will effect the bandwidth of the drive High Inductance applications Armature time constants greater than 100mS value needs to be adjusted according to the parameter description found in Chapter 7 Chapter Start Up 614 620 623 624 626 627 628 630 631 632 653 657 658 665 666 667 672 673 674 675 676 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 717 718 721 722 724 727 729 730 731 732 737 738 8 12 8 Process Trim Low Sum Tach Loss CEMF Table 8 L Set Up Parameters Application Application Tach Loss Velocit KP Field Loop Application KI Field Loop Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 M Speed Reference Parameters 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 Jog Speed 2 Application Table 8 N Input Parameters 150 Logic Command 1 Application 151 152 153 154 156 161 Process Trim Reference Application Chapter 8 Start Up Adapter Parameters In order to operate the drive from external control devices it first must be configured by linking Source Parameters to Sink Parameters as described in the Configuration section of Chapter 5 The drive can be controlled by either discrete I O devices using the Discrete or Digital Reference Adapter
223. for the parameter specified by Operand X to the data value for the parameter specified by Operand Y If the comparison is positive the trend is triggered 2 Less Than LT Compares the data value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the data value for the parameter specified by Operand Y If the comparison is positive the trend is triggered 3 Equal EQ Compares the data value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the data value for the parameter specified by Operand Y If the comparison is equal the trend is triggered 4 Not Equal NOT EQ Compares the data value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the data value for the parameter specified by Operand Y If the comparison isn t equal the trend is triggered 5 21 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 22 5 AND AND Compares the bits s of a 16 bit value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the bit s for the parameter specified by Operand Y If ALL of the same bit s are set to 1 in both parameters the trend is triggered Generally Operand Y is set up to use one of the Bit Trend Constant parameters Parameters 904 through 907 6 Negated AND NAND Compares the bits s of a 16 bit value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the bit s for the parameter specified by Operand Y If ALL of the same bit s are set to O in both parameters the trend is triggered Generally Operand Y is set up to use one of the B
224. from 0 to base speed Parameter 643 Mop Accel 3 MOP Accel 3 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the acceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 3 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to accelerate from 0 to base speed Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 644 Mop Accel 4 MOP Accel 4 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the acceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 4 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to accelerate from 0 to base speed Parameter 645 Mop Decel 1 MOP Decel 1 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the deceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 1 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to decelerate from base speed to zero speed Parameter 646 Mop Decel 2 MOP Decel 2 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determi
225. g 23 EE Configuration 598 256H PtA OUT Config 24 EE Configuration 599 257H PtA OUT Config 25 EE Configuration 600 258H Vel Parameter Sel 1 600 600 732 EE Pointer for Parameter 163 601 259H Vel Parameter Sel 2 601 600 732 EE Pointer for Parameter 164 602 25AH Vel Parameter Sel 3 602 600 732 EE Pointer for Parameter 165 603 25BH Vel Parameter Sel 4 603 600 732 EE Pointer for Parameter 166 606 25EH Base Motor Speed RPM 1750 1 6000 EE X Velocity Fdbk Cntrl 607 25FH Rev Speed Limit RPM B S 6 5 0 EE Ramp Control 608 260H Fwd Speed Limit RPM B S 0 6XB S EE Ramp Control 609 261H Encoder PPR 1024 100 32767 EE X VelFdbk Cntrl 610 262H Rated Motor Volt VOLTS 240 15 850 EE X Feedback Control 611 263H Motor Arm FLA AMPS 0 2 0 1 3216 7 EE Feedback Control 612 264H Rate Fld Mtr Cur AMPS 0 1 0 1 32167 EE Feedback Control 613 265H Motor Inertia SECS 6 0 0 01 10 EE 614 266H Arm Resistance 5 0 0 100 EE Velocity Fdbk Cntrl 615 267H Rated Arm Brdg AMPS 20 0 0 1 3216 7 EE Feedback Control 616 268H Rated Fld Brdg AMPS 10 0 10 0 3276 7 EE Feedback Control 617 269H Rated AC Line VOLTS 4600 230 0 690 EE X Feedback Control 620 26CH System Reset Select 0 0 1 EE Logic Control 621 26DH Fdbk Device Type 1 0 3 EE X Velocity Fdbk Cntrl 622 26EH Contactor Device 1 0 1 EE Logic Control 623 26FH Fault Select EE Fault Detection 624 270H Maintain Start 1 0 3 Logic Control See Parameter Description 7 10 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters
226. g is used an AC line reactor is not required Fast acting semiconductor fuses F1 F2 and are standard on all drives Synchronization The three phase input to the drive is fed directly to the Power Board The Power Board scales down the voltage and develops the synchronization information to be used by the Main Control Board AC Current Feedback Current Transformers ACT 1 ACT 2 Figure 2 2 are used to provide current feedback information to the PSI Switcher Board The PSI Switcher Board rectifies the feedback and scales a DC voltage representing the current feedback This signal is then sent to the Main Control Board Figure 2 2 Armature Bridge Components INPUT ACT 1 To TB1 To PSI Switcher Power Board Board To Power Board Field Bridge 2 3 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 2 4 L1 M2 P e A 1R A NE lt m M N sr zd To Power Board 3 OA Surge Suppression Surge suppressor MOVI to MOV4 on the Power Board protects the armature power bridge from line voltage spikes and line surges Line Reactor A reactor mounted outside the drive is used to protect the power bridge SCRs from rapid rate of current changes di dt SCR Packaging SCR packaging in the 1395 in bridge ratings 3 6 1 60 HP consists of 2 SCRs per module The regenerative construction has 6 SCR blocks thr
227. han 400 feet Greater spacing should be used where possible amount of EMI coupling The circuit application may dictate 3 Shields for shielded cables must be connected at one end only The other Separate spacing end should be cut back and insulated Shields for cables from a cabinet to an E Classes 9 10 and 11 may have their respective circuits pulled in the same external device must be connected at cabinet end Shields for cables from conduit or layered in the same tray one cabinetto another must be connected atthe source end cabinet Communication cables run in a bundle may experience some Splicing of shielded cables if absolutely necessary should be done so that amount of EMI coupling and corresponding communication faults The shields remain continuous and insulated from ground application may dictate separate spacing P pacing 4 Power wire is selected by load 16AWG is the minimum recommended size 3 All wires of class 7 through 11 MUST be shielded per the recommendations for control wiring 4 n cable trays steel separators are advisable between the class groupings 5 If conduit is used it must be continuous and composed of magnetic steel 6 7 Chapter 6 Installation Grounding Procedures 6 8 The purpose of grounding is to Limit dangerous voltages on exposed parts to ground potential in the event of an electrical fault To facilitate proper overcurrent device operation when ground fa
228. hapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 658 Droop Filter Gain Droop Filter Internal units 4096 1000h 100 droop filtering Programming Terminal units Percent of maximum Droop filtering Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 93 Description This parameter determines the gain of a single pole filter used in the droop A filter is used to correct for stability problems caused by subtracting a function of velocity error from the velocity reference 100 Droop filtering provides the maximum Droop filtering effect 0 Droop filter value will disable the entire Droop function Parameter 659 KI Velocity Loop KI Velocity Loop Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 256 Description This parameter controls the integral error gain of the velocity regulator For example If KI 8 then 1 pu Velocity Error for 1 second will produce 1 pu Torque Reference Parameter 660 KP Velocity Loop KP Velocity Loop Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1600 Default Value 64 Description This parameter controls the proportional error gain of the velocity regulator For example If KP 8 then 1 pu Velocity Error will produce 1 pu Torque Reference Parameter 661 KF Velocity Loop KF Velocity Loop Internal units none Programming Terminal units none Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Defa
229. he contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of the Allen Bradley Company is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard e avoid the hazard recognize the consequences Important Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to h alert people that dangerous voltage may be present CENTERLINE is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation PLC PLC 5 and PLC 3 are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation DH is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation PLC 5 250 PLC 5 15 PLC 5 25 PLC 5 40 and PLC 5 60 are trademarks of Rockwell Automation ControlView is a trademark of Rockwell Automation Data Highway Plus is a trademark of Rockwell Automation DriveTools is a trademark of Rockwell Automation Summary of Changes We would like to call your attention to the following changes to this manual which have occurred since the previous version Figures 2 9 3 13 4 11 4 12 6 23 were updated Ground PE text on page 6 10 was updated The formula on the bottom of page 7 69 was updated Firmware Revision History 1 00 2 30
230. he drive a Terminals 19 and 20 connect to differential encoder output A NOT and A b Terminals 17 and 18 connect to differential encoder output B NOT and B c Terminals 15 and 16 are reserved for future use and are not to be used d Terminal 14 provides 12VDC 500 mA max power to the encoder Some encoders limit the 12VDC supply internally to 5VDC for the output Consult the encoder documentation to determine whether the encoder output signal level is 12 or 5VDC Jumpers 18 J10 on the Main Control Board must be properly positioned to correspond to the encoder output voltage e Terminal 13 provides connection to the encoder supply voltage common ground f The encoder shield must be connected to the encoder case ground g The encoder cable must be separate from armature and field leads refer to Table 6 B h Maximum encoder cable length is 500 feet 150 meters For other lengths contact your Allen Bradley Sales Representative composed of solid state components If hazards due to 1 ATTENTION The Start Stop circuitry in this drive is accidental contact with moving machine components or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist a hardwired maintained Stop circuit must be used with this drive For 115VAC control this circuitry may be added at terminals 4 and 5 of TB3 ATTENTION If Dynamic Braking is used as an alternative stopping method Do Not use a hard wired Stop device that remove
231. he post sample parameter would be set to a lower number 20 samples is a good number This allows you to evaluate data before the trigger event on the trended parameters When a trend buffer is set up as a level detector the post sample parameter is generally set to a higher value 80 samples is a good number This allows you to evaluate what happened after the trigger occurred Chapter 5 Functional Description Setting the Trend Buffer Type Each trend buffer can be set up as a one shot or continuous trigger buffer When a buffer is set up as a one shot it is turned off after all post samples have been taken At this time the trend enable parameter value is changed to OFF effectively disabling that trend buffer The buffer will retain the data from the most recent trigger until it is manually activated or turned ON A continuous trigger trend buffer operates continuously even if it is triggered multiple times When a new trigger condition occurs the previous data samples are overwritten Activating a Trend Buffer Each trend buffer can be independently turned on or off A deactivated trend buffer will not monitor the selected parameter or evaluate trigger conditions If a trend buffer is set to shot the Drive will set the Trend Enable parameter to OFF when it has been triggered Setting the Trend Buffer Output Rate Each trend actually consists of two separate buffers One buffer i
232. hich is also provided as standard in the 1395 115VAC enters the PSI Switcher Board at TB2 Between TB3 4 and 5 an external dry ECOAST Stop contact may be connected If an external 115 VAC ECOAST stop circuit is not used TB3 4 and 5 must be jumpered 115VAC is returned to the Power Stage Interface from TB3 5 and sent to contacts of K2 The 115 VAC ECOAST Stop Signal is also sent to an isolation circuit which converts the 115VAC to a 5VDC control Signal ECOAST which is sent to the Main Control Board Main Control Relay K2 on the PSI Switcher is the main control relay which controls turn on voltage to the coil of the pilot relay K3 K2 is controlled by logic signals from the Main Control board entering the PSI Switcher through ribbon connector J10 The two signals which control K2 are the SYSTRIP and the DCPILOT signals In order for K2 to energize PR there must be no system fault and there must be a DC pilot relay turn on command If both these conditions are met K2 is energized and the Pilot Relay is in turn energized Optional External Control 115 Contacts VAC NOTE DC Contac E tor energization a jumper or oth er external cir cuitry must be connected to TB2 6 and 7 TE TB4 LL r3 NOTE 24 VDC must not be used for any purpose other than ECOAST 24VDC ECOAST Optional External Fault Indication olo ECOAST 24V DC O O or 115 VAC 9 9
233. ies a signed constant value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y 7 72 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 902 Trend Constant Signed Value Trend Sign Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies a signed constant value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y Parameter 903 Trend Constant Signed Value Trend Sign Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies a signed constant value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y Parameter 904 Trend Constant Logic Value Trend Logic Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111 Default Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies a bit s value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y The default value is Zero Parameter 905 Trend Constant Logic Value Trend Logic Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Min
234. if the start command is latched or momentary tire time the test is being performed If a stop command is issued anytime during the test the motor will stop and the test will be aborted Check Parameter 624 maintain start to determine if the start command is latched or momentary ATTENTION The drive Start command must be true for the en 5 Start the drive and run it at the same speed as specified by Parameter 699 6 Select the Field Flux Tune option Drive Setup Autotune Vel Tune using the program terminal 7 The Field Flux tuning will begin It takes approximately 5 to 60 seconds for the test to complete at which time the program terminal will indicate that the test has been completed and the option of saving this information in EEPROM can be executed NOTE Prior to doing any further application specific programming the application Parameters 607 608 663 and 664 if not previously programmed will have to be programmed for their final value There are several parameters associated with the use of the drive for specific applications At this point the basic drive control has been tuned for simple speed control If it is desired to operate the drive using one of the optional functions refer to Chapter 7 for a description of the parameters associated with these functions In addition to set up of the drive parameters associated with these functions it is also necessary to verify correct configuration of the Source to Sink
235. imum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111 Default Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies a bit s value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y The default value is Zero Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 906 Trend Constant Logic Value Trend Logic Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111 Default Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies a bit s value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y The default value is Zero Parameter 907 Trend Constant Logic Value Trend Logic Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum Value 1111 1111 1111 1111 Default Value 0000 0000 0000 0000 Description This parameter specifies a bit s value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y The default value is Zero Parameter 908 Trend Constant Unsigned Value Trend Unsign Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies an unsigned constant value used for trend trigger evaluation Thi
236. in a Star fashion and not daisy chained Figure 6 6 Stand Alone Drive Grounding 40 100 HP 230V 125 300HP 230V 125 300 HP 460V 250 600HP 460V Control Control Power Stage Interface Board Power Stage Interface Board Control Control Signal Signal Common Common Wire Shields Shields Zero Potential Bus TE The Zero Potential Bus point is used for all control signals internal to the drive Depending on the application TE may be connected to a system TE bus or connected to PE ground Figure 6 6 and 6 7 illustrate the possible connections for TE If the drive is Chapter 6 Installation configured as a stand alone unit the TE and PE grounds may be run individually to the drive or a jumper can be placed as shown in Table 6 C and one ground lead run as indicated in Table 6 D Table 6 C Safety Signal Ground Rating 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 60 100HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Table 6 D Safety Ground Connections Rating 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 60 100HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Wiring Connection TB2 4 amp 5 2 6 7 TB5 10 amp 11 Ground Terminal TB2 5 TB2 7 TB5 11 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 7 System Grounding Procedures 1395 Drive Control Boards Power Stage Interface Board Control Signal 1
237. ine which parameter you want to monitor or trend The parameter you select to trend must be a fast parameter because you will establish a configuration link to that parameter This link will be made between the parameter to be trended and the Trend Input Parameter Parameters 50 through 53 NOTE If you are not familiar with Drive configuration links refer to the Programming Terminal manual section detailing Drive Setup Setting up the Trend Trigger In order for a trend to operate you must tell it what conditions trigger will cause it to store data These conditions are setup by three parameters Trend Operand X Trend Operand Y and Trend Operator The following Equation is used to evaluate a trend trigger condition If Operand X Operator Operand Y then trigger In other words the value of parameter specified by Operand X is compared to the value of the parameter specified Operand Y If the conditions specified by the Operator are satisfied then the trend is triggered and begins storing data samples Operand X and Operand Y can be any parameter number from 1 to 947 If a constant value is required the Trend constant parameters Parmeters 900 through 909 can be used IMPORTANT Attempting to compare a signed parameter with an unsigned parameter will result in unpredictable trend operation AII attempts should be made to keep both Operand X and Operand Y signed or unsigned 1 Greater Than GT Compares the data value
238. ired bandwidth is limited to the maximum achievable bandwidth which is calculated by the velocity processor VP during auto tune system test The velocity loop becomes more responsive and reproduces the velocity reference more accurately as the bandwidth is increased However the velocity may exhibit more oscillation and overshoot as it is increased Parameter 701 Velocity Maximum Bandwidth Vel Max BW Internal units RAD x 10 Programming Terminal units RAD Sec Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 150 Default Value 50 Description This parameter specifies the maximum achievable velocity loop bandwidth as calculated by the VP The maximum bandwidth is a function of the velocity loop damping factor Parameter 702 and the system inertia The VP updates the parameter during auto tuning and whenever the user reads this parameter The maximum velocity loop bandwidth is not changeable by the user Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 702 Velocity Damping Factor Vel Damp Factor Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 5 Maximum Value 3 0 Default Value 1 0 Description This parameter along with Parameter 700 determines the dynamic behavior of the velocity loop The damping factor influences the amount of overshoot the velocity loop will exhibit during a transient The velocity will typically exhibit more overshoot and become oscillatory underdamped as the damping factor is reduced below 1
239. it Trend Constant parameters Parameters 904 through 907 7 Or OR Compares the bits s of a 16 bit value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the bit s for the parameter specified by Operand Y If ANY of the same bit s are set to 1 in both parameters the trend is triggered Generally Operand Y is set up to use one of the Bit Trend Constant parameters Parameters 904 through 907 8 Negated OR OR Compares the bits s of a 16 bit value for the parameter specified by Operand X to the bit s for the parameter specified by Operand Y If ANY of the same bit s are set to 07 in both parameters the trend is triggered Generally Operand Y is set up to use one of the Bit Trend Constant parameters Parameters 904 through 907 Adjusting the Data Sample Rate The sample rate for data acquisition has a programmable range of 4ms through 30 seconds In 4ms increments The rate at which the data is sample and at which the trigger condition is evaluated is the same up to 40ms This assures that possible trigger conditions will be monitored whenever the sample rate exceeds 40 ms The sample rate can be changed while a trend is active Setting the Number of Post Samples The number of data samples taken once a trigger condition has occurred is programmable The range is 0 through 99 with one sample reserved for the instance the trigger condition becomes true Typically when a trend buffer is set to trigger on a fault t
240. ith the functional description portion of this manual and the operation of the Programming Terminal refer to Pub 1300 5 5 before attempting any start up procedures Figure 8 1 outlines the sequence that is required to start up the 1395 drive Chapter 8 Start Up Figure 8 1 Bulletin 1395 Start Up Sequence PRE POWER CHECKS External Internal Feedback Board Connection Checks Connection Checks Jumper Check LIVE POWER CHECKS Incoming Logic Polarity Monitor Voltage Checks Level Checks Checks Armature Voltage PARAMETER PROGRAMMING START UP With With Node Adapter Discrete Adapter TUNING Pre Power Checks 1 Verify all procedures listed in Chapter 6 Installation have been properly completed 2 If you have not already done so record the following information on the Pre Power Checklist Table on page 8 4 e Drive order number e Drive nameplate data Motor nameplate data e Tachometer Encoder data if applicable e Adapter boards used e External devices interfaced with Drive such as PLC discrete I O etc 8 3 Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 A Pre Power Checks DRIVE NAMEPLATE DATA Catalog Number S N AC Input Field Vots _ Amps AC Input Armature Volts Amps DC Output Field Vots Amps DC Output Armature Vols 1 Amps HP MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Type HP RPM Arm Volts Amps Field Volts Am
241. l Board In addition it allows for connection of two adapter boards through two ports Microbus Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information between the microprocessor chips at the microprocessor level The microbus is used for transfer of information between the control microprocessors located on the Main Control Board In addition it allows for connection of two adapter boards through two ports Microprocessor A silicon chip that can be programmed to process data Setup Parameter A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application Chapter 9 Reference Materials Parameter A memory address that is used to store data for use by the program The data stored in the parameter can be either variable or constant Port Hardware located on the Main Control Board which allows for connection of one Adapter Board to the microbus Reset A signal used to return a function to its initial state Scaling A number used as a multiplier so chosen that it will cause a set quantity to fall within a given range of values Software Programs procedures rules and documentation pertaining to the operation of the computer system 9 15 Chapter 9 Reference Materials This Page Intentionally Left Blank 9 16 Renewal Parts Introduction Chapter 10 provides renewal parts information for the 1395 Drive The chapter is divided into three
242. le the drive could be controlled by discrete hardware such as push buttons and pots In this case a Discrete Adapter Board would be required to interface the discrete control hardware to Port A If interface with a PLC is desired a Node Adapter Board is required in Port B Each Adapter Board also has Sink parameters associated with it as shown in Figure 5 2 Chapter 5 Functional Description Source Parameters Information input to a Sink parameter must originate from a Source parameter which transmits the information through the Microbus Ports As shown in Figure 5 2 there are 10 Source parameters associated with each of the ports The specific hardware devices associated with the Source parameters are determined by the Adapter Board which has been physically connected to the port For example if a Discrete Adapter Board has been connected to Port A then Parameter 400 is defined as a 16 bit word where 4 of the bits can be controlled directly by the 4 digital inputs to the board If a Node Adapter Board has been connected to Port B then Parameter 300 is defined as a 16 bit word where all 16 bits are directly controlled by the program in the PLC Refer to Chapter 6 for details on pre configuration of the 1395 drive The control logic also provides Source parameters which may be used to send information to the Sink parameters associated with the Microbus Ports Some of the Source parameters associated with the control logic have been
243. limited to values less than or equal to Forward Speed Limit Parameter 608 or Reverse Speed Limit Parameter 607 depending on the selected MOP direction Parameter 650 Mop Min Speed MOP Min Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value 0 Description This parameter will determine the minimum MOP speed that can be reached using the MOP decrease in the logic command This is also the speed setpoint used when a Start function is executed with the MOP velocity reference selected in the logic control word Parameter 651 Accel Time Accel Time Internal units seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 10 0 Description This parameter determines the acceleration rate of the velocity reference selected Units are measured in seconds to accelerate from 0 to base speed The acceleration ramp applies to speed changes away from zero speed in either the forward or reverse direction The velocity ramp function can be bypassed by setting bit 5 to 1 in the logic command word Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 652 Decel Time Decel Time Internal units seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 10 0 Description This parameter determines the deceleration rate of the velocity reference selecte
244. ltered and modified through a P I Control Function Armature Loop Proportional Gain Parameter 735 determines the proportional gain of the current regulator Armature Loop Integral Gain Parameter 736 determines the integral gain Parameter 734 is used to linearize the armature current loop for discontinuous current operation The output of the Armature Current P I Control block is converted to a time and sent to the armature SCR bridge Field Flux Control Circle 11 and 12 Provides information for field weakening flux reference and field flux linearization Several parameters are required to develop this information Feedback Device Type Parameter 621 provides the Flux Reference Selection block with feedback information Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 enables options in the flux control module Field Flux Reference Parameter 676 defines the highest flux reference that can be applied to the motor field Chapter 5 Functional Description Field Economy Reference Parameter 674 specifies the field flux flux reference to the motor The flux value specified by this parameter will be in use when the motor has been stopped for the time specified in the Field Economy Delay Parameter 675 Minimum Field Regulate Speed Parameter 686 and velocity Fdbk Parameter 106 are required for Field Weakening The drive will go into field weakening when actual speed is greater than base speed unless defined otherwise
245. mand Word P rogram Terminal External Velocity Reference Fractional Part External Velocity Reference Whole Part Tachometer feedback signal coming from analog tach or other external velocity feedback device Torue Reference input Used when drive operates as a torque regulator External flux reference used as a feed forward term in field regulator Counter EMF Reference Used when drive is operated as a torque regulator Process Trim Reference Input Process Trim feedback derived from external sensing device Indirect parameter linked to slow Parameter 600 Indirect parameter linked to slow Parameter 601 Indirect parameter linked to slow Parameter 602 Indirect parameter linked to slow Parameter 603 The function of each Sink parameter has been pre defined and cannot be changed For example Parameter 151 Logic Cmd 2 has been specifically set aside for the function of drive logic control Because each Sink parameter has been defined for a specific use each Sink parameter will have a specific data type and units of measure For example Parameter 151 Logic Cmd 2 is a 16 bit word where each bit has been defined for a specific function such as Start Stop Close Contactor etc A description of each parameter is provided in Chapter 7 The specific external control devices which can be interfaced with the drive are defined by the type of Adapter Boards connected to Microbus Ports A and B on the Main Control Board For examp
246. met K3 is energized and PR is in turn energized The control voltage being applied to K3 may be monitored on the Power Stage Interface at TP21 3 17 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC If K3 is being commanded to energize the voltage at TP21 will be OVDC If K3 is to be de energized the voltage at TP21 will be 24VDC Figure 3 14 Relay Logic 3 Phase Armature AC Bridge Optional External Control 115 Contacts VAC HH Common NOTE To pro vide DC Contac tor energization a jumper or oth er external cir cuitry must be connected be tween TB2 8 and TB2 9 1 4 J1 115 VAC Common NOTE 24 VDC uswcommn e A not be used for any n 11 19 pf R ECOAST TB3 24V OUT 12 11 24V OUT 11 24VDC 24 V ECOAST ECOAST 0 FLT2 CVERIFY Optional 2 24 V ECOAST Closed When 8 Drive is not FLT1 Faulted 115V COMMON OUT ECOAST a 115V ECOAST 2 5 Q 5 ECOAST 24VDC L Reset In XXE or 115VAC Reset Motor Temp In 115V ECOAST 1 m Jo o Jo IN Jo Jo J Common In 3 Source umi Thermostat HST A7 sd FAULTED 39 Power of feminals NES _ IST 16 SYSTRIP AC or DC Overcurrent Stag e Blouson Board DCPLOT 35 Interface pg 6 22 3 18 Options Chapter 3 Hardware Description 4
247. miconductor fuses are standard on all ratings Synchronization The three phase input to the drive is tapped and fused using fuses F1 F2 and F3 Fig 4 2 and enters the Feedback Board at AI 1 11 13 and 15 The feedback board scales down the voltage to a range from 3 4 to 7 0VAC depending on the three phase incoming line voltage The scaled voltage is sent to the Power Stage Interface where it is used to develop the synchronizing information to be used by the Main Control Board AC Current Feedback Current Transformers ACT 1 ACT 2 and ACT 3 are used to provide current feedback information to the Feedback Board at AITB1 5 6 and 7 The Feedback Board rectifies the three phase feedback and scales the DC voltage before being sent to the Power Stage Interface The DC voltage representing current feedback is passed directly through the Power Stage Interface and sent to the Main Control Board Figure 4 2 Armature Bridge Components Input To Fig 4 3 Branch Fuses To Feedback Board To Feedback Board 4 3 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Surge Suppression Surge Suppressor 1 MOV Fig 4 2 protects the armature power bridge from high voltage line spikes and line surges SCR Packaging In 346 980A bridges 125 600HP SCRs are packaged as individual hockey puck type SCRs Two SCRs connected in antiparallel in one of six legs of the bridge is referred to as an
248. mounted terminal Important Refer to Chapter 1 Publication References for manuals describing larger horsepower and current ratings at other line voltages 4 1 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Hardware Overview Figure 4 1 provides an overview of the hardware components associated with the 1395 drive Hardware can be divided into one of three categories e Control Boards e Control Power Interface hardware e Power Hardware This chapter describes in general all of the major hardware components for a 125 600HP 346 980A drives Figure 4 1 Hardware Overview 3 Phase AC L1 L2 L3 1 Phase AC See Fig 4 2 Wired By User Unit See Fig 4 4 6 11 Power Feedback Supply A6 Board TB 8 J2 J7 Arm P T amp Snubber A4 J8 Power Main Stage 7 Control Interface AME usos 3 Phase Bose Snubber A8 Bridge Fid P T amp Snubber Programming Terminal DHT DMT CONTROL CONTROL POWER INTERFACE POWER 4 2 Armature Bridge Components To TB5 see Figure 4 1 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC A general description of the components in the armature bridge Figures 4 2 and 4 3 and their operation is detailed here Incoming Device Either a line choke or an isolation transformer is required Fuses Fast acting se
249. n 3 1 Hardware Overview 3 1 Hardware Overview Illustration 3 2 Interface 3 1 Line Choke 3 4 3 5 Main Contactor M1 Control 3 17 Main Control Board A8 3 11 Main Control Board Hardware Illustration 3 11 Main Control Relay 3 17 Microbus 3 1 Multi Communication Adapter Board 3 22 Node Adapter Board 3 22 Options 3 19 Peripheral Devices 3 13 Pilot Relay PR Control 3 17 Port 3 1 Power Distribution 3 14 Power Stage Interface A7 3 9 Power Stage Interface Hardware Illustration 3 10 Programming Terminal 3 1 Programming Terminal Illustration 3 19 Programming Terminal Interface 3 19 Pulse Transformer Snubber Boards 3 4 Relay Logic 3 17 Relay Logic Illustration 3 18 SCR Modules 3 5 SCR Packaging 3 4 Supply Voltage 3 5 Surge Suppression 3 4 3 5 Synchronization 3 3 Terminology 3 1 Unit Power Supply Illustration 3 13 A Absolute Overspeed 724 7 63 AC Current Feedback 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 3 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 3 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 3 AC Line Reactor 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 3 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 3 AC Line Tolerance Delay 728 7 64 AC Line Voltage 116 7 22 Accel Time 651 7 45 Accel Decel 1 5 Accessories for this Drive 1 3 Activating a Trend Buffer 5 23 5 25 Adapter Board 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 2 15 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 15 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 4 19 125
250. nal 115VAC control voltage used to energize the Main Contactor MI as follows Terminal TB2 1 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60HP 460VAC Terminal 2 3 40 100 230VAC 75 200 460VAC 6 25 Chapter 6 Installation 6 26 Terminal TB5 6 amp 7 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600 460VAC The 115VAC control voltage enters the drive and is controlled by the pilot relay PR If it is desired to control the MI coil voltage using contacts external to the drive in addition to the pilot relay the external contacts must be wired in series with the 115VAC supply voltage before entering the drive at either TB2 1 TB2 3 or 5 4 In most applications external contacts are not used therefore 115VAC is supplied directly to TB2 or TB5 as follows Terminal TB2 2 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60HP 460VAC Terminal TB2 4 40 100 230VAC 75 200 460VAC Terminal TB5 4 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 15 115VAC Input and Contactor Control Connections 125 to 300 HP 230 VAC 250 to 600HP 460 VAC Line AC ica Supply Isolation Transformer 1395 n ju S tage i 230 e inisrisce 460VA E Board e E oh Im e External H i Contacts e i See Step ri Step8 i e 8 Terminals TB2 or TB5 depending on horsepower rating are used to allow the drive to be operated with external control of the contactor as follows Terminal TB2 6 amp 7 1 30HP 230VAC 2 6
251. nctional Description Functional Overview 5 2 Parameter Table of parameter entries for all Configuration and Setup parameters used in the drive Source Fast parameter used as a source of data Sink Fast parameter used to receive data input General Figure 5 1 provides an overview of the major blocks associated with the control functions of the Bulletin 1395 All control functions in the 1395 are performed through the use of parameters which can be changed with a Programming Terminal Feedback information is derived from hardware devices as shown on the right side of Figure 5 1 Analog signals are converted to digital signals for use by the drive Control signals may be provided to the drive from up to two optional Adapter Boards All setup and operation information used by the drive is stored in a system parameter table Every parameter including Setup and Configuration parameters Sources and Sinks has an entry in the parameter table For example parameter 154 is named the Vel Ref Whole parameter and contains a number representing the velocity reference The velocity reference can originate from an external control device such as a potentiometer connected to the Discrete Adapter Board or a signal coming from a PLC Refer to Chapter 7 for parameter descriptions Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 1 Functional Overview Port A Port B Three Phase Line Programming Adapter Adapter lol we Terminal
252. nd Parameter Y 911 7 75 Trend 1 Operator 912 7 75 Trend 1 Output Transmit Rate 917 7 77 Trend 1 Samples After Trigger Condition is True 914 7 76 Trend Sampling Rate 913 7 76 Trend Constant Logic Value 904 7 73 Trend Constant Logic Value 905 7 73 Trend Constant Logic Value 906 7 74 Trend Constant Logic Value 907 7 74 Trend Constant Signed Value 900 7 72 Trend Constant Signed Value 901 7 72 Trend Constant Signed Value 902 7 73 Trend Constant Signed Value 903 7 73 Trend Constant Unsigned Value 908 7 74 Trend Constant Unsigned Value 909 7 74 Up To Speed Tolerance 709 7 60 Velocity Damping Factor 702 7 58 Velocity Desired Bandwidth 700 7 57 Velocity Error 124 7 24 Velocity Feed Forward 108 7 21 Velocity Feedback Filter Select 631 7 41 Velocity Feedback 106 7 20 Velocity Indirect 1 163 7 31 Velocity Indirect 2 164 7 31 Velocity Indirect 3 165 7 31 Velocity Indirect 4 166 7 32 Velocity Maximum Bandwidth 701 7 57 Velocity Parameter Select 600 7 32 Velocity Parameter 2 Select 601 7 32 Velocity Parameter 3 Select 602 7 32 Velocity Parameter 4 Select 603 7 32 Velocity PI Output 123 7 24 Velocity Reference Fraction 153 7 29 Velocity Reference Whole 154 7 29 Warning Select 632 7 41 Wn Filter 693 7 56 Zero Speed Tolerance 710 7 60 Per Unit Numbering Definition 7 2 Peripheral Devices 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 13 40 100
253. nd low limits This parameter specifies the low limit of the Process Trim output value Parameter 718 Process Trim High Limit Proc Trim Hi Lim Internal units 1000h 4096 1 PU Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 4096 Description The output of the Process Trim regulator is limited by adjustable high and low limits This parameter specifies the high limit of the Process Trim output value Parameter 719 Process Trim Output Gain Proc Trim Out K Internal units 800h 2048 unity gain Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 16 00 Maximum Value 16 00 Default Value 1 0 unity gain Description The output of the Process Trim regulator is scaled by a gain factor This occurs immediately before the application upper and lower limit This parameter specifies the gain value to use Positive or negative gains may be used A negative gain value will invert the Process Trim output Parameter 720 Overload Pending Level Ovld Pend Level Internal units 4096 1000H 100 rated motor current Programming Terminal units percent of rated motor current Minimum Value 0 02496 Maximum Value 260 Default Value 115 Description This parameter determines the armature current level at which an overload pending fault will occur 7 62 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 721 Process Trim Low Sum Proc Trim Low Sum Internal units 4096 1000
254. ndard Drive Features 1 2 OPHONS E 1 2 ACCESSOTICS idus ua qd 1 3 neos RR Ee ES Hebe CE 1 3 Unpacking usse Leer nee treo amb ced dea 1 3 INSPCCUON Hp 1 3 SONNE XU br espe RES RO ER bd 1 3 Specifications 222 erue re Ro dew Reed Kee Beas FER E rede 1 4 Catalog Number Explanation 1 7 Publication References eoe RE REX UR re D A ee 1 10 Chapter 2 IntrOd CtloB aw a C Rod Te gata 2 1 Tetmmology ux eR ERE CRRRESQG EEG XR Cages 2 1 Hardware Overview 2 1 Armature Bridge Components 2 3 Field Bridge Components 2 5 Power Board 5252220 ep wag waded Rc chad Res tes 2 6 PSI Switcher Board 2 8 Main Control Board dee vada paw a ae ete e ce 2 10 Power Distribution 2 11 Relay Logic 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC 2 12 OPUONS 2s de rtr whee Puede ed ees d bordi 2 14 Discrete Adapter Board 2 16 Digital Reference Adapter Board 2 16 Node Adapter Board 2 17 Multi Communication 2 17 ControlNet Adapter Board
255. ndex Chapter 8 Inttoductioti s ista nro gontent xq re dE Sada ue 8 1 lerminology sieri be peed aee ad ee eR E e Cede 8 2 Required Tools and Equipment 8 2 Recommended Tools and Equipment 8 2 General E Sees Kale ead re erue 8 2 Pre Powetr Checks sers RR Eee e e 8 3 Voltage Measurement 5 Ree 8 5 Standard Control I O 8 8 Parameter Programming Procedures 8 8 Line Armature Current Burden Resistors 8 10 Adapter Parameters 8 14 Motor and Feedback Polarity Checks 8 16 Verification of Drive Calibration 8 17 Drive Tuning Drive Setup Autotune Current 8 19 Application Setup eroe pe tee eae eae ae 8 22 Chapter 9 Introduction iun de a n RK 9 1 Configuration Parameter List 9 1 Parameter Value 486 9 4 Alphabetical Parameter Reference Listing 9 10 Glossary EG wee ee ee 9 14 Chapter 10 Hiper 10 1 1 30HP 230VAC 2 60HP 460VAC SERIES B 10 1 40 100HP 230VAC 75 200HP 460VAC SERIES A 10 5 125 300HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC S
256. ne of 8 possible speed reference values The speed reference value which is selected is determined by the currently active Logic Command Word Parameter 150 151 152 Bits 0 1 and 2 of the logic command provide the binary data to select from 0 through 7 which corresponds to the 8 speed reference options Velocity Reference is a two parameter external velocity reference expressed in Drive Units 4096 Base Speed Parameter 154 supplies the whole number part while Parameter 153 supplies the fractional part of the external reference Also selectable are five different preset speeds defined in Parameters 633 through 637 In addition Logic Command bits 0 1 and 2 can be used to select the output of a MOP as the speed reference Selecting the MOP function output as a reference bypasses the Jog select function The MOP output will enter directly into the speed limit block Parameters 649 and 650 MOP max and MOP Min speeds are used to limit the maximum and minimum MOP speeds that can be reached using the MOP INC and MOP DEC function Bits 9 and 10 of logic command select the Jog function as the speed reference Two jog speeds are available Parameter 638 represents Jog and Parameter 639 represents Jog 2 These jog speeds can be defined as either forward or reverse speed references 5 25 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 26 The selected speed reference then enters a speed limit block The maximum and minimum limit of the speed refer
257. ner must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment Remove all packing material wedges or braces from within and around the drive Remove all packing material from the cooling fans when equipped and the heat sink IMPORTANT Before the installation and start up of the drive a general inspection of the mechanical integrity i e loose parts wires connections etc should be made After unpacking check the item s nameplate catalog number against the purchase order An explanation of the catalog numbering system for the 1395 drive is included as an aid for nameplate interpretation Refer to the following pages for complete nomenclature The drive should remain in its shipping container prior to installation If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage e Store in a clean dry location e Store within an ambient temp range of 0 to 65 C 32 to 149 F e Store within a humidity range of 5 to 95 non condensing e Do not store equipment in a corrosive atmosphere e Do not store equipment in a construction area Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication R eferences Specifications Type Drive Electrical Input Voltages Input Power Input Frequency Max Rate of Change of Input Frequency Output Voltage
258. nes the deceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 2 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to decelerate from base speed to zero speed Parameter 647 Mop Decel 3 MOP Decel 3 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the deceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 3 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to decelerate from base speed to zero speed 7 44 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 648 Mop Decel 4 MOP Decel 4 Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter determines the deceleration rate of the MOP generated velocity reference when Mop rate 4 has been selected in the logic command word The units are in seconds to decelerate from base speed to zero speed Parameter 649 Mop Max Speed MOP Max Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed Description This parameter will limit the maximum MOP speed that can be reached The MOP generated reference velocity will always be less than or equal to this number The MOP reference speed will also be
259. ng signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK FIELD CURRENT FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK and ARMATURE VOLTAGE FEEDBACK All inputs and outputs have the flexibility to be reconfigured by the user for other signals For a detailed description of the discrete adapter refer to the Discrete Adapter Manual The Digital Reference Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface This interface supplies the Adapter Board with all logic voltages and communication capabilities The Digital Reference Adapter has the following inputs and outputs Digital Reference Input One digital reference input which produces a digital reference command for the Drive The Adapter Board is set up by default for the encoder input signal to be single channel dual edge ie both the rising edge and falling edge are used by the counting logic Digital Inputs Ten programmable discrete inputs for 24VDC signals They can be connected to any Sink parameter such as the Logic command word All ten inputs are LED indicated for high input level visibility These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches etc 3 21 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Node Adapter Board Multi Communication Board 3 22 The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals RUN REFERENCE SELECT A B C RAMP DISABLE JOG2 JOGI NORMAL S
260. nge 0 596 of top speed with 5PY tachometer 0 1 of top speed with BC42 tachometer 2 of top speed Feedback Devices DC Tachometer Encoder External Inputs Enable Contingency Coast Stop System Reset Motor Thermostat Communication Port External Outputs Drive Ready Faulted Environmental Ambient Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Altitude Standard Features Accel Decel Preset Speeds Jog Speeds 5 Ramp Motor Operated Pot MOP Options Discrete Adapter Board Digital Inputs 4 Digital Outputs 2 Analog Inputs 4 Analog Outputs 4 Power Supply For external use Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication References 5 PY BC42 or equal Incremental dual channel 12 volts 500mA isolated with differential transmit ter 102 5 kHz max Quadrature 90 27 25 C Duty Cycle 50 10 Source Sink capable 845H or equal 24VDC 115VAC hard wired to DC contactor 24VDC 115VAC Isolated 24VDC 115VAC Isolated RS 422 for programming terminal N O relay contact open when drive faulted or de energized closed when ready Con tact rating 1 ADC 24 VDC or 0 5A 120VAC 0 to 55 C 32 130 F 5 to 95 non condensing 3 300 feet 1 000 meters 0 1 to 6554 seconds independently programmable 5 adjustments programmable 2 adjustments programmable Programmable 10 a
261. nication in the drive is accomplished using a Microbus which is a specialized microprocessor bus designed by Allen Bradley In addition to internal communication transfer of data between the drive and up to two Adapter Boards is provided through the Microbus The hardware used for this interface is known as a Microbus Port Two ports labeled A and B are available Adapter Boards provide an interface between external control hardware such as discrete devices PLC s etc Drive Logic Control This block controls the operating state of the drive in response to the logic command input Selection of various reference parameters i e speed reference and control modes i e droop are performed in the drive Logic Control In addition to controlling the state of the drive the drive Logic Control monitors the present operating condition of the drive and provides this information as available feedback to external control devices The drive Logic Control also monitors fault sensing Speed Reference Selection There are five preset speeds stored in parameters in the drive Additionally an External Speed Reference and one of two Jog inputs may be selected as the velocity reference input to the drive The Speed Reference Select block uses information provided from the drive Logic Control to determine which of the available references will be used as the input to the Velocity Control The selected reference is sent to a ramp before being sent as the vel
262. nnel familiar with the 1395 Drive CAUTION An incorrectly applied or installed Drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in damage to the Drive or motor Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference Allen Bradley Publication 8000 4 5 2 Guarding against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook CAUTION This Drive contains ESD Electrostatic Chapter 1 in addition to detailing drive features and specifications also supplies the information needed to unpack properly inspect and if necessary store the 1395 Drive A complete explanation of the catalog numbering system is also included at the back of this chapter 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication R eferences Standard Drive Features The 1395 is a microprocessor Digital DC Drive available in e Four quadrant armature regenerative two quadrant field 1 300 HP 230VAC in standard 1395 enclosures 400 700 HP 230VAC in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control centers MCCs 2 600 HP 460VAC in stan
263. ns for the velocity and trim reference inputs can be for uni or bi directional operation using the internal drive 10VDC power supply see Figure 6 24 Tach Velocity The Digital Reference Adapter Board is not pre configured for DC tachometer feedback The user will have to reconfigure the drive by replacing the Trim Velocity Reference parameter 161 with the Tach Velocity parameter 156 The analog tachometer device generates a DC voltage that is direction sensitive and proportional to speed The tach output must be connected to an analog input channel on the Discrete Adapter Board Most industrial tachs have an output greater than the 10V range of the analog inputs The tach output must be scaled down by an external voltage divider network so that the entire speed range of the motor can be represented by a 9V feedback signal ATTENTION Connecting a tach which has an output range greater than 10V directly to the analog input channel can severely damage the adapter board 6 36 Chapter 6 Installation The tach signal then must be scaled in the adapter board to determine the proper relationship of output voltage motor velocity to base speed in Drive Units This scaled configuration data must then be linked to Parameter 156 Tach Velocity Many problems relate to the scaling of the tach signals Below is a procedure for checking the scaling of the analog tach feedback for proper drive operation 1 Determine the
264. nt Parameter 615 Parameter 112 is the average armature current feedback value The field current transducer FCT provides field current feedback to the control which is scaled by Rated Field Motor Current Parameter 612 and Rated Field Bridge Current Parameter 616 The average field current can be read by Parameter 118 Tach Loss Recovery When Tach Loss Recovery is selected it allows the Drive to continue operation under armature voltage control in the event that the primary feedback device fails the primary device can be an encoder or DC tach The switchover occurs automatically and does not shut the Drive down This feature also provides an option for configuring a tach loss as a Warning Fault This is done with Parameter 691 Tach Switch Sel If Parameter 691 is set to one the Tach Loss Recovery feature is activated and Tach Loss becomes a Warning fault If Parameter 691 is set to zero a tach loss causes a soft fault The default value for Parameter 691 is zero tach loss recovery disabled Chapter 5 Functional Description When enabled the Tach Loss feature operates as follows Velocity feedback from an encoder or tach is compared against velocity feedback derived from armature voltage When the magnitude absolute value of the difference between the two feedbacks exceeds the Tach Loss Window Parameter 688 for a period of time in excess of 40 msec an automatic switchover to Armature Volts Feedback will occur
265. nt limit and at zero speed before a stall fault will be indicated Parameter 728 AC Line Tolerance Delay AC Line Tol Delay Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 0 Default Value 0 1 Description This parameter specifies the length of time that the supply voltage is allowed to deviate by more than 15 or 20 of the rated value Parameter 617 before a voltage out of tolerance fault will be indicated Parameter 729 Field Fault Threshold Fld Flt Thresh Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU 100 rated motor field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 096 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 30 Description This parameter is used to set the threshold for activating the motor loss fault in the CP fault word Parameter 101 bit 6 Internally if the field current reference Parameter 117 is greater than the field current threshold Parameter 729 and the field current feedback Parameter 118 is less than 10 of threshold a field loss fault occurs A value of zero disables the field loss fault detection 7 64 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 730 Field Failure Delay Fld Failure Dly Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 5 0 Default Value 1 0 Description This parameter indicates the length of time that the field current feedback value can deviate b
266. o 0 6A DC 4 0 4 to 1 2A DC 1 0 to 2 44 DC 2 Verify that the voltage selection for the Reset and Motor Thermostat inputs is correct Jumpers J11 and J12 on the Power Stage Interface Board determine whether the voltage used for the Reset and Motor Thermostat inputs is 24VDC or 115VAC Both switches should be in the same position See Table 6 I Table 6 1 Power Stage Interface Board Jumper Settings ies B Series B Fumose o es Series A Purpose ur _ 1 30 HP 240VDC 40 100 HP 240VDC 125 300 HP 240VDC Jumper Position 2 60 HP 500VDC Jumper Position 75 200 HP 500VDC Jumper Position 250 600 HP 500VDC J11 1 2 24VDC Motor Thermal Input 11 1 2 115VAC Motor Thermal Input J11 1 2 5 Motor Thermal Input 2 3 115VAC Motor Thermal Input 2 3 24VDC Motor Thermal Input 2 3 24VDC Motor Thermal Input 12 1 2 24 Reset Input Ji2 1 2 115VAC Reset Input 12 1 2 115VAC Reset Input 2 3 115VAC Reset Input 2 3 24VDC Reset Input 2 3 24VDC Reset Input 3 Verify Encoder supply voltage and output voltage return to the drive If an encoder is used the drive can provide 12VDC 500 mA to power the encoder If a 5VDC supply is required it must be externally sourced Jumpers J8 through J10 on the Main Control Board must be set for the appropriate output voltage of the encoder which is fed back to the drive Check the encoder documentation to determine which voltage is to be used See Table 6 J for jumper settings Table 6 J Main Control Board
267. ocity reference input to the Velocity Control Velocity Feedback Select The drive has been designed for normal operation using one of three possible means of velocity feedback Hardware for interfacing the drive to a digital encoder is provided as standard in the drive Armature voltage is constantly monitored by the drive and can be used for velocity feedback If a DC tachometer is used for speed feedback the drive must be equipped with a Discrete Adapter Board connected to Port A of the Microbus IMPORTANT An external voltage divider for the DC Tach will be needed to obtain the correct voltage for the Discrete Adapter Board analog input circuit Refer to Chapter 6 for details Feedback in the form of an analog signal from the DC tach is sent to the Discrete Board converted to a digital signal and scaled for input to the Velocity Feedback Select block The Velocity Feedback Select block uses information stored in a drive setup parameter to determine which of the feedback signals is to be sent to the Velocity Control Chapter 5 Functional Description Velocity Control The Velocity Control compares the velocity reference to the velocity feedback to determine the velocity error Torque Reference Select The 1395 can operate as either a speed regulated or a torque regulated drive and therefore has the capability to accept either a velocity reference or a torque reference input In addition the Torque Reference Select block allows
268. of communicating over serial communications links The Multi Communication Adapter is not preconfigured Refer to the Multi Communication Board Software Hardware Reference Manual for hardware and integration information Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC ControlNet Adapter Board 2 18 The CNA board provides a sophisticated interface to Allen Bradley PLC controllers and other equipment capable of communicating over ControlNet This adapter has the following features e One ControlNet channel with a redundant connector to allow for backup connection in case one cable fails e Compatible with all Allen Bradley PLCs and other products that support Programmable Controller Communication Commands e Compatible with Allen Bradley 1395 Drives equipped with Version 8 10 or greater software Introduction Terminology Hardware Overview Chapter Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC 111 345 A Series A Chapter 3 contains both a general description of the major hardware components of the Series A 1395 drive and background information to support the procedures detailed in other chapters of this manual You should use this chapter in conjunction with the Installation chapter when installing 40 100HP 230VAC and 75 200HP 460VAC Series A Drives A brief description of new terms and concepts covered in Chapter 3 is presented here Adapter Board
269. ol S et Up 673 2A1H KP Flux 4096 0 32767 EE Field Weak Control S et Up 674 2A2H Fld Economy Ref 50 0 100 EE Field Flux Control SetUp 675 2A3H Fld Economy Ref Sec 30 0 6553 5 EE Field Flux Control S et Up 676 2A4H Fld Flux Ref 100 0 0244 125 EE Field Flux Control S et Up 677 2A5H Fid 0 8 Flux 0 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 678 2A6H Fid 1 8 Flux 6 6 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 679 2A7H Fid 2 8 Flux 96 14 3 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 680 2A8H Fid 3 8 Flux 23 1 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 681 2A9H Fid 4 8 Flux 33 3 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 682 2AAH Fid 5 8 Flux 45 5 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 683 2ABH Fid 6 8 Flux 96 60 0 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 684 2ACH Fid 7 8 Flux 71 1 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 685 2ADH Fld 9 1 0Flux RPM 100 0 100 EE Field Flux Control Autotune 686 2AEH Fld Weaken Spd RPM B S B S 8 6xB S EE X Field Weak Control 687 2AFH Reg Preload 0 799 9 199 9 Field Flux Control 688 2B0H Tach Switch Tol RPM 10 B S 0 B S EE Loss Recovery Set Up 689 2B1H Tach Switch Ki 50 0 65535 EE Loss Recovery Set Up 690 2B2H Tach Switch Kp 10 0 65535 EE Tach Loss Recovery Set Up 691 2B3H Tach Switch S elect 0 0 1 EE Loss Recovery Set Up 692 2B4H Kn Filter 512 32767 32767 EE Set Up 693 2B5H Wn Filter 300 1 500 EE SetUp 698 2BAH Auto Tune Lim RPM 25 0244 100 EE Auto Tuning Setup Auto
270. on Volatile Memory Definition 7 2 O Objectives of this Manual 1 1 Options 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 14 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 18 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 19 for this Drive 1 2 Specifications 1 5 Output Current 1 4 Data Rate 5 25 Horsepower 1 4 Voltage 1 4 Waveform 1 4 Overload Pending Level 720 7 62 P Parameter Alphabetical Listing 9 10 Definition 5 1 7 2 8 2 Indirect 5 9 Internal Configuration 9 8 Linking Source to Sink 5 10 Sink 5 6 Source 5 9 Trend Buffer 9 8 Trend Value 9 8 Parameter Entry Definition 7 2 Parameter Programming Procedures Basic Parameters 8 9 Start Up 8 8 Parameter Table 7 3 Definition 5 2 7 2 Parameter Table Storage 7 4 Parameter Value List 9 4 Parameters 1395 Version Number 780 7 70 920 to 927 7 77 930 to 937 7 77 940 to 947 7 77 Absolute Overspeed 724 7 63 AC Line Tolerance Delay 728 7 64 AC Line Voltage 116 7 22 Accel Time 651 7 45 Armature Bridge Type 733 7 65 Armature Current Feedback 112 7 22 Armature Current Firing Angle 114 7 22 Armature Current PI Output 113 7 22 Armature Current Reference 111 7 21 Armature Resistance 614 7 35 Armature Voltage Feedback 105 7 20 Armature Voltage Offset Calibration 746 7 70 At Speed 1 704 7 58 At Speed 2 705 7 59 At Speed 3 706 7 59 At Speed 4 707 7 59 At Speed 5 708 7 60 Auto Tune Current Limit 698 7 56 Auto Tune Speed 699 7 57 Base Moto
271. on from external control devices These parameters are called Sinks Figure 5 2 illustrates some of the Sink parameters used for input to the control logic Refer to Table 5 A for a listing of Sink parameters Chapter 5 Functional Description Figure 5 2 Source and Sink Parameters Partial Programming Terminal Programming Interface Terminal Sources 200 204 i P Programming Terminal Sinks 250 254 J Port A Port A Interface Sources 400 409 000 H N Port A Sinks 450 459 Port B Port B Interface Sources 300 309 20000000 Sinks 350 359 J 1395 Drive Control Logic Sinks ji Logic 1 Logic Cmd 2 Logic Cmd 3 Velocity Ref Whole aD U Tach Velocity C Torque Reference Sources Logic Status Drive Fault Velocity Feedback Arm Current Fdbk 5 7 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 8 Table 5 A Control Sink Parameters Number 150 151 152 153 154 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 Name Logic Cmd 1 Logic Cmd 2 Logic Cmd 3 Vel Ref Fraction Vel Ref Whole Tach Velocity Torque Reference Flux Feed Fwd CEMF Reference Process Trim Ref Proc Trim Fdbk Vel Indirect 1 Vel Indirect 2 Vel Indirect 3 Vel Indirect 4 Function First 16 Bit Logic Command Word Second 16 Bit Logic Command Word Third 16 Bit Logic Com
272. on is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 12 5 armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 679 Field Current at 2 8 Flux Fld I 2 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 14 396 Description This is the third entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 25 armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current Parameter 680 Field Current at 3 8 Flux Fld I 3 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 23 196 Description This is the fourth entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to prod
273. on of a resistor and capacitor Snubber connected in parallel with the two SCRs The field SCRs do not have parallel snubbers but have them on the input and output of the field bridge All snubbers are contained on the Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards and therefore are not shown on the bridge schematics Bridge Output Connections The output of the field bridge is connected to TB7 1 and 3 which in turn is connected to the field leads of the motor The terminal labeled F on TB2 is connected to the F1 lead of the motor and terminal F to the F2 lead 4 5 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Figure 4 4 Field Bridge Components pee pee 1 User Supplied Fuses rrr 1 TE TE FCT 5 turns Externally Mounted Devices Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A5 TB 1 Feedback Board A1 4 6 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600HP 460VAC Control Boards Feedback Board The primary function of the board is to provide scaling and transfer of feedback signals coming from power bridge devices being sent to the Power Stage Interface and eventually to the Main Control Board Figure 4 5 Feedback Board A1 Overview From DC 3 Phase Incom Current 20 VAC AC Current Field Current ing AC Line From Heatsink DC Armature Volt Feedback from Feedback from Feedback from voltage Feed Fan Switch age Feedback Sensor
274. ons 1 5 Field Bridge Components 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 125 300 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 6 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 5 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 6 Field Connections 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 6 Field Control 1 4 Field Current 1 4 Jumper Settings 6 19 Field Current at 0 8 Flux 677 7 51 Field Current at 1 0 Flux 685 7 54 Field Current at 1 8 Flux 678 7 51 Field Current at 2 8 Flux 679 7 52 Field Current at 3 8 Flux 680 7 52 Field Current at 4 8 Flux 681 7 52 Field Current at 5 8 Flux 682 7 53 Field Current at 6 8 Flux 683 7 53 Field Current at 7 8 Flux 684 7 53 Field Current Feedback 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 5 Field Current Feedback 118 7 23 Field Current Range Jumper Selections 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 9 Field Current Reference 117 7 22 Field Economy 1 4 Field Economy Delay 675 7 50 Field Economy Reference 674 7 50 Field Failure Delay 730 7 65 Field Fault Threshold 729 7 64 Field Flux Control 5 30 Block Diagram 5 36 Definition 5 5 Field Flux Reference 676 7 51 Field Flux Tune 5 14 5 18 Field PI Control 5 31 Block Diagram 5 37 Field Pulse Transformer 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 12 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 12 Field Puls
275. onstant 905 Constants are available to each buffer Bit Trend Constant 906 Constants are available to each buffer Bit Trend Constant 907 Constants are available to each buffer Unsigned Trend Constant 908 Constants are available to each buffer Unsigned Trend Constant 909 Constants are available to each buffer Trend X Operand X Parm 910 920 930 940 Trend X Operand Y Parm 911 921 931 941 Trend X Operator 912 922 932 942 Trend X sample rate 913 923 933 943 Trend X post samples 914 924 934 944 Trend X continuous trigger 915 925 935 945 Trend X enable 916 926 936 946 Trend X output rate 917 927 937 947 Chapter 9 Pages 9 8 and 9 9 contain a worksheet for each buffer These worksheets will assist you in programming each buffer and can also act as installed documentation Shown below is a sample of this worksheet TREND BUFFER 1 Trend Buffer 1 is linked to parameter The output of Trend Buffer 1 is linked to parameter Parm Parameter Parm Description Num Range Value Trend 1 Operand Parameter X 910 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y 911 Sample Rat Trend 1 Post Samples 2 Trend 1 Multiple Trigger 915 See Start Up Checklist in Chapter 9 Trend 1 Enable 916 See Start Up Checklist in Chapter 9 Trend 1 Output Rate 917 See Start Up Checklist in Chapter 9 5 20 Programming a Trend Buffer Chapter 5 Functional Description Determining What to Trend The first step to programming a Trend Buffer is to determ
276. ontains four discrete inputs for either 120VAC signals or 24VDC signals These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches etc The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals STOP JOG START CLEAR FAULT Digital Outputs Two discrete outputs are provided through control of two on board relays The contact rating is 0 6A at 125VAC and 0 2A at 30VDC These outputs allow the 1395 to signal various operating states of the Drive The outputs are preconfigured for the following signals DRIVE RUNNING AT ZERO SPEED Analog Inputs Four preprogrammed 12 bit analog to digital inputs These inputs allow 10VDC analog signal to be converted to a 2048 digital signal thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the converted signal can be extended to 32767 The analog inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY TRIM REFERENCE Analog Outputs Four preprogrammed 11 bit digital to analog outputs These outputs allow a 1024 drive signal to be converted to a 10VDC analog analog output thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The analog outputs are preconfigured for the followi
277. ontrol Firmware e Figure 2 8 Analog signal interface Develop gate firing signals sent to the PSI Switcher Board Main Control Board Hardware Location 4 p PI Connection to Power Connection to 5 To Power Stage Interface Board Programming Terminal Stage Interface Board TP2 TP5 TP13 T TP20 1 2 3 pays o J10 OOO 21 Connection o TP24 9 To 1 2 3 Encoder O J9 voltage TP25 TP32 Selection o TP27 TP26 a o 123 TP33 Lj TP355 o O JB o o TP31TP29 J1 9 79 5V 12V J13 TP17 TP8 TP39 o 5 Tee 2 3 4 TP38 TP30 9 e TP19 J12 o Tee 2 CP TP10 3 4 TP43 TPA 9 o o mpi TP20 o 50 VP TP45 TP47 44 46 UMC8 TP20 49 SP TP58 o 1 o J14 210 tesa O 58 1SO 12V IGND 15 45 TP51 TP52 TP56TP55 TP57 123 o o o o o 5V DGND 12V 12V AGND O O 0jJ15 Port A Port B To Adapter Board To Adapter Board J7 D J gt 4 AB0665A Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Power Distribution 115VAC Control Voltage Figure 2 9 illustrates the distribution of 115VAC control voltage within the Bulletin 1395 Single phase 115VAC control voltage provided from
278. onverts 115VAC supplied as shown in Figure 3 13 to 5VDC and the 12VDC control voltages In addition to the voltages supplied by the Unit Power Supply the Power Stage Interface converts the 20VAC coming from the control transformer 1 PT to 24VDC which is used for relay logic including the ECoast Pilot Relay and Fault No Fault Logic It also provides the supply voltage to the SCR Pulse Transformer and Snubber boards to produce SCR gate signals for the armature and field Control Common Control Common in the Bulletin 1395 is connected to signal ground TB2 6 Refer to Chapter 6 for installation detail Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 13 DC Power Distribution and Control Common TP22 5VDC ga 5VDC TP52 O 12VDC Va TP56 12VDC A O A6 UNIT POWER SUPPLY TP4 12VDC A7 POWER STAGE INTERFACE Port B8 MAIN CONTROL BOARD PT 14 T FEEDBACK VAC TB2 Encoder 13 Common ISO Power 12VDC ISO Supply 12VDC TB4 TE O P Common ISO Programming Terminal 12VDC ISO TX RX 0677 3 16 Relay Logic Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 15 200 HP 460VAC Main Contactor M1 Control Figure 3 14 illustrates the hardware associated with the control of the coil voltage applied to the Main DC contactor M1 The coil voltage originates at an
279. op Bit 11 A 1 bit field specifying the drive to decelerate the motor to zero velocity and when at zero velocity open the contactor The normal stop bits in both Logic Command 1 2 and 3 are active regardless of the state of the command enable bit in Logic Command 1 or 3 Normal Stop will override the Start function Important Refer to Chapter 6 Installation for important information and warnings regarding stop mode interfaces with the 1395 Start Bit 12 A I bit field specifying the drive to close the contactor and run the motor at the speed specified in the reference select A B or C in the logic command bits 0 1 2 This bit will be treated as a maintained signal if the Maintained Start Parameter 624 is set to 1 For a maintained Start the motor will stop should this bit be cleared If maintained Start is not selected Parameter 624 0 this bit will be latched by the Drive and a Stop input will be required to stop the motor Close Contactor Bit 13 A 1 bit field when set to 1 closes the motor contactor When set to 0 opens the contactor On the rise of this input the contactor will be manually closed The contactor will remain closed until this bit is set to 0 or a hard fault soft fault or ECOAST request occurs Clear Fault Bit 14 A 1 bit field that will clear all warning and most soft faults present in the Drive when set to 1 When set to 0 the clear faults is inactive Hard faults except Communication Faul
280. or speed Description This parameter is associated with the torque taper function Torque Tapering will begin when motor speed exceeds this speed Parameter 666 End Taper Speed End Taper Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value Base Motor Speed 4096 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base motor speed Description This parameter is associated with the Torque Taper function Minimum Taper Current will be used as the upper limit for armature current reference when speed exceeds this speed 7 48 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 667 Minimum Tapered Current Min Taper Cur Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated motor current Programming Terminal units percent of rated motor current Minimum Value 0 024 Maximum Value 260 Default Value 100 Description This is the armature current limit value that will be used for motor speeds above the End Taper Speed value The final armature current reference value will be limited to a number less than or equal to this number Parameter 668 DI DT Limit dI dT Limit Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated motor current Programming Terminal units percent of rated motor current Minimum Value 0 024 Maximum Value 260 Default Value 25 0 Description This parameter specifies the largest change in armature current reference that will be allowed per 4 0 msec sample A value of 100 indi
281. ough PM6 non regenerative construction has 3 SCR blocks PM1 PM3 and PMS Refer to Figure 2 3 Pulse Transformers Pulse Transformers on the Power Board provide the gate firing pulses and voltage isolation for the armature SCRs Voltage Transient Protection RC networks contained on the Power Board are used to protect the SCRs against voltage transients dv dt DC Bus Snubbers DC Bus Snubbers are used on 3 6 19 A units only DC Current Sensing DC overcurrent sensing is provided using DC transducer TDI Figure 2 3 Armature Bridge Components OUTPUTS L2 L3 TD 1 To PSI Switcher DC Contactor Output of armature bridge is connected to the DC motor through the main DC contactor M1 Fig 2 3 Coil voltage to M1 is controlled by contacts from the pilot relay K3 on PSI Switcher board and external 115 VAC control input entering at TB2 2 and 3 Bridge Output Connections Bridge output connections labeled A1 and A2 Fig 2 3 correspond to the NEMA standards for connection to the AT and A2 leads of the DC motor If dynamic braking is used the dynamic braking resistor bank is connected to terminals DB1 and DB2 Field Bridge Components See Figures 6 8 and 6 11 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC A general description of the components in the field bridge Fig 2 4 and their operation is covered
282. ould be OVAC With the contact open the voltage should be 115VAC If a 24VDC Reset circuit is used measure the voltage from TB3 1 to 3 with the reset contact open and closed With the contact closed the voltage should be 24VDC With the contact open the voltage should be OVDC If a 115VAC Reset circuit is used measure the voltage from TB3 1 to 3 with the reset contact open and closed With the contact closed the voltage should be 115 VAC With the contact open the voltage should be All drives are shipped preconfigured Before making any changes review Chapters 5 and 6 Parameter values are changed using the Parameter mode in the Drive Programming Terminal Before beginning any changes become thoroughly familiar with the Programming Terminal and its manual To match the Drive control to a specific application several setup parameters must be scaled for feedback and other applications A description of each of these parameters is provided in Chapter 7 of this manual Some of the information previously recorded in Table 8 A will be required for proper scaling of parameters Units of measure for all parameters listed in this section are in terms of Programming Terminal units Before starting this procedure make certain that the ECOAST input is locked in the open state The DC contactor must remain open while the following parameter setup is being performed Parameter Explanations Basic Parameters Tailo
283. parameters for the external control device being used to control the drive for the specific application Refer to the appropriate adapter board Instruction Manual for a description of how to use the adapter board and how to interface the adapter board to the drive to command various drive functions Once the drive has been fully tuned and configured 1 Record the values of all parameters in the Parameter Table located in Chapter 9 2 Use the EEPROM mode in the Programming Terminal to save all parameters in EEPROM Introduction Configuration Parameter List Param 1 2 3 4 10 11 12 13 14 50 51 52 53 100 101 102 103 This chapter contains reference materials intended to provide additional Reference Materials information pertaining to the 1395 such as Record all configuration and linking as finalized during start up in the e Configuration Parameter lists Start up Parameter Tables e alphabetical listing of all parameters Glossary following tables Table 9 A Fast Source Parameters Configuration and Linking Description TREND 1 OUTPUT TREND 2 OUTPUT TREND 3 OUTPUT TREND 4 OUTPUT SP OUTPUT SP OUTPUT SP OUTPUT SP OUTPU SP OUTPUT TREND 11 TREND 21 TREND 3 INPUT TREND 41 LOGIC ST T 0 FAULT FIELD 0 T 1 FAULT FIELD 1 T 2 ACTIVE LOGIC COMMAND 0 T 3 ACTIVE LOGIC COMMAND 1 4 0 1 PU
284. power supply to produce 5VDC and 12VDC control voltage All current related feedback scaling circuitry Customer basic interface for 115 VAC Field Current Range jumpers Jumper selection for 24VDC or 115VAC for reset motor thermal and ECOAST Figure 2 7 PSI Switcher Board Hardware Location 2F 4F FLD1 6R 15 15 115 COM T2 3 TE PE 0000000000000 FAN1 FAN2 TB2 Customer Interface 115 VAC Control Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Table 2 A PSI Switcher Board Jumper Settings Jumper Function Position 1 2 Position 2 3 J11 MotorTemp 24VDC 120VAC J12 24VDC 120VAC Table 2 B Field Current Range Jumper Selections see Table 8 J J1 1 30HP 240VDC 2 60HP 500VDC Jumper Position Field Current Range 1 4 5 10 6A 2 2 0 4 6A 3 0 5 2 1A 4 0 15 6 Note See Table 8 for additional high horsepower settings 2 9 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Main Control Board Main Control Board IMPORTANT Do not install jumpers on 12 113 15 2 10 zem The Main Control Board Figure 2 8 performs all control functions of the 1395 drive Hardware located on the board is used to support operation of the microprocessor firmware The primary functions performed include e Microbus interface e C
285. programmed in 914 are gathered the trend will halt Continuous Trend 1 Once the trigger condition is true and the number of samples after the trigger is taken as programmed in 914 are gathered the trend will continue looking for the next occurrence when the trigger condition is true 7 76 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 916 Trend 1 Enable Trend Tr 1 Enable Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Description This parameter is a switch that enables activates or disables de activates the trend The choices are Disable 0 Immediately terminates the trend if it is activated Enable 1 Starts the trend provided a link has been established with the corresponding Trend 1 Input source fast parameter Otherwise the trend is automatically disabled Parameter 917 Trend 1 Output Transmit Rate Tr 1 Output Rate Internal units 1 0 001 secs Programming Terminal units Secs Minimum Value 0 004 Maximum Value 30 0 Default Value 0 040 Description This parameter specifies the rate at which ordered sampled data indicating the trend has triggered and taken post samples is copied to the Trend Fast source parameter and subsequently transferred to the configured fast sink parameter number It is programmable in 4 ms increments All values are rounded down to the nearest 4ms Parameters 920 to 927 are identical to Parameters 910 to 917 fo
286. provides you with a list of user manuals for 1395 and 2361 drives and their current status If a firmware version or date is not shown with a publication it indicates that the publication is the current version which will be updated until the firmware version changes Bulletin 1395 HKVA Drives Early Design 230 Volt AC Input 400 600 HP 1350 2250 AMP For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 1395 5 70 for catalog number explanation 460 Volt AC Input 700 1250 HP 1350 2250 For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 1395 5 70 for catalog number explanation 660 Volt AC Input 900 2000 HP 1350 2250 AMP For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 1395 5 70 for catalog number explanation Bulletin 2361 HKVA Motor Control Center MCC Drives Later Design 460 Volt AC Input 700 1750 HP 1250 AMP For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 2361 5 01 for catalog number explanation 575 Volt AC Input 750 2250 HP 1650 AMP For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 2361 5 01 for catalog number explanation 660 Volt AC Input 750 2500 HP 3000 AMP For 1395 drives in this horsepower range refer to publication 2361 5 01 for catalog number explanation Important These drives are commonly referred to as HIGH KVA HKVA in this and other publications Chapter 1 Introduction Inspec
287. ps Wound Type Frame TACHOMETER ENCODER NAMEPLATE DATA Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Type Rated Supply Voltage encoder only Rated Output Voltage Encoder 7 Volts square wave Encoder Pulse per Revolution PPR DC Tach Voltsat 2 RPM 8 4 Voltage Measurement Chapter 8 Start Up 1 Before applying power to the Drive ensure that the ECOAST input to TB3 4 and 5 is locked in the open state The DC contactor must remain in the open state while the following measurements are being made 2 Apply the main power source to the drive 3 Record the following AC voltage measurements in Tables 8 E 8 G e Three phase source voltages L1 to L2 L2 to L3 and L3 to L1 The three phase voltage should be equal to the rated drive AC input voltage on the drive nameplate 10 If the voltage is not within tolerance verify that the drive rating is correct for the application If the drive rating is correct change the incoming line voltage so that it complies with the Drive rating Field AC input voltage measurements are per Table 8 B The voltage should be equal to the rated drive AC field voltage input on the drive nameplate 10 If the voltage is not within tolerance determine whether a field transformer is required and has been used Table 8 B Field AC Voltage Measurements Horsepower Drive Voltage Field AC Input Measurement 1 30 1 1102 2 60 1 11 02 40 100 1 1105 75 200
288. ption This word is used to enable options for field weakening and field economy Bit 0 Field Economy Enable When Field Economy is selected the field economy reference param 674 specifies the field command param 115 when the motor has been stopped for the time specified in the field economy delay param 675 Bit 1 Field Weakening Enable When field weaken enable is selected the field flux command will be supplied by the field weakening control software This also enables the CEMF regulator output as a trim for the field flux command Bit 2 External Feed Forward Enable When the External Flux Feed Forward option is selected the flux feed forward value Parameter 159 is used as the basis for determining the field flux command Parameter 115 The field weaken enable bit must also be on for this option to be effective Bit 3 Counter EMF Control Enable When external CEMF Reference is selected the field flux command Parameter 115 is determined by the sum of the external CEMF reference value Parameter 160 divided by the absolute value of velocity feedback Parameter 106 and the Flux Trim Parameter 121 which is the output of CEMF PI Control The input to the CEMF PI Control is the flux error This is the difference between the CEMF Reference Parameter 160 and the CEMF Feedback divided by the absolute value of Velocity Feedback Parameter 106 The division by velocity is done in order to keep the application dependent g
289. que Mode Parameter 625 Torque Mode is a number coded parameter which allows operation under several different torque modes There are two possible reference inputs to choose from The output of the Velocity PI Control which has been converted to a torque reference is used as an internal torque reference If the drive is a stand alone drive or considered the Master drive of a system this reference could be used The external Torque Reference Parameter 157 is used to supply an external torque reference for the drive This could be used if the drive was a slave drive in a system This parameter can also be modified by summing the Process Trim Output when the Process Trim Select Parameter 628 selects the torque reference to trim The external torque reference is also used when either the Min or Max torque modes are selected These functions automatically make a selection between the external torque reference value and the output of the Velocity PI Control Torque Command Parameter 110 indicates the latest torque reference value This value is converted to an armature current reference by dividing by the motor Field Flux Command to be used in the Current PI Control The value is also used as an input to the Droop Control Feedback Control Circle 14 Two current transformers CT s sense armature current flow The current feedback is scaled using Motor Armature Full Load Amps Parameter 611 and Rated Armature Bridge Curre
290. r Trend Buffer 2 Parameters 930 to 937 are identical to Parameters 910 to 917 for Trend Buffer 3 Parameters 940 to 947 are identical to Parameters 910 to 917 for Trend Buffer 4 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters This Page Intentionally Left Blank 7 78 Introduction Chapter Start Up This chapter is a detailed step by step procedure for the proper start up and tuning of the 1395 drive Among the procedures to be performed in this chapter are the following Basic drive tuning procedures Verification of proper supply voltages Calibrate drive set up parameters Configure drive I O The Start Up checklist must be used to record all data WARNING Servicing energized industrial control equipment can be hazardous Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock burn or unintended actuation of controlled equipment Hazardous voltages may exist in the cabinet even with the circuit breaker in the off position Recommended practice is to discon nect and lock out control equipment from power sources and dis charge stored energy in capacitors if present If it is necessary to work in the vicinity of energized equipment the Safety Related Practices of NFPA 70E ELECTRICAL SAFETY FOR EMPLOYEE WORKPLACES must be followed DO NOT work alone on energized equipment WARNING Potentially fatal voltages may result from improper usage of an oscilloscope and other test equipment The oscillo scope chassis m
291. r Speed 606 7 33 Bridge Switch Delay 744 7 69 CEMF Feedback 120 7 23 CEMF Reference 160 7 31 CEMF Reg Preload 687 7 54 Contactor Type 622 7 37 Current Damping Factor 743 7 68 Decel Time 652 7 46 Desired Contour 653 7 46 Desired Current Loop Bandwidth 741 7 68 DI DT Limit 668 7 49 Drive Fault 101 7 18 Droop Filter Gain 658 7 47 Droop Percent 657 7 46 Encoder PPR 609 7 33 Encoder Velocity 122 7 24 End Taper Speed 666 7 48 External Overtemperature Delay 725 7 63 Fault Report 630 7 41 Fault Select 623 7 37 Feedback Device Type 621 7 36 Field Current at 0 8 Flux 677 7 51 Field Current at 1 0 Flux 685 7 54 Field Current at 1 8 Flux 678 7 51 Field Current at 2 8 Flux 679 7 52 Field Current at 3 8 Flux 680 7 52 Field Current at 4 8 Flux 681 7 52 Field Current at 5 8 Flux 682 7 53 Field Current at 6 8 Flux 683 7 53 Field Current at 7 8 Flux 684 7 53 Field Current Feedback 118 7 23 Field Current Reference 117 7 22 Field Economy Delay 675 7 50 Field Economy Reference 674 7 50 Field Failure Delay 730 7 65 Field Fault Threshold 729 7 64 Field Flux Reference 676 7 51 Field Weakened Speed 686 7 54 Final Velocity Reference 104 7 20 Flux Command 115 7 22 Flux Feed Forward 159 7 30 Flux Mode Select 627 7 39 Flux Trim 121 7 23 Forward Bridge Current Limit 663 7 48 Forward Speed Limit 608 7 33 Jog 1 Speed 638 7 42 Jog 2 Speed 639 7 43 Jog D
292. r the motor to the drive Set Up Parameters Used for calibration scaling and special functions Speed Reference Parameters Define the source for the drive speed command Input Parameters Accept information from sources outside the drive Adapter Board Parameters Define the signals for the specific applications Chapter 8 Start Up Table 8 H Basic Parameters 606 Base Motor Speed Motor Nameplate 607 608 609 610 611 Motor Nameplate 612 615 616 617 621 629 651 652 663 664 686 733 739 740 744 Bridge Switch Delay Table 8 K A 8 9 Chapter 8 Start Up Line Armature Current Burden Resistors Table 8 1 Rated Arm Brdg Current I Parm 615 Also refer to Publication 1395 5 70 Chapter 6 and 2361 5 01 Chapters 2 3 and 4 Line Cur Burden Resistor Arm Cur Burden Resistor Ser B TB1 TB3 Ser A TB2 TB3 Ser B MKVA TB2 TB3 HKVA TB2 TB3 Ser A Current HP 230VAC HP 460VAC Rated Armature Bridge Current P615 Rated Drives Cat HP Cat HP Part OHMS AMPS Part OHMS No No 3 6 5 108102 50 5 118885 205 6 0 10 118873 11 8 10 107940 45 9 6 0 10 118873 11 8 10 107940 45 9 11 19 100565 5 20 100569 20 11 19 100565 5 20 100569 20 20 40 118878 25 2 40 112905 80 20 40 118878 25 2 40 112905 80 40 56A 107931 13 8 56 107940 45 9 40 56A 107931 13 8 56 107940 45 9 57 80A 118871 8 3 80 107937 28 81 110A 118881 63 1 110 107934 18 3 24708 212 13 5 6 110 107934 18 3 24708 212 13
293. r the transfer of data between microprocessors The Microbus is used on the Main Control Board to transfer data between devices on the board Additionally hardware on the Main Control Board allows data transfer between the microprocessor on the Main Control Board and external devices through the two Microbus Ports Information coming from external devices must be changed first to the format required by the Microbus before being input to the Microbus Port The processing of data is accomplished through the use of the following adapter boards Figure 4 15 Construction and Location of Adapter Boards 0655 Adapter Boards 4 19 Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Discrete Adapter Board Digital Reference Adapter Board 4 20 The Discrete Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface All user connections to the board are made at Terminal Block TB 3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive Fig 4 15 Digital Inputs The Discrete Adapter Board contains four discrete inputs for either 120VAC signals or 24VDC signals These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches
294. r to Configure the parameters of the drive Interface the drive with peripheral devices such as an Allen Bradley PLC discrete operators I O and the Programming Terminal This chapter is not intended to be an all encompassing technical description of the 1395 drive Following is a brief description of new terms and concepts covered in Chapter 5 Configuration The process of linking Sink to Source parameters Fast Parameter Fast parameters are all parameters whose values are updated every 4msec and are used for the real time data input and output of the drive Fast parameters are backed up in volatile memory only Interface Hardware and associated software required to transfer information and or control signals from one device to another Microbus Hardware and associated software designed by Allen Bradley for the exchange of digital information at the microprocessor level The Microbus is used for the transfer of information between Adapter Boards and the Main Control Board Port Hardware located on the Main Control Board which allows for connection of one Adapter Board to the Microbus There are two ports on the Main Control Board Parameter Memory location used to store drive data Each parameter is given a number called the parameter number The parameter value may be specified in decimal or hexadecimal When specified in hexadecimal the word will appear after the parameter value 5 1 Chapter 5 Fu
295. rameter 627 When the reset bit is set high the integral term and output of the CEMF regulator will be set to the value in this parameter This parameter is scaled so that 1 pu flux 4096 7 54 Only Available in Firmware Version 5 01 Available in Version 5 01 and Later Firmware Available in Version 5 01 and Later Firmware Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 688 Tach Switch Tolerance TACH SWITCH TOL Internal units 4096 base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value base speed Default Value 10 base speed Function Tach Loss Recovery Description 5 01 firmware only This parameter establishes the window for detection of tach loss when the Tach Loss Recovery feature is selected When the active feedback device encoder or tach deviates from the Armature Voltage derived feedback for more than 40 msec then a Tach Switchover will occur NOTE This parameter is NOT used with 6 01 and later revision firmware The combination of Parameter 731 and Parameter 732 took over this function Parameter 689 Tach Switch Ki TACH SWITCH Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 50 Function Tach Loss Recovery Description This parameter establishes the Ki gain that will be used in the Velocity Regulator following an automatic Tach Switchover to Armature Voltage Feedback Parameter 690 Tach Switch Kp TACH
296. rameter 716 controls the proportional gain The output of the PI Control is limited by adjustable high and low limits Process Trim Low Limit Parameter 717 specifies the low limit of the process trim trim output value Process Trim High Limit Parameter 718 specifies the high limit Immediately prior to the the limit test the output of the process trim regulator is scaled by a gain factor Process Trim Trim Output Gain Parameter 719 specifies the gain value to use Process Trim Preload Parameter 714 is used to preset the integral term prior to enabling of the process trim function Logic Command bit 15 activates the process trim function Process Trim Select Parameter 628 contains one of three selections for determining where the output of the process trim regulator will be applied Possible selections include trim velocity reference trim torque reference or no use of the process trim output If used to trim the velocity reference the output is summed with the velocity reference to produce Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 The sum will be limited by Parameter 721 Proc Trim Lo Sum and Parameter 722 Proc Trim Hi Sum If used to trim the torque reference the output is summed with External Torque Command Parameter 157 to produce an input to the Torque Select block 5 27 Chapter 5 Functional Description 5 28 Torque Select Circle 8 Selects the reference input to the Current Control based on the value of Tor
297. ramming Terminal TP2 TP5 o 2 Lm apii IE oo J10 15 gog Connection o 123 TP24 To TP23 Encoder Encoder O J9 Voltage TP32 Selection 44 o 128 J TPS O J8 J 5v 12V TP17 TP8 TP39 J12 Tee 2 3 4 TP42 o TP50 VP 45 46 SP Port A To Adapter Board J7 JS onnection To Power Stage Interface Board TP9 TP6 21 25 27 26 TP28 TP33 TP34 o o TP31TP29 o o J13 Tee 2 Bee 4 TP38 TP30 o o TP19 o CP TP10 TP43 TP4 9 20 47 44 UMC8 TP20 o TP49 o TP58 o 1 JO J14 2 O 1SO 12V IGND ISO 5V TP51TP52 56 55 57 123 o o o o 45V DGND 12V 12V AGND O O O J15 Port B To Adapter Board SE AB0662A 5 3 11 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 3 12 75 200 HP 460VAC Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board A2 A3 A4 The primary functions of the Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board Figure 3 9 include e Isolate power bridge circuitry from control circuitry Provide dv dt protection across SCRs There are 3 Armature Pulse Transformer and Snubber Boards Each board is associated with a single phase of the incoming AC line The board is physically mounted on the armature power bridge busbar
298. rdware Description 4 1 Hardware Overview 4 2 Hardware Overview Illustration 4 2 Cooling Airflow 6 5 Dimensions 6 2 6 3 6 4 Disconnect 6 5 Environment 6 1 Grounding Illustration 6 10 Grounding Practices Illustration 6 9 Grounding Procedures 6 8 Installation 6 1 Mounting 6 1 NEMA Type 12 Enclosures 6 5 Power Wiring 6 13 Power Wiring Procedure 6 14 Safety Ground Connections 6 11 Safety Signal Ground 6 11 System Grounding Procedures 6 12 Wire Size and Type 6 6 Wiring Clearance 6 5 Incoming Device 4 3 1395 Version Number 780 7 70 Interface 4 1 22 Line Choke 4 5 24VDC Connection Digital Input 6 31 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Main Contactor M1 Control 4 16 Main Control Board 4 10 Main Control Board Illustration 4 10 Main Control Relay 4 16 Microbus 4 1 Multi Communication Adapter Board 4 21 Node Adapter Board 4 21 Options 4 18 Peripheral Devices 4 13 Pilot Relay PR Control 4 16 Port 4 1 Power Distribution 4 14 Power Stage Interface A7 4 8 Power Stage Interface Illustration 4 9 Programming Terminal 4 1 Programming Terminal Illustration 4 18 Programming Terminal Interface 4 18 Relay Logic 4 16 Relay Logic Illustration 4 17 SCR Cell Fuses 4 5 SCR Cell Snubbers 4 4 SCR Modules 4 5 SCR Packaging 4 4 SCR Snubbers 4 5 Supply Voltage 4 5 Surge Suppression 4 4 4 5 Synchronization 4 3 Terminology 4 1 Unit Power Supply A6
299. re noise and overshoot as the current loop bandwidth is increased Typically the bandwidth should be set as high as possible so that the velocity loop performance is not limited by the current loop Parameter 742 Maximum Current Loop Bandwidth Cur Max BW Internal units None Programming Terminal units RAD Sec Minimum Value 40 Maximum Value 1000 Default Value 500 Description This parameter specifies the maximum achievable armature current loop bandwidth as calculated by the CP The maximum bandwidth as calculated by the CP The maximum bandwidth is a function of the current loop damping factor Parameter 743 and the AC line frequency The CP updates this Parameter during autotuning and whenever the user reads this parameter The maximum current loop bandwidth is not changeable by the user Parameter 743 Current Damping Factor Cur Damp Factor Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 8 Maximum Value 3 0 Default Value 1 0 Description This parameter along with Parameter 741 determines the dynamic behavior of the armature current loop The damping factor influences the amount of overshoot the current loop will exhibit during a transient The current will typically exhibit more overshoot and become oscillatory underdamped as the damping factor is reduced below one For a damping factor above one armature current loop should not exhibit much overshoot and have a slower rise time for a given cu
300. re voltage when the motor is running at base speed with rated field current Note This parameter WILL NOT limit motor voltage to the value entered Complete parameter set up Chapter 8 is required to prevent overvoltage conditions from occuring Parameter 611 Motor Armature Full Load Amp Motor Arm FLA Internal units Amps x 10 Programming Terminal units AMPS Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 2 Description Nameplate rated motor armature current Parameter 612 Rated Field Motor Current Rate Fld Mtr Cur Internal units Amps x 10 Programming Terminal units AMPS Minimum Value 0 1 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 1 Description Nameplate rated motor field current Parameter 613 Motor Inertia Motor Inertia Internal units seconds x 100 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 01 Maximum Value 10 00 Default Value 6 0 Description This parameter represents the time in seconds taken for the uncoupled motor to accelerate from zero speed to base speed with rated motor armature and field current applied 7 84 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 614 Armature Resistance Arm Resistance Internal units 4096 1000h 1 per unit 100 of rated armature voltage Programming Terminal units Percent of rated armature voltage Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 0 Default Value 5 0 Description This parameter represents the armature voltage drop IR
301. rnal units where 4096 100 rated field current Parameter 683 Field Current at 6 8 Flux Fld I 6 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 60 Description This is the seventh entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 75 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current Parameter 684 Field Current at 7 8 Flux Fld I 7 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 77 7 Description This is the eighth entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 87 5 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 685 Field Current at 1 0 Fl
302. rol Circle 6 is derived from Torque Command Parameter 110 along with Droop Percent Parameter 657 and Droop Gain Parameter 658 Ramp Velocity Reference Parameter 103 is the output of the Ramp and Contour function blocks The value contained in this parameter is conditionally offset by the Droop and Process Trim functions if used to become the Final Velocity Reference Parameter 104 The output of the Droop Control Circle 6 is derived from Torque Command Parameter 110 along with Droop Percent Parameter 657 and Droop Gain Parameter 658 The Process Trim Control Circle 4 allows either the speed reference or torque reference to be trimmed according to the process It contains its own PI Control block along with filters and limiting functions A selection block in logic controlled by Process Trim Select Parameter 628 sends the output to be summed with the input to the velocity loop or summed with External Torque Reference Parameter 157 to be used as a torque reference Velocity Feedback Control Circle 4 The 1395 allows different methods of motor speed feedback A digital encoder analog DC tachometer or armature voltage may be selected as feedback methods Feedback Device Type Parameter 621 selects the source for motor velocity feedback Velocity Filter Select Parameter 631 provides the option of using a filter and designating what type it will be The output of the Feedback Filter block provides the Velocity F
303. rotect the SCRs against voltage transients dv dt DC Current Sensing DC overcurrent sensing is provided using DC transducer TD1 Fig 3 3 Figure 3 3 Armature Bridge Components OUTPUT Optional To Pulse Transformer amp Snubber Board A2 3 4 To Pulse Transformer amp To Pulse Transformer amp To Feedback To Feedback Snubber Board A3 Snubber Board A4 Board Board 1 1 2 1 20 23 DC Contactor Output of the armature bridge is connected to the DC motor through the main DC contactor M1 Fig 3 3 Coil voltage to M1 is controlled by contacts from the pilot relay PR and external 115 VAC control input entering at TB2 3 Bridge Output Connections Bridge output connections labeled A1 and A2 Fig 3 3 correspond to the NEMA standards for connection to the AT and A2 leads of the DC motor If dynamic braking is used the dynamic braking resistor bank is connected to terminals DB1 and DB2 Field Bridge Components Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 HP 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC A general description of the components in the field bridge Fig 3 4 and their operation is covered here Supply Voltage In addition to being used for synchronization the three phase voltage from fuses F4 F5 and F6 is sent to TB1 where two of the three phases are routed to the input of the field supply power bridge labeled Field L1 and Field L3 on Figure 3 4 Field Current Feedback Current transformer FCT pro
304. rque reference comes from Parameters 157 Torque Reference A stop condition will initiate a coast stop 3 Minimum select of 1 and 2 Selecting this function will automatically connect this algebraic minimum of either the velocity regulator output or the external torque reference to the torque mode A stop condition will initiate a coast stop 4 Maximum select of 1 and 2 Selecting this function will automatically connect the algebraic maximum of either the velocity regulator output or the external torque reference to the torque mode A stop condition will initiate a coast stop 5 Load Response sum of 1 and 2 Selecting this function will automatically take the algebraic sum of the velocity regulator output and the external torque reference to the torque mode A stop condition will initiate a coast stop 7 38 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 626 Jog Ramp Enable Jog Ramp Enable Internal units None Programming Terminal units 0 1 selection Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 0 Description Parameter 626 selects the use of velocity reference ramp while jogging Choices are 0 No ramp when jogging on both start and stop 1 Use ramp when jogging on both start and stop Parameter 627 Flux Mode Select Flux Mode Select Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit adjustable field Minimum Value All Bits Off Maximum Value All Bits On Default Value Bit 0 On all others off Descri
305. rrent loop bandwidth 7 68 Added in Firmware Version 9 20 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 744 Bridge Switch Delay Internal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 75 Default Value 2 Description This parameter allows the user to set up a programmable delay which would begin after the drive s Zero Current Detector tells the drive to switch between bridges A load with higher than normal inductance could mean that an undesirable level of current still exists when the drive attempts to change bridges This is true for both forward to reverse and for a reverse to forward bridge change This delay would help to insure that the armature circuit current has additional time to reach zero before the bridge change occurs The units used for Parameter 744 will be a number n ranging from 0 to 75 Where n represents the number of time increments to delay the bridge change The length of these time increments will vary for 60Hz or 50Hz systems For a 60 Hz system Time delay in seconds 2 78 1073 1 1x10 where 2 78 ms is the conduction time 9 60Hz For a 50 Hz system Time delay in seconds n 3 30x105 1 1x10 3 where 3 33 ms is the conduction time 50Hz The 1 1 ms in the above formula is the standard time delay used for normal armature inductance As you can see in the above formula the number programmed into Parameter 744 is the integer number of conduction periods added to the normal 1 1ms delay
306. s the logic status word All five outputs are LED indicated for high input level visibility These outputs are preconfigured for the following signals ZERO SPEED DRIVE RUNNING READY AT CURRENT LIMIT AT SET SPEED Analog Inputs Two programmable analog inputs allow a 10 volt signal through a 12 bit A to D converter thus providing 4 88 millivolts per bit resolution The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY REFERENCE TACH VELOCITY Analog Outputs Two programmable analog outputs allow a 1024 Drive signal to be converted to a 10VDC analog output through a 12 bit digital to analog converter thus giving 9 76 millivolts per bit resolution Through programming of associated Scale and Offset parameters the effective range of the Drive signal can be extended to 32767 The digital Drive signal can be any of the 1395 run time parameters The outputs are preconfigured for the following signals VELOCITY FEEDBACK ARMATURE CURRENT FEEDBACK All user connections to the board are made at Terminal Block TB3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive All inputs and outputs have the flexibility of being reconfigured by the user for other signals For a more detailed description of the Digital Reference Adapter refer to the Digital Reference Adapter Manual The Node Adapter Board provides an interface between external devices and the Main Control Board of the Bulletin 1395 The board allows the 13
307. s AC line power This will de energize the shunt field causing a loss of the DB effect and the motor will coast to a stop Hazards to personnel may exist if the machine is allowed to coast to a stop A ATTENTION The user has the ultimate responsibility to determine which stopping method is best suited to the applica tion and will meet applicable standards for operator safety 6 21 Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 12 TB3 Terminal Descriptions Encoder EE TB3 ChannelA BENS Lf cama RT RENE Bm Supply Voltage N ENCAL Main Control Board ENCB1 ENCBI ENCPWR 12V 22 Supply Voltage ENCGND 12V 24V OUT O TRAN NES ov Board ED 5 424V ECOAST Closed When Drive Drive FLT Output is not Faulted 115V AC Common s nsvcowmonour COMMON OUT 115V ECOAST2 re AREE ae 1 O 24VDC or olo RESET IN Reset 115VAC Voltage COM ese MOTOR TEMP IN Source OT IN Motor Thermostat f no thermostat is used 115VAC or 24VDC must still be applied to TB3 terminal 2 O o If parameter 620 0 then the Reset input requires N O pushbutton as shown above Closing the pushbutton causes System Reset to occur This is the default value for the 1395 o o If parameter 620 1 then the Normal Stop input requires N C pushbutton as shown above Opening the pushbutton causes Normal Stop to occur NOTE
308. s operating and measures the motor armature circuit Current Loop Tune This feature uses the information determined by the current loop test to tune the drive current loop Velocity Loop Motor Test This feature calculates the motor inertia by running the motor under a controlled set of circumstances The motor must be disconnected from the load to run this test Velocity Loop System Test This feature calculates the system inertia by running the motor under a controlled set of circumstances The motor must be connected to the load to run this test Velocity Loop Tune This feature programs the drive velocity loop gains based on the information determined by the velocity loop motor and system tests Field Flux Tune This feature calibrates the drive field flux table to the actual motor field The motor must be capable of running to complete this procedure Due to the reduction of available torque it may be necessary to disconnect the load to run this procedure Current Loop Tuning Chapter 5 Functional Description As previously explained the current loop tuning function performs two separate functions First it checks the armature bridge of the drive to assure that it is functional Second it tests and tunes the current loop gains of the drive The current loop function can affect the following parameters Parameter No Description 734 K Discontinuous 735 KP Armature Loop 736 KI Armature Loop 741
309. s parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y Parameter 909 Trend Constant Unsigned Value Trend Unsign Val 1 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 65535 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies an unsigned constant value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y 7 74 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 910 Trend 1 Operand Parameter X Tr 1 Opnd X Param Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 947 Default Value 100 Description This parameter specifies the first of two parameter numbers for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter 911 Trend 1 Operand Parameter Y Tr 1 Opnd Y Param Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 947 Default Value 904 Description This parameter specifies the second of two parameter numbers used for the trend trigger evaluation The data value for the entered parameter number is used in the trigger evaluation Parameter 912 Trend 1 Operator Tr 1 Operator Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 1 Maximum Value 8 Default Value 5 Description This parameter specifies the operator used in Parameters
310. s recommended cable shielding Figure 6 4 Cable Shielding Recommendations 024 HP 2 Conductor a Shielded Cable shied H Shield Connection 3682 S 2 Conductor Shielded Cable HU 8271 Paver HHH Shield D A Les ema man Shield Multi Conductor Shielded Cable with Individual Shielded Pairs Chapter 6 Installation Table 6 B Cable and Wiring Recommendations Minimum Spacing in Inches between Classes Wiring Steel Conduit Tray Spacing Category Class Signal Definition Signal Examples Cable Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Notes Power 1 Power UOV orgreaten J3W AC perNEC amp loc Codes 0 29 35 one Woes 106 d 4 oc Power RegDCMotorField per NEC amp Local Codes Control 5 115VAC DC Logic Relay Logic PLC I O per NEC amp Local Codes Motor Thermostat 1 2 5 115VAC Power Power Supplies Instruments 6 24VACIDC Logic PLC 1 0 per NEC amp Local Codes Analog Signals Reference F eedback Shielded Cable Belden 2 3 4 5 Signal DC LEM 5 to 24VDC 8735 8737 8404 Process Digital speed low speed Digital 1 0 LN Counte Shielded Cable Belden high speed Pulse Tach 9728 9730 Serial RS 232 422 to Shielded Cable Belden Communication Terminals P rinters RS 232 8735 8737 Signal RS 422 9729 9730 Comm Serial Communication PLC Remote 1 0 Twinaxial Cable Belden greater than 20k baud
311. s set to 0 the torque command will be divided by flux to produce the armature current command Parameter 628 Process Trim Select Proc Trim Select Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 2 Default Value 0 Description This is a word of data containing one of three selections for applying the output of the process trim regulator Selections are 0 Do not use process trim output 1 Trim velocity reference 2 Trim torque reference 3 Trim Velocity with Ramp Stop Parameter 629 Motor Overload Select Mtr Overload Sel Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 4 Default Value 1 Description This parameter specifies a selection of motor overload characteristics 0 Overload function disabled 1 60 seconds to trip 150 armature current for externally cooled motors 2 60 seconds to trip 200 armature current for externally cooled motors 3 60 seconds to trip 150 armature current for self cooled motors 4 60 seconds to trip 200 armature current for self cooled motors Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 630 Fault Report Fault Report Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Description This parameter selects whether Velocity or Current Control fault status will be written to the FAULT WORD Parameter 101 0 Select Current
312. s used during the monitoring and post sampling periods to store data samples The second is used once a trend has finished sampling When a trigger condition occurs and all post samples have been taken the data is transferred to an output buffer At this time it is available for display by a programming terminal or for an output to an external device When directed to an external device the data sample output rate can be adjusted The range is 4ms to 30 seconds per data sample in 4ms increments A programmable output rate allows you to connect a wide variety of devices chart recorders or oscilliscopes for example to an analog channel or an adapter board and view the sampled data regardless of the speed of the device A positive spike followed immediately by a negative spike is also output to indicate the start of the data samples Data is continuously transmitted until the trend is restarted or if the Trend output configuration link is removed ATTENTION Doing an EE recall or initialize function will IN cause termination of any executing trends and of those trends contained in EEPROM An EEPROM store function has no effect on Trend execution The trend buffers can be programmed to provide an expanded number of data samples beyond the standard 100 samples This is accomplished by programming a second trend to trigger when the ENABLE parameter in the first trend is turned off The maximum number of samples that can be taken is 400
313. sections based on horsepower rating Included in each section is a listing of the renewal parts available In addition figures are provided to show the approximate component locations For part number and pricing information refer to the 1395 Renewal Parts publication 1395 6 0 NOTE Refer to publication 2361 5 01 for data on 1395 drives rated at or above 700HP 9 460VAC and 750HP 575VAC 660VAC 1 30HP 230VAC Reference 2 60HP 460VAC Number Description Quantity SERIES B 1 Digital Reference Adapter Board 1 2 Discrete Adapter Board 1 3 ain Control Board 1 4 ulti Communication Board 1 4A ControlNet Adapter Board 1 5 ode Adapter Board 1 6 PSI Switcher Board 1 7 Power Board 1 8 Snubber Board R esistor None or 1 9 Auxiliary Contact N O 1 10 Contactor 3 Pole w DB 1 11 Contactor 2 Pole 1 12 Contactor Coil 1 13 Contactor Suppressor SP 1 1 14 Fan None or 1 Fuses 15 250V 1 5AAGC F1 on PSI 1 16 250V 1A MDL F2 on PSI 1 17 250V 5A MDX F3 on PSI 1 18 600V 12A KTK R F1 amp F2 on Power Bd 2 19 600V 0 3A KTK R F1 on Snubber Bd 1 20 Fuses Line 3 21 Heatsink Thermoswitch 1 22 SCR Armature Non Regenerative 3 SCR Armature Regenerative 6 23 SCR Module Field 1 1 Refer to parts publication for model specific quantity information Chapter 10 Renewal Parts
314. shown in Figure 5 2 Table 5 B lists the Source parameters associated with the control logic There are additional sets of configuration links that cross the fast and slow parameter interface These are called indirect parameters The velocity processor has Parameters 600 through 603 that link to fast Parameters 163 through 166 The system processor has slow Parameters 840 through 844 that link to fast Parameters 10 through 14 Indirect Parameters These parameters allow data to be transferred between fast and slow parameters There are a total of nine indirect parameters four for the Velocity Processor and five for the System Processor The Velocity Processor parameters transfer a fast data value to a slow parameter value When a configuration link is made with a Velocity Processor indirect parameter Parameters 163 166 the real time data value is transferred to the parameter number specified in the corresponding Velocity select parameter Parameters 600 to 603 Therefore the real time data value is copied to a velocity processor setup parameter The System Processor indirect parameters transfer a slow data value to a fast source parameter When a configuration link is made with a system Processor indirect parameter Parameters 10 to 14 the data value programmed in the corresponding System select parameter Parameter 840 to 844 is transferred to the indirect parameter Therefore a constant real time value is established which
315. speed is then converted to Raw Adapter Units according to the following equation Base Speed Input x 2048 Raw Adapter Units 10 5 The Raw Adapter Units are then used to determine the correct scaling parameter value according to the equation below 4096 LL Scaling Parameter Value Raw Adapter Units 6 The Scaling Parameter Value should then be entered into the associated analog input scaling set up parameter This procedure will be correct to within 5 Verify that the scaling is correct by measuring the actual motor velocity with a hand tachometer Fine tune the scaling by adjusting the appropriate value to minimize any error 7 Any drift at zero speed can be minimized by adjusting the offset parameter associated with the channel in use Digital Input Figure 6 26 shows a typical digital input connection Figure 6 26 Typical 24VDC Digital Input Connections using External Power Supply TB3 24V DC Common DIGITAL COMMON 24V DC High dl DIGITAL IN 1 2 Jog DIGITAL IN 2 Start O DIGITAL IN 3 Clear Faults 1L DIGITAL IN 4 External to the Drive Chapter 6 Installation Analog Digital Output Figure 6 27 shows typical analog and digital output connections Figure 6 27 Typical Output Connections TB3 TB3 41 ARM CURRENT FDEK 0 to 10VDC External 24VDC 1mA Maximum Power Supply 42 ARM CURRENT FDBK IMPORTANT Connect shield to drive end only
316. t 8 10 Rated Field Bridge Current 8 11 Sequence Illustrated 8 3 Set Up Parameters 8 12 Speed Reference Parameters 8 13 Standard Control I O Checks 8 8 Tools Recommended 8 2 Tools Required 8 2 Velocity Loop Motor Test 8 20 Velocity Loop System Test 8 20 Velocity Loop Tuning 8 21 Voltage Measurement 8 5 Storing this Drive 1 3 Supply Voltage 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 5 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 5 Surge Suppression 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 2 5 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 4 4 5 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 3 5 Synchronization 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 3 1 13 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 3 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 3 System Grounding Procedures Illustration 6 12 System Inertia 703 7 58 System Reset 1 5 System Reset Select 620 7 36 T Tach Loss CEMF 731 7 65 Tach Loss Recovery 5 28 Tach Loss Velocity 732 7 65 Tach Switch Ki 689 7 55 Tach Switch Kp 690 7 55 Tach Switch Select 691 7 56 Tach Switch Tolerance 688 7 55 Tach Velocity 6 32 Tach Velocity 156 7 30 Tachometer Connections 6 8 TB3 Terminal Descriptions 6 22 Terminology 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 Torque Command 110 7 21 Torque Mode 625 7 38 Torque Reference 2 167 7 32 Torque Reference Select Definition 5 5 Torque Reference 157 7 30 Torque Select 5 28 Block Diagram 5 35
317. t Logic Cmd 1 Logic Cmd 2 Logic Cmd 3 Vel Ref Fraction Vel Ref Whole Tach Velocity Torque eference Flux Feed Forward CEMF Reference Process Trim R ef Process Trim Fdbk Vel Indirect 1 Vel Indirect 2 Ve Ve Torque Reference 2 DHT In Par 1 DHT In Par2 DHT In Par 3 DHT In Par 4 DHT In Par 5 DHT OutPar 1 DHTOut Par 2 DHT Out Par 3 DHT Out Par 4 DHT Out Par5 IN Par 1 PtB IN Par2 In Par 3 PtB In Par 4 PtB In Par5 In Par 6 In Par7 PtB In Par8 ndirect 3 ndirect 4 Table 7 A Cont UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE RPM RPM RPM FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT Software Test Point Software Test Point Software Test Point Logic Control Input Logic Control Input Logic Control Input Velocity Ref Control Input Velocity Ref Control Input Velocity Fdbk Control Input Torque Select Field Flux Control Field Flux Control Process Trim Control Input Process Trim Control Input FastSink Pointer in 600 FastSink Pointer in 601 FastSink Pointer in 602 FastSink Pointer in 603 Torque Select FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSink FastSink FastSink FastSink FastSink FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource FastSource Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Table 7 A Cont PARM HEX NAME UNITS INIT MIN MAX EE FUNCTION CLASSIFICATION PORT 308 134
318. t the filter will be disabled Parameter 714 Process Trim Preload Proc Trim Preload Internal units 4096 1000h 100 Process Trim Preload Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description This parameter is used to preset the integral term of the Process Trim regulator Parameter 715 Process Trim KI Gain Proc Trim KI Internal units gain 3277 Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 1638 Description This parameter controls the integral gain of the Process Trim regulator If KI Process Trim equals 3277 the 1 pu Process Trim PI regulator output will equal 1 pu in 1 second for 1 pu Process Trim error Parameter 716 Process Trim KP Proc Trim KP Internal units gain 4096 Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 4096 Unity Gain Description This parameter controls the Proportional gain of the Process Trim regulator If KP Process Trim is equal to 4096 then 1 pu Process Trim PI regulator output will equal 1 pu for 1 pu Process Trim error Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 717 Process Trim Low Limit Proc Trim Lo Lim Internal units 1000h 4096 1 PU Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 4096 Description The output of the process trim regulator is limited by adjustable high a
319. t B B67N 10HP C4 125 150HP 51 Multi Communication Adapter Port B68N 15HP C5 200HP PS54EN ControlNet Adapter Board Port or B B69N 20HP PZ No Adapter B70N 25HP Dynamic Braking Other Options B71N 30HP D1 2 30HP X1 Auxiliary Contact 1 N O 1 N C B72N 40HP D2 40 60HP standard on 200 HP B73N 50HP D3 75 100HP B74N 60HP D4 125 150HP Multiple options are separated by dashes D5 200HP Limited to one adapter in port A and one adapter in Port B Regenerative B63 2HP B64 3HP B65 5HP B66 7 5HP B67 10HP B68 15HP B69 20HP B70 25HP B71 30HP B72 40HP B73 50HP B74 60HP B75 75HP B76 100HP B77 125HP B78 150HP B79 200HP 1 8 230 Volt AC Input 125 300HP 1395 AT E1 Chapter 1 Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication References P30 P50 X2 First Position Second Position Third Position Fourth Position Bulletin No Horsepower Armature Shunt Options No Letter Letter Letter Type 1395 ATIN 125HP 230V Non Regen EN Shunt P30 Discrete 115 Port A 78 150HP 230V Non Regen El 1000 for P31 Discrete Adapter 24VDC Port A A79N 200HP 230V Non Regen 125HP P32 Digital Reference Adapter 24VDC A80N 250HP 230 Non Regen E2 1500 for Port A ASIN 300HP 230V Non Regen 150 200HP P50 Node Adapter Port B
320. t Value 0 Description When programmed appears as a constant Source Parameter value at Parameter 13 and can be linked to a Sink Parameter ATTENTION For system indirect inputs proper values Min Max limits and polarities must be observed Entering incorrect values limits or polarities could cause the drive to operate in a runaway or erractic condition Parameter 844 SP Indirect 5 SP Indirect 5 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description When programmed appears as a constant Source Parameter value at Parameter 14 and can be linked to a Sink Parameter ATTENTION For system indirect inputs proper values Min Max limits and polarities must be observed Entering incorrect values limits or polarities could cause the drive to operate in a runaway or erractic condition Parameter 900 Trend Constant Signed Value Trend Sign Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies a signed constant value used for trend trigger evaluation This parameter number is entered when programming Trend Operand Parameter X or Y Parameter 901 Trend Constant Signed Value Trend Sign Val Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specif
321. t change Rev 2 N A change diode tape loose insertion Rev 3 Change diode to enhance Vel and Armature Voltage readout stability on the terminal Rev 1 New features added 1 Added P744 Bridge Switch Delay for electro magnet applications 2 Increased P617 Rated AC Voltage Maximum to 690 VAC 3 Increased P610 Rated Motor Voltage Maximum to 850 VDC 4 Enhanced df dt functions to accommodate motor generator switchover 5 Enhanced Encoder Feedback processing Rev 1 Enhanced Autotune feature to work with higher inductance motors e Added P745 K disc Fraction for increased resolution e Added P746 Arm Volt Offset to calibrate Arm Volts Zero 20 volts e Changed P734 K disc default from 1024 to 288 and minimum value from 33 to 4 e Changed P735 KP Armature Loop default from 710 to 2330 e Changed P736 KI Armature Loop default from 90 to 386 e Changed P741 and P742 Current Loop BW minimum from 100 to 40 Rev 1 Renumbered 10 10 firmware to 9 30 to accommodate ITS and DriveTools32 No functional changes Introduction Inspection amp Storage and Publication References Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC Series 2 60 HP 460VAC Series B Table of Contents Chapter 1 Manual Objectives 1 1 Who Should Use This 1 1 Chapter Objective ii eck cee cerca Re rr CHE y Cee 1 1 Sta
322. t ready Conditions required for ready are no Stop input from any logic command no hard or soft fault ECOAST closed less than 1596 armature voltage Contactor Type set correctly Parameter 622 Parameter 620 set to 0 if TB3 is used for reset or not wired The Ready will be set to 0 unless all of the previous conditions are true At current limit Bit 8 A 1 bit field that is set to 1 when the armature current request exceeds the forward or reverse bridge current limit value It is set to O if the armature current request is within the forward and reverse bridge limits The Armature Current Reference Parameter 111 is compared to the forward bridge current limit Parameter 663 and the Reverse Bridge Current Limit Parameter 664 to accomplish this At set speed Bit 9 A 1 bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is within a tolerance of the selected reference speed Otherwise set to O Internally in the drive feedback velocity is compared to the Pre Ramp Velocity reference Parameter 102 and if the difference is within the Up To Speed tolerance Parameter 709 the at speed bit is set to 1 At zero speed Bit 10 A 1 bit field that is set to 1 when the actual velocity of the motor is within a tolerance of zero speed Otherwise set to O Internally in the drive if the Feedback Velocity Parameter 106 is within the Zero Speed Tolerance band Parameter 710 then At Zero Speed bit is set to 1 At Speed 1
323. ta has been sent to the output buffer e Each trend can be deactivated so that it does not monitor for a trigger occurrence e Each trend output buffer can be linked to an external device The rate at which the sampled data is transferred to the external device is also adjustable This feature requires that the trends be set as one shot e Trend buffers can be triggered from other trend buffers This gives you the capability of recording up to 400 consecutive data samples for a given parameter Chapter 5 Functional Description e Once a trend buffer is activated it continuously samples the selected parameter When it is triggered each buffer will take an additional number of samples as specified by the Post Sample Parameter When finished sampling the data is transferred to an output buffer where it can be displayed or sent to an external device An example of a typical trend buffer is shown below Parameter to be monitored Parameter 106 Velocity feedback Trend Trigger operand X Parameter106 Trend Trigger operand Y Parameter 900 signed trend constant The value in 900 will be set to 100 RPM Actual value is entered in Internal Units Trend Operator Greater than GT Samples after trigger 80 Trend sample rate Trend buffer sample rate this will be set to 24 ms Continuous trigger One shot the trend will have to be reset after each trigger Trend Enable Activate Trend Output Rate Output buffer data rate
324. tched or momentary 3 Start the drive when requested to do so by the Program Terminal The drive contactor will pick up and then drop out At this time the program terminal will indicate whether the test was successful If it was continue to the next step otherwise refer to the troubleshooting section The test just performed writes the value of Parameters 734 742 and 741 when option to save in EEPROM is executed Chapter 8 Start Up 8 20 Current Loop Tune This procedure calibrates the current loop gain based on the information generated by the current loop test 1 Select the current tune option Drive Setup Autotune Current Tune on the program terminal 2 Follow the instructions given by the Program Terminal 3 The Program Terminal will indicate when the tuning has been completed The test just performed writes the value of Parameters 735 and 736 when option to save in EEPROM is executed Velocity Loop Motor Test This procedure calculates the motor inertia If the motor inertia is known it can be entered directly into Parameter 613 and you can proceed to the Velocity Loop System Test 1 Verify that the motor is disconnected from the machine the motor is not loaded If the motor cannot be disconnected user must program Parameter 613 based on the motor inertia 2 Select the Velocity Motor Test option Drive Setup Autotune VelMtr Test on the program terminal ATTENTION The Velocity Motor Test closes th
325. terrupted before being input to the Drive at TB5 6 by the use of externally controlled contacts These external contacts may include an external master coast stop contact PLC controlled contacts permissive contacts etc These contacts are illustrated as external control contacts Main contactor M1 coil voltage is controlled within the 1395 through the pilot relay PR contacts Auxilliary contacts on M1 send 115VAC to the Power Stage Interface when M1 is energized This signal is rectified and optically isolated to produce a 5V logic signal CVERIFY which is sent to the Main Control Board Pilot Relay PR Control K2 and contacts in series with the 115VAC Coast Stop input to the drive control coil voltage to the Pilot Relay ECOAST Stop The ECOAST STOP as defined and illustrated is a contingency circuit designed to stop the motor in the event of a malfunction in the solid state interface drive software When an ECOAST Stop is initiated the DC loop contactor is de energized and the motor will coast to a stop Relay K2 on the Power Stage Interface is the ECOAST stop relay and is controlled by 24VDC As shown in Figure 4 13 24VDC from the Power Stage Interface is connected to TB3 12 and 11 At this point an external 24VDC ECOAST stop contact could be used to control the application of 24VDC to K2 through TB3 9 TB3 12 and 10 should always be jumpered together to provide a return path for 24VDC If an external 24 VDC ECOAS
326. ters are categorized into two types 1 Source Parameters 2 Sink Parameters Parameter A memory location used to store drive data Each parameter is given a number called the parameter number The parameter value may be specified in decimal or in hexidecimal When specified in hexidecimal a letter h will appear after the parameter number Programming Terminal Device used for programming monitoring operation and performing diagnostic functions on the 1395 drive The Programming Terminal is provided in two packages Digital Handheld Terminal and Door Mounted Terminal Programming Parameter Parameters used to store information required by the drive in order to perform the regulation functions of the drive The following equipment is required for start up and tuning e Multimeter capable of 1000VDC 750VAC with input resistance of at least 1 megohm Test Leads for multimeter e Assorted screwdrivers Phillips and blade and a set of open end wrenches e Clamp on Ammeter AC and DC with current ratings to match drive ratings e Programming Terminal The following equipment is recommended for start up and tuning e Dual trace oscilloscope with A minus B quasi differential capability e X100 probes for oscilloscope Only qualified electrical technicians and or electrical engineers familiar with solid state controls and circuitry should attempt a 1395 start up It is imperative that personnel familiarize themselves w
327. the door mounted terminal shown in Figure 4 14 can be used to perform the following functions Monitor real time parameter values e Change parameter values e Start Stop the drive depending on Model of Programming Terminal e Sets drive configuration Backup parameter values to EEPROM Monitor fault information Interface between the 1395 Main Control Board and the handheld Programming Terminal is accomplished using a 9 pin type connector physically mounted on the end of TB3 The cable coming from the D shell connector is connected to J4 on the Main Control Board For a detailed description of the Programming Terminal refer to the Programming Terminal Installation and Operation Manual Figure 4 14 Programming Terminal ALLEN BRADLEY ey LOCAL PROGRAMMING TERMINAL REMOTE AB0446A Note The Programming Terminal can be hand held or door mounted when used with the mounting kit Chapter 4 Hardware Description 125 300 HP 230VAC 250 600 HP 460VAC Adapter Boards External control devices such as a PLC discrete operators devices etc are interfaced with the Main Control Board through one of the two Microbus ports labeled PORT A J7 and PORT B J6 on the Main Control Board The Microbus is a 60 line bus designed specifically fo
328. the drive to operate as a torque regulated drive and still have the velocity control operational In this case the drive can receive both a velocity reference and a torque reference at the same time The Torque Reference Select block selects from either the output of the Velocity Control or the External Torque Reference or both depending on the mode of operation being commanded from the Drive Logic Control block The reference which is selected is scaled based on the motor ratings to a current reference Armature Current Control Armature current reference is compared to the Armature Current Feedback derived from the output of the current transformers CT s The Armature Current Control block produces a Voltage Reference which is applied to the Armature Sync and Firing Logic In addition the Armature Current Control monitors the Three Phase AC Voltage and Armature Voltage Feedback Armature Sync and Firing Logic The Voltage Reference output from the Armature Current Control is converted to a phase angle reference and then a time reference The signal is then synchronized to the incoming three phase line to produce the gate firing pulse for the SCRs located in the Armature Bridge The Logic also provides synchronizing information to the Field Sync and Firing Logic Field Flux Control The Field Current Control uses the Field Flux Reference from the Velocity Control to develop a field current reference This reference is then compared to
329. tion amp Storage and Publication References List of User Manuals for 1395 and 2361 Drives PUB NO PUB DATE DESCRIPTION F W VER STATUS 1395 5 6 Feb 1989 User Manual Current Rated Drives Ver 2 3 OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 11 Aug 1989 User Manual Current Rated Drives Ver 3 XX OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 11 001 1991 User Manual Supplement HP Rated Drives Ver 4 XX OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 40 Oct 2002 User Manual HP Rated Drives Ver 5 X CURRENT 10 10 9 30 1395 5 70 Nov 1995 User Manual HP Rated Drives 800 1250 Ver5 X 8 X OBSOLETE FIRMWARE HP 2250 A Series A 2361 5 01 Jul 1998 User Manual 1250 1650 3000A Series C CURRENT 1395 5 1 Sep 1988 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 2 XX OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 7 Apr 1989 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 2 3 OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 12 Aug 1989 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 3 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 12 Apr 1993 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 4 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 12 May 1994 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 4 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 12 Feb 1995 Discrete Adapter Manual Ver 4 10 CURRENT 1395 52 J ul 1989 Node Adapter I amp O Manual Ver 2 3 OBSOLETE FIRMWARE 1395 5 9 Aug 1989 Node Adapter I amp O Manual Ver 3 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 9 May 1994 Node Adapter I amp O Manual Ver 3 XX OBSOLETE Use Current 1395 5 9 Feb 1995 Node Adapter I amp O Manual Ver 3 XX OBSOLETE Use
330. tion or as required 24VDC Connection A properly sized 24VDC power supply is required to power the 24 volt inputs Digital Reference Input The Digital Reference Adapter Board contains one digital reference command for the drive The board is set up by default for the encoder input signal to be single channel dual edge i e both the rising and falling edges are used by the counting logic The hardware is configured for 5VDC signal inputs with jumpers J6 and J7 in the 1 2 position For a 12VDC signal the jumpers must be placed in the 2 3 position ATTENTION To guard against possible component damage ensure that jumpers are positioned correctly Figure 6 22 shows the typical encoder connection used as a signal for the digital reference input This encoder can be machine mounted or mounted on the motor of the lead section Figure 6 22 Encoder Connections Encoder TB3 ENCODER CHA ENCODER CHA ENCODER CH B ENCODER CH B 12VDC POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY COMMON Chapter 6 Installation Figure 6 23
331. tput of Trend Buffer 3 is linked to parameter Description TREND 3 Operand Parameter X TREND 3 Operand Parameter Y TREND 3 Operator TREND 3 sample rate TREND 3 post samples TREND 3 multiple trigger TREND 3 enable TREND 3 output rate a Trend Buffer 4 is linked to parameter Table 9 F Parameter Range 0 99 22 OFF ON OFF ON 0 004 through 30 seconds Trend Buffer Parameters cont The output of Trend Buffer 4 is linked to parameter Description TREND 4 Operand Parameter X TREND 4 Operand Parameter Y TREND 4 Operator TREND 4 sample rate TREND 4 post samples TREND 4 multiple trigger TREND 4 enable TREND 4 output rate 2 2 2 945 047 Parameter Range 99 oj Param Value Param Value Param Value 9 9 Chapter 9 Reference Materials Alphabetical Parameter Reference Listing 9 10 PARAMETER NAME ABS Overspeed AC Line Voltage Accel Time Arm Bridge Type Arm Current Firing Angle Arm Current PI Output Arm Current Reference Arm Current Fdbk Arm Resistance Arm Voltage Fdbk Arm Voltage Offset At Speed 1 5 Auto Tune I Lim Auto Tune Speed Base Motor Speed Bridge Switch Delay CEMF Feedback CEMF Reference CEMF Reg Preload Contactor Type Cur Damp Factor Cur Desired BW Cur Max BW Decel Time Desired Contour DI DT Limit Drive Fault Droop Filter Droop Percent Encoder Velocity Encoder PPR End Taper Speed Ext Overtemp
332. ts 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base speed 100 Description This parameter establishes a band around zero speed that will be used to determine when to update the At Zero Speed bit Parameter 100 bit 10 in the Logic Status word This output is checked using the same method as At Speed 1 and 2 except the set point is fixed at zero speed Parameter 711 Jog Dwell Jog Dwell Internal units Seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 0 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 0 Description This parameter specifies dwell time before the contactor opens after completing a jog function 7 60 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 713 Process Trim Filter Constant Proc Trim Fltr K Internal units 4096 1000h 100 process trim filtering Programming Terminal units percent of maximum process trim filtering Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 096 Description This parameter determines the gain of a single pole filter used in the Process Trim The input to the filter is the difference between the Process Trim Reference Parameter 161 and the Process Trim Feedback Parameter 162 The output of the filter is used as the input to the process trim PI regulator 100 Process Trim Filtering provides the maximum filtering effect When 0 is used for the Process Trim Filter constan
333. ts proper values Min Max limits and polarities must be observed Entering incorrect values limits or polarities could cause the drive to operate in a runaway or erractic condition Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 841 SP Indirect 2 SP Indirect 2 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description When programmed appears as a constant Source Parameter value at Parameter 11 and can be linked to a Sink Parameter ATTENTION For system indirect inputs proper values Min Max limits and polarities must be observed Entering incorrect values limits or polarities could cause the drive to operate in a runaway or erractic condition Parameter 842 SP Indirect 3 SP Indirect 3 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 0 Description When programmed appears as a constant Source Parameter value at Parameter 12 and can be linked to a Sink Parameter ATTENTION For system indirect inputs proper values Min Max limits and polarities must be observed Entering incorrect values limits or polarities could cause the drive to operate in a runaway or erractic condition Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 843 SP Indirect 4 SP Indirect 4 Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 32767 Maximum Value 32767 Defaul
334. ts via PLC RIO require system reset or cycling of control power Process trim enable Bit 15 A 1 bit field that will make the Process trim function active when set to 1 The Process Trim Reference and Feedback Parameters 161 162 will be used to generate the Process Trim Output Parameter 119 When this bit is set to O the Process Trim Output is set to zero and the Process Trim Reference and Feedback inputs are not used Parameter 151 Logic Command 2 Logic 2 Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit Field Description This word controls Drive logic operation when the Command Enable bit in Logic Command 1 and Logic Command 3 is low 0 The Stop request bit in Logic Command 2 is active regardless of the Command Enable selection status All other functions present in Logic Command 2 are identical to Logic Command 1 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 152 Logic Command 3 Logic Cmd 3 Internal units None Programming Terminal units Bit Field Description This controls Drive logic operation when the Programming Terminal is in control of the Drive All functions present in Logic Command 3 are identical to Logic Command 1 The Command Enable bit in logic command 3 will select Drive control with logic command 3 if set regardless of the state of the Command Enable bit in other logic words The Stop bit in logic command word 3 is logically OR D with the Stop bits in logic command word 1 and 2
335. tune 699 2BBH Auto Tune Speed RPM B S BS B S EE Auto Tuning Setup Autotune 700 2BCH Vel Desired BW Rad Sec 5 0 1 150 EE Auto Tuning Setup Autotune 701 2BDH Vel Max BW Rad Sec 50 50 150 EE X Auto Tuning Setup Autotune 702 2BEH Vel Damp Factor 1 0 1 0 3 0 EE X Auto Tuning Setup Autotune 703 2BFH System Inertia Sec 2 0 2 0 655 0 EE X Auto Tuning Setup Autotune 704 2C0H At Speed 1 RP 0 0 6xB S EE Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 105 2C1H At Speed 2 RP BS 8 BS 8 16xB S EE X Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 106 2C2H At Speed 3 RP BS 4 BS 4 6xB S EE X Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 107 2C3H At Speed 4 RP BS 2 BS 2 16xB S EE X Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 108 2C4H At Speed 5 RP BS BS 16xB S Velocity Ref Cntrl Spd Ref 709 2C5H Up To Speed Tol RP BS 100 6xB S B S 10 EE Logic Control Set Up 710 2C6H Zero Speed Tol RP BS 100 0 16xB S EE Logic Control S et U p 711 2C7H 09 Dwell SEC 0 0 6553 5 EE Logic Control S et U p 713 2C9H Proc Trim 0 0 100 EE Process Trim Control S et Up 714 2CAH Proc Trim P reload 0 32767 32767 EE Process Trim Control S et Up 715 2CBH Proc Trim KI 1638 0 32767 EE Process Trim Control S et Up 7 12 PARM 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 780 840 841 842 843 844 900 901 902 903 HEX 2CCH 2CDH 2CEH 2CFH DOH D1H D2H D4H D5H D6H D7H D8H D9H DAH DBH DCH DDH DEH DFH 2E0H 2E1H 2E2H
336. uce 37 5 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current Parameter 681 Field Current at 4 8 Flux Fld I 4 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 33 1 Description This is the fifth entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 50 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current 7 52 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 682 Field Current at 5 8 Flux Fld I 5 8 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 45 596 Description This is the sixth entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 62 5 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of inte
337. ue 32767 Default Value 168 Description The integral gain for the PI regulator in the field current loop 7 66 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 739 K Armature Volts K Arm Volts Internal units 10 x armature volts maximum A D input Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 3000 Maximum Value 25000 Default Value 12500 Description A parameter which scales the analog armature voltage 2 5 volt 2 512 value into ten times the actual armature voltage K ARM VOLT should be equal to ten times the armature voltage required to produce 5 volts on TP 27 The typical value depends on the feedback board installed in the Drive The typical value for a 500 V feedback board is 12500 and the Typical value for a 240 V feedback board is 6400 The Programming Terminal can be used to to determine the proper value for K ARM Volt With the motor rotating at some nominal speed to produce armature voltage enter the typical value for K ARM VOLT Measure the armature voltage to the motor while the motor is rotating and compare it to the value on the Programming Terminal at Parameter 105 Increase K ARM VOLT if the armature voltage read from the Programming Terminal is low or decrease it if the armature voltage reading is too high Parameter 740 AC Volts AC Volts Internal units 10 x AC volts maximum A D input Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 2000 Maximum Value 15000 Default Value 7225 Des
338. ue and the output of the velocity speed regulator The external torque reference input should be scaled so that a value of 4096 represents 10046 rated motor torque This is the torque that the motor would produce when operating at rated armature current and rated field current Parameter 159 Flux Feed Forward Flux Feed Fwd Internal units 4096 1000h 1 pu 100 motor field flux Programming Terminal units Percent of full motor field flux Description This word supplies an external flux reference to the Drive The drive will use this input when the External Feed Forward Enable Bit is set in Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 This input could be used to bypass the flux calculation in the flux control software The flux calculation produces a flux command that is inversely proportional to speed when motor speeds are above the Minimum Field Regulate Speed 7 30 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 160 Reference Reference Internal units 4096 1000h 100 motor CEMF Programming Terminal units Percent of full motor CEMF Description This word supplies a n external CEMF reference to the flux control This input would be used when it is desired to operate the field flux control in the CEMF mode of operation The Drive will use this input when the CEMF Control Enable bit is set in Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 The flux control will use the CEMF reference input as both the variable in the flu
339. uired by the microbus before being input to the microbus Port The processing of data is accomplished through the use of the following adapter boards Figure 2 12 Construction and Location of Adapter Boards 0653 Chapter 2 Hardware Description 1 30 HP 230VAC 2 60 HP 460VAC Discrete Adapter Board Digital Reference Adapter Board 2 16 The Discrete Adapter Board connects directly to the Main Control Board using Port A of the Microbus interface All user connections to the board are made at Terminal Block TB 3 located at the bottom of the 1395 Drive Digital Inputs The Discrete Adapter Board contains four discrete inputs and is available in 120VAC or 24VDC versions These optically coupled inputs provide a means for external control of the 1395 via pushbuttons relays switches etc The inputs are preconfigured for the following signals STOP JOG START CLEAR FAULT Digital Outputs Two discrete outputs are provided through control of two on board relays The contact rating is 0 6A at 125 VAC and 0 2A at 30VDC These outputs allow the 1395 to signal various operating states of the Drive The outputs
340. ult conditions are incurred To provide for electrical interference suppression The general grounding concept for the 1395 is shown in Figure 6 4 and explained below Ground PE Is the safety ground required by code The ground bus can be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist or a floor ground loop provided grounding points comply with NEC regulations Multiple connections are permitted but Do Not ground at the same point as the Zero Potential Bus TE The minimum distance between Ground and Zero Potential Bus is 10 feet 3 meters The ground bus requires a maximum of 1 ohm resistance to ground Power Feeder Each power feeder from the substation transformer to the drive must be provided with properly sized ground cables Simply utilizing the conduit or cable armor as a ground is not adequate The conduit or cable armor and ground wires should be bonded to substation ground at both ends Each transformer enclosure and or frame must be bonded to ground at a minimum of two locations Motor Connection Each DC motor frame must be bonded to grounded building steel within 20 feet 6 meters of its location and tied to the drives PE via ground wires within the power cables and or conduit Bond the conduit or cable armor to ground at both ends The ground wire size and installation must be per NEC Article 250 Zero Potential Bus TE Must be connected to an earth ground by a continuous separate lead insulated
341. ult Value 65535 Description This parameter controls feed forward gain of the velocity regulator Setting the KF gain to a value less than one reduces velocity feedback overshoot in response to a step change in velocity reference The velocity loop response to a step change in load is unaffected by the KF term Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 663 Forward Bridge Current Limit Fwd Brdg Cur Lim Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated motor current Programming Terminal units Percent of rated motor current Minimum Value 0 02496 Maximum Value 260 Default Value 5096 Description This parameter specifies the largest allowable positive motor armature current that will be commanded Attempts by the speed regulator to exceed this level will be limited to this value Parameter 664 Reverse Bridge Current Limit Rev Brdg Cur Lim Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated motor current Programming Terminal units Percent of rated motor current Minimum Value 0 02496 Maximum Value 260 Default Value 5096 Description This parameter specifies the largest allowable negative motor armature current that will be commanded Attempts by the speed regulator to exceed this level will be limited Parameter 665 Start Taper Speed Strt Taper Speed Internal units 4096 1000h 1 PU base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value Base Motor Speed 4096 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base mot
342. units 4096 100 rated motor voltage Programming Terminal units Volts Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the value of CEMF used as a feedback value for the CEMF PI regulator in the drive It is calculated by subtracting the motor IR drop from the actual Armature Voltage Feedback The Armature Resistance Parameter 614 is used to calculate the motor IR Drop Parameter 121 Flux Trim FLUX TRIM Internal units 4096 100 rated motor voltage Programming Terminal units Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the value of Field Flux Trim from the output CEMF regulator in the Drive Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 122 Encoder Velocity ENCODER VELOCITY Internal units 4096 base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the measured velocity feedback from the encoder feedback Parameter 123 Velocity PI Output VELOCITY PI OUT Internal units 4096 100 rated motor torque Programming Terminal units 96 Minimum Value N A Maximum Value N A Default Value N A Function Software Test Point Description This is the value of the output of the Velocity PI Regulator This value will match the value in Torque Command Param 110 when in Speed Mode param 6
343. ux Fld I 1 0 FLUX Internal units 4096 1000h 100 rated field current Programming Terminal units Percent rated field current Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 10096 Description This is the eighth entry in a 9 element lookup table for converting flux reference commands to field current reference The lookup conversion is used to linearize the field current reference with respect to flux This value corresponds to the field current required to produce 100 46 rated armature volts when the motor is running at base speed and is in terms of internal units where 4096 100 rated field current This should always be 100 Parameter 686 Field Weakened Speed Fld Weaken Speed Internal units 4096 1000h base motor speed Programming Terminal units RPM Minimum Value base speed 8 Maximum Value 6 x base speed Default Value base motor speed Description This parameter specifies the speed at which field weakening control and CEMF regulation begins Field weakening and CEMF operation is enabled by setting bits in the Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 A typical value used for the Field Weakened Speed is base motor speed Parameter 687 Reg Preload CEMF Reg Preload Internal units 4096 1000H 1 pu Flux Programming Terminal units Percent of unity flux Minimum Value 799 9 Maximum Value 799 9 Default Value 0 Description This parameter is associated with the CEMF reset function bit 5 in Pa
344. value of 10 of flux command Parameter 673 KP Flux KP Flux Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 4096 Description This parameter controls the proportional gain of the CEMF Regulator For example If KP flux is equal to 32767 then 1 PU CEMF error will produce 1 pu flux command Parameter 674 Field Economy Reference Fld Economy Ref Internal units 4096 1000h 100 full motor flux Programming Terminal units percent of full motor field flux Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 100 Default Value 5096 Description This parameter specifies the full flux reference value for the motor when field economy has been enabled in Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 The flux specified by this parameter will be in use when the motor has been stopped for the time specified in Field Economy Delay Parameter 675 Parameter 675 Field Economy Delay Fld Economy Dly Internal units seconds x 10 Programming Terminal units Seconds Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 6553 5 Default Value 30 0 Description This parameter specifies the time delay in seconds after the contactor opens before selection of field economy flux reference This parameter is applicable only when field economy has been enabled by setting a bit in the Flux Mode Select Parameter 627 7 50 Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 676 Field Flux Reference Fld Flux Ref Internal units
345. ve Drive The armature bridge has 6 SCRs 1 Regenerative Drive The armature bridge consists of 12 SCRs Chapter 7 Programming Parameters Parameter 734 K Discontinuous K Discontinuous Internal units 1024 400h Full load current Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 4 Maximum Value 2048 Default Value 288 Description Represents the average value of current feedback at the cross over point between discontinuous and continuous armature current Used to linearize the armature current loop and calculate the armature current loop gains Parameter 735 KP Armature Loop KP Armature Loop Internal units 4096 unity gain Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 2330 Description The proportional gain for the PI regulator in the armature current loop Parameter 736 KI Armature Loop KI Armature Loop Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 386 Description The integral gain for the PI regulator in the armature current loop Parameter 737 KP Field Loop KP Field Loop Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 32767 Default Value 16384 Description The proportional gain for the PI regulator in the field current loop Parameter 738 KI Field Loop KI Field Loop Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Val
346. vides field current feedback information to the feedback board at TB8 and 9 The feedback board rectifies the single phase feedback and scales the DC voltage using a burden resistor selected by the position of Jumper J1 on the feedback board before being sent to the power stage interface The DC voltage representing field current feedback is passed directly through the power stage interface and sent to the main control board Surge Suppression Surge suppressor 3MOV protects the field power bridge from high voltage line spikes and line surges on the incoming AC line 2MOV protects the motor field windings from line spikes on the output of the field bridge Line Choke Line Choke CH8 protects the field power bridge SCRs from rapid rate of current changes SCR Modules Field bridge SCRs are contained in modules made up of two SCRs per package PM7 and 8 Field Pulse Transformer and Snubber Board The Field Pulse Transformer Board provides the gate firing pulses and switching voltage transient dv dt protection for the field SCRs Bridge Output Connections The output of the field bridge is connected to TB2 1 and 2 which in turn is connected to the field leads of the motor The terminal labeled F on TB2 is connected to the F1 lead of the motor and terminal F to the F2 lead 3 5 Chapter 3 Hardware Description 40 100 230VAC 75 200 HP 460VAC Figure 3 4 Field Bridge Components See Fig 6 9 3 12
347. w Limit 717 7 62 Process Trim Low Sum 721 7 63 Process Trim Output Gain 719 7 62 Process Trim Output 119 7 23 Process Trim PI Input 125 7 24 Process Trim Preload 714 7 61 Process Trim Reference 161 7 31 Process Trim Select 628 7 40 Programming Trend Buffer 5 21 Programming Parameters Data Types 7 3 Definition 8 2 Drive Parameters 7 1 Listing 7 5 Numerical Listing 7 15 Parameter Table 7 3 Parameter Table Storage 7 4 Programming Terminal 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 1 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 14 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives 4 1 4 18 125 300 HP 250 600 HP Drives Illustration 4 18 40 100 HP 75 200 HP Drives 3 1 3 19 40 100 75 200 HP Drives Illustration 3 19 Definition 8 2 PSI Switcher Board 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 8 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Illustration 2 8 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives Jumper Settings 2 9 Publication References 1 10 Pulse Transformer Snubber Boards 40 100 75 200 HP Drives 3 4 Pulse Transformers 1 30 HP 2 60 HP Drives 2 4 1 12 R Ramp Control Block Diagram 5 33 Ramp Velocity Reference 103 7 20 Rated AC Line Voltage 617 7 35 Rated Armature Bridge Current 8 10 Rated Armature Bridge Current 615 7 35 Rated Field Bridge Current Settings 8 11 Rated Field Bridge Current 616 7 35 Rated Field Motor Current 612 7 34 Rated Motor Voltage 610 7 34 Real Time Data Definition 7 2 Reference Materials 9 1 Relative Humidity Altitude 1
348. well 711 7 60 Jog Ramp Enable 626 7 39 K AC Volts 740 7 67 K Armature Volts 739 7 67 K Discontinuous Fraction 745 7 70 K Discontinuous 734 7 66 KF Velocity Loop 661 7 47 KI Armature Loop 736 7 66 KI Field Loop 738 7 66 KI Flux 672 7 50 KI Velocity Loop 659 7 47 Kn Filter 692 7 56 KP Armature Loop 735 7 66 KP Field Loop 737 7 66 KP Flux 673 7 50 KP Velocity Loop 660 7 47 Logic Command 1 150 7 25 Logic Command 2 151 7 28 Logic Command 3 152 7 29 Logic Status 100 7 16 Maintained Start 624 7 38 Maximum Current Loop Bandwidth 742 7 68 Minimum Tapered Current 667 7 49 Mop Accel 1 641 7 43 1 10 Accel 2 642 7 43 Mop Accel 3 643 7 43 Mop Accel 4 644 7 44 Mop Decel 1 645 7 44 Mop Decel 2 646 7 44 Mop Decel 3 647 7 44 Mop Decel 4 648 7 45 Mop Max Speed 649 7 45 Mop Min Speed 650 7 45 Motor Armature Full Load Amp 611 7 34 Motor Inertia 613 7 34 Motor Overload Select 629 7 40 Overload Pending Level 720 7 62 Position Error 109 7 21 Position Feedback 107 7 21 Pre Ramp Velocity Reference 102 7 20 Preset Speed 1 633 7 41 Preset Speed 2 634 7 42 Preset Speed 3 635 7 42 Preset Speed 4 636 7 42 Preset Speed 5 637 7 42 Process Trim Feedback 162 7 31 Process Trim Filter Constant 713 7 61 Process Trim High Limit 718 7 62 Process Trim High Sum 722 7 63 Process Trim KI Gain 715 7 61 Process Trim KP 716 7
349. x calculation and also as the reference input to the CEMF regulator The flux calculation produces a flux command that is inversely proportional to speed when motor speeds are above the Field Weakening Speed Parameter 686 Parameter 161 Process Trim Reference Process Trim Ref Internal units 4096 1000h Programming Terminal units None Description This is the reference input value for Velocity Trim When the Process Trim function has been enabled by setting the Trim Enable bit in the Logic Command parameter then this input will be used by the process trim PI regulator Process trim will then update the Process Trim Output Parameter 119 based on the value of this input Parameter 162 Process Trim Feedback Process Trim Fdbk Internal units 4096 1000h Ipu Programming Terminal units None Description This is the feedback value for Process Trim When the Process Trim has been enabled by setting the Process Trim Enable bit in the Logic Command parameter then this input will be used by the process trim PI regulator Process Trim will then update the Process Trim Output parameter based on the value of this input Parameter 163 Velocity Indirect 1 Vel Indirect 1 Internal units Programming Terminal units Description This is the Fast Sink with its pointer in Parameter 600 Velocity Parameter Select 1 Parameter 164 Velocity Indirect 2 Vel Indirect 2 Internal units Programming Terminal units
350. xternal dry 24 VDC ECOAST stop contact could be used to control the application of 24VDC to K2 through TB3 9 TB3 12 and 10 should always be jumpered together to provide a return path for 24VDC If an external 24VDC ECOAST Stop contact is not used then TB3 9 and 11 must be jumpered In addition to the 24 VDC ECOAST Stop there is an 115 VAC ECOAST Stop circuit which is also provided as standard in the 1395 115VAC enters the power stage interface from TBS and is distributed to TB3 4 Between TB3 4 and 5 an external dry ECOAST Stop contact may be connected If an external 115 VAC ECOAST stop circuit is not used TB3 4 and 5 must be jumpered 115VAC is returned to the Power Stage Interface from TB3 5 and sent to contacts of K2 From here it proceeds to the contacts of K3 on the Power Stage Interface The 115VAC ECOAST Stop Signal is also sent to an isolation circuit which converts the 115VAC to a 5VDC control Signal ECOAST which is sent to the Main Control Board Main Control Relay K3 on the Power Stage Interface is the main control relay which controls turn on voltage to the coil of the pilot relay PR K3 is controlled by logic signals from the Main Control board entering the Power Stage Interface through ribbon connector J9 The two signals which control K3 are the SYSTRIP and the DCPILOT signals In order for K3 to energize PR there must be no system fault and there must be a DC pilot relay turn on command If both these conditions are
351. y Loop System Test The system test calculates the inertia of the system that is connected to the motor by running the drive system through a defined velocity profile When the profile is complete torques and acceleration deceleration times are used to calculate System Inertia Parameter 703 As with the motor test the maximum velocity that the motor and system will run at is determined by Parameter 699 n order to obtain accurate results the motor must be connected to the load system process or machine Velocity Loop Tune This function calibrates the velocity loop gains Parameters 659 and 660 based on the results of the motor and system tests These tests should be run prior to attempting to tune the velocity loop to assure that the drive has the latest information Chapter 5 Functional Description Field Flux Tuning Trending 5 18 The Field Flux Tuning function calculates the field current values required to obtain specific field flux levels and calibrates the flux parameters accordingly Field Flux Tuning is not performed if Armature Voltage Feedback is used as the feedback device type Parameter 621 It also calculates the rated field current and adjusts the Rated Field Current Parameter 612 as required The field flux tuning function does not control the motor speed directly This is done to allow the function to calibrate the drive regardless of the drive regulator type For example speed regulated torque r
352. y more than 50 of field current reference before a field loss condition is indicated Parameter 731 Tach Loss Tach Loss Internal Units 4096 1000h 100 of full CEMF Programming Terminal Units Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 50 Default Value 10 01 Description To open window increase P731 and decrease P732 This parameter sets the CEMF level above which a Tach or encoder Loss Fault will occur CEMF is obtained from the Armature Voltage Feedback level less the calculated IR drop Units for this parameter are in percent of full CEMF The velocity feedback must also be less than the level set by Parameter 732 for a Tach Loss fault to be detected Parameter 732 Tach Loss Velocity Tach Loss Vel Internal Units 4096 1000h 100 base motor speed Programming Terminal Units 96 Minimum Value 0 244 Maximum Value 50 Default Value 2 002 Description This parameter sets the velocity feedback level below which a Tach or encoder Loss Fault will occur Units for this parameter are in percent of base motor speed The CEMF level must also be greater than the level set by Parameter 731 for a Tach Loss fault to be detected Parameter 733 Armature Bridge Type Arm Bridge Type Internal units None Programming Terminal units None Minimum Value 0 Maximum Value 1 Default Value 1 Description Selects the type of armature bridge regenerative or nonregenerative The choices are 0 Nonregenerati

User Guide - Galco Industrial Electronics

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents